JP7345906B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In a gaming machine, for example, Patent Document 1 discloses that a production operation device is provided on the right side of a ball tray, and the production operation device is provided with a production operation lever that can be moved between a storage position and an operable position. Disclosed. Further, it is disclosed that an operation input regarding a game performance is performed by tilting a performance operation lever located at an operable position.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2018-187116

By the way, for example, when a player operates an operable operation means violently or otherwise without paying attention to the operation means, the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the gaming machine. Otherwise, the operating means may be damaged. Furthermore, if the player is not paying attention to the presence of the operating means, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with the operating means.
An object of the present invention is to alert players regarding operating means.

The present invention that achieves the above object is realized as a gaming machine as follows. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) has a first operation means (for example, production button 161B) that can be operated by the player, and a second operation means that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operation means. An operating means (for example, the production lever 161L), an attention-calling means (for example, the attention-calling sticker 41) that calls the player's attention regarding the second operation means, and a variation that displays the production symbols in a variable manner and then stops displaying them. A performance control means (for example, a performance control unit 300) capable of executing a performance, and the attention-calling means includes a warning character (for example, a lever attention-calling unit 411) that calls attention to the action performed by the second operation means. ), the effect control means is capable of executing a first operation effect that prompts an operation on the first operation means, and is capable of executing a second operation effect that urges an operation on the second operation means. A first specific image can be displayed when executing the first operation effect, and includes a predetermined image imitating at least a part of the second operation means when executing the second operation effect. A second specific image can be displayed, and the display mode of the second specific image includes a first mode and a second mode that can be displayed after the first mode is displayed , and the second specific image is displayed in a second mode. The size of the display area of the second specific image is different from the size of the display area of the first specific image, and when the first specific image is displayed, a predetermined background image can be displayed; When a specific image is displayed, a specific background image can be displayed, and the action performed by the second operating means is to start displaying the second specific image in the first mode while the variable effect is being executed. This is an effect that can be performed later and before the start of displaying the second specific image in the second mode, and the display mode of the predetermined image includes a first display mode and a first display mode different from the first display mode. There are two display modes, and when displaying the second specific image of the first mode, the predetermined image can be displayed in the first display mode and then displayed in the second display mode, and the second specific image can be displayed in the second display mode. When displaying the second specific image, the predetermined image can be displayed in a second display mode .

In addition, the above-mentioned numerals in this column are added as examples when explaining the present invention, and the present invention is not limited or reduced by these numerals.

According to the present invention, it is possible to call the player's attention regarding the operating means.

FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. (a) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display disposed at the lower left of the game board, and (b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko game machine. It is a diagram showing the internal configuration of a control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an image/sound control section and a lamp control section according to the present embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the game control section of the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the operation of basic processing by the game control section. It is a flowchart showing the operation of processing when the power is cut off by the game control section. It is a flowchart showing the main control processing of the game control section. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a starting port switch process. 3 is a flowchart showing the contents of gate switch processing. It is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol processing. It is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot determination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing the contents of a variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of processing during suspension. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a customer waiting setting process. It is a flowchart showing the contents of normal symbol processing. It is a flowchart showing the contents of the big winning opening process. It is a flowchart showing the contents of gaming state setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of electric tulip processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the random number used in this Embodiment, (a) is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot random number, (b) is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot symbol random number, and (c ) is a diagram showing an example of the structure of a reach random number, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of the structure of a winning random number. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a variation pattern and a table used in variation pattern selection processing. It is a block diagram explaining the example of composition of RAM of a game control part, (a) is a block diagram showing the composition of the storage area, and (b) is a block diagram showing the composition of each of the storage parts shown in (a). It is. It is a block diagram explaining the example of composition of RAM of a performance control part, (a) is a block diagram showing the composition of a reservation storage area, and (b) is a block diagram showing each composition of the storage part shown in (a). It is a diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the content of preliminary determination processing. 2A and 2B are diagrams showing the structure of a command, in which (a) is a diagram showing the data structure of the command, and (b) is a diagram showing the structure of the command as a bit string. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a command storage area in a RAM. 5 is a flowchart showing the content of output processing by an output control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the operation|movement of a production control part, (a) is a figure which shows main processing, (b) is a figure which shows interrupt processing. 7 is a flowchart showing the contents of command reception processing. 27 is a flowchart showing the contents of the advance judgment performance selection process and the performance selection process of FIG. 26. 27 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot effect selection process of FIG. 26. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the ending effect selection process of FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting command reception process of FIG. 26. It is a flowchart which shows the content of production button processing. It is an explanatory view of the performance operation device of this embodiment. It is a partial plan view of a frame member. (A) is a diagram showing the front side of the caution sticker, and (B) is a diagram showing the back side of the caution sticker. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a portion of the frame member to which a warning sticker is attached and a portion near the portion. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a worker applies a warning sticker to a frame member using a jig. It is a diagram showing the positional relationship between a production lever, a handle, and an attention-calling sticker. It is a figure which shows the attention-calling means of a modification. It is a diagram showing the displacement amount of the production button and the displacement amount of the production lever. It is a figure showing a production lever of a modification. It is a diagram showing a variable production pattern table for a jackpot in a low probability time saving no-gaming state. It is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern table for small wins and losses in a low probability time saving no-gaming state. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation performance of the decorative pattern which a performance control part uses an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation performance of the decorative pattern which a performance control part uses an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation performance of the decorative pattern which a performance control part uses an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation performance of the decorative pattern which a performance control part uses an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation performance of the decorative pattern which a performance control part uses an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation performance of the decorative pattern which a performance control part uses an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation performance of the decorative pattern which a performance control part uses an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation performance of the decorative pattern which a performance control part uses an image display part. It is an explanatory diagram of a period in which operation of the production lever is valid in variable production example 3 and a period in which operation of the production button is valid in variable production example 4. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation performance of the decorative pattern which a performance control part uses an image display part. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the fluctuation|variation performance of the decorative pattern which a performance control part uses an image display part. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting a performance by a player's operation. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing another example of adjusting the volume and the amount of light. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of settings for automatic operation. It is a figure which showed the example of a setting of the effect in a modification. It is a figure showing a modification of a pseudo-continuous performance. It is a diagram showing another modification of the pseudo-continuous performance. It is a diagram showing another modification of the pseudo-continuous performance. It is a diagram showing another modification of the pseudo-continuous performance. FIG. 2 is an overall view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 3 is a side view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a game slot in Embodiment 2. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a first starting port unit provided with a first starting port according to a second embodiment. It is a diagram showing the pachinko game machine in a state where the glass door frame is open. It is a back view of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine is seen from the rear side. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a contact warning sticker of Embodiment 2. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an operation warning sticker of Embodiment 2; FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a spec sticker of Embodiment 2. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a display sticker of Embodiment 2. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a light warning sticker, a fraud prevention warning sticker, and a board number sticker of Embodiment 2; FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a certificate stamp seal of Embodiment 2. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a frame warning sticker of Embodiment 2; FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a board warning sticker of Embodiment 2; FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a frame number sticker of Embodiment 2. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a handling caution sticker of Embodiment 2; FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a sub-ROM seal according to the second embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a main board management seal, a main board seal, and a main ROM seal according to the second embodiment. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a voltage seal of Embodiment 2. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of modification example 1 of a warning-related sticker. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of a second modification of a sticker regarding an alert. It is an overall view of an external information terminal section in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is an explanatory view of example 6 of variation production in the pattern variation production of a decorative pattern performed by the production control unit using the image display unit. It is an explanatory view of example 6 of variation production in the pattern variation production of a decorative pattern performed by the production control unit using the image display unit. It is an explanatory view of example 6 of variation production in the pattern variation production of a decorative pattern performed by the production control unit using the image display unit. It is an explanatory view of example 6 of variation production in the pattern variation production of a decorative pattern performed by the production control unit using the image display unit. It is a timing chart of the special light emission effect and the object change effect in variation effect example 6. It is an explanatory diagram of example 7 of variation production in the pattern variation production of a decorative pattern performed by the production control unit using the image display unit. It is an explanatory diagram of example 7 of variation production in the pattern variation production of a decorative pattern performed by the production control unit using the image display unit. It is an explanatory diagram of example 7 of variation production in the pattern variation production of a decorative pattern performed by the production control unit using the image display unit. It is an explanatory diagram of example 7 of variation production in the pattern variation production of a decorative pattern performed by the production control unit using the image display unit. It is a timing chart of the special light emission effect and the object change effect in variation effect example 7. It is an explanatory diagram of example 8 of variation production in the pattern variation production of a decorative pattern performed by the production control unit using the image display unit. It is an explanatory diagram of example 8 of variation production in the pattern variation production of a decorative pattern performed by the production control unit using the image display unit. It is an explanatory diagram of example 8 of variation production in the pattern variation production of a decorative pattern performed by the production control unit using the image display unit. It is a timing chart of the special light emission effect and the object change effect in variable effect example 8. It is an explanatory diagram of the customer waiting performance of this embodiment. This is a screen for accepting settings regarding the content of a player's performance in a pattern variation performance of a pachinko gaming machine.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
<Embodiment 1>
[Basic configuration of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment.
A pachinko game machine 100 as an example of a game machine shown in FIG. 1 is configured to pay out a prize ball when a game ball hit by a player's instruction operation wins a prize. This pachinko game machine 100 includes a game board 110 from which game balls are launched, and a game frame 150 surrounding the game board 110. The game board 110 is detachably attached to the game frame 150.

The game board 110 includes, on the front, a game area 111 for playing games with game balls, a rail member 112 that forms a passage through which game balls shot from below ascend to the upper position of the game area 111, and a game area 111 for playing games with game balls. A guide member 113 for guiding the game ball is provided on the right side of the area 111.
In this embodiment, an image display unit 114 that displays various images for presentation is provided at a position in the gaming area 111 that is easily visible to the player. The image display unit 114 is equipped with a display screen such as a liquid crystal display, and as the player progresses in the game, displays, for example, a decorative pattern to inform the player of the pattern lottery result (symbol variation result), A performance image based on the appearance of a character or an item, or a performance image using a hold display to be described later is displayed.
Further, the front surface of the game board 110 is provided with a movable accessory 115 and a board lamp 116 used for various effects. The movable accessory 115 performs various effects by moving on the game board 110, and the board lamp 116 performs various effects by emitting light.
Further, at the upper part of the game frame 150, an upper accessory 5 used for various performances is provided. The upper accessory 5 is provided so as to be movable upward.

In the game area 111, game nails, windmills, etc. (not shown) are arranged to change the direction in which the game balls fall. Further, in the gaming area 111, various accessories related to winnings and lottery are arranged at predetermined positions. Further, the gaming area 111 is provided with a discharge port 117 for discharging out of the gaming area 111 game balls that have been launched into the gaming area 111 but have not entered the winning hole.

In this embodiment, as various accessories related to winning and drawing, there are a first starting hole 121 and a second starting hole 122 which start a special symbol drawing (jackpot drawing) when a game ball wins, and a normal drawing when a game ball passes through. A starting gate (hereinafter simply referred to as gate) 124 for starting a symbol lottery (opening/closing lottery) is provided on the game board 110. In addition, in FIG. 1, the gates 124 are provided on the left and right sides of the gaming area 111, and the gate 124 on the left side is written as 124L, and the gate 124 on the right side is written as 124R. In addition, the first starting opening 121 and the second starting opening 122 referred to herein refer to winning openings that trigger the activation of one predetermined special symbol display. Specifically, the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 are provided with switches (first starting port switch 211 and second starting port switch 212, which will be described later) that detect the passing of a game ball when winning a prize. It is being Then, when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122, this switch detects the passage of the game ball, which triggers the activation of the special symbol display.

The second starting port 122 is equipped with an electric tulip (opening/closing member) 123, which is a normal electric accessory that lights up as a pair of tulip flower-shaped blades are opened and closed by an electric solenoid. In the electric tulip 123, when the blade is closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 122, but when the blade is opened, the entrance of the second starting port 122 expands and the game ball enters the second starting port 122. It is designed for easy access. When the electric tulip 123 wins the regular symbol lottery, its wings open for a specified time (for example, 0.15 seconds to 1.8 seconds) and a specified number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times) while lighting up or blinking.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 has a low probability state where the probability of winning is low and a high probability state where the probability of winning is higher than the low probability state as gaming states based on the winning probability of the jackpot lottery. Then, it is controlled to either a low probability state or a high probability state based on predetermined conditions.
In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has two gaming states: a no-power support state in which there are few chances of winning a prize in the second starting port 122, and a power-support state in which there are more opportunities to win a prize in the second starting port 122 than in a state without power support. have. Then, under a predetermined condition, such as triggered by a jackpot or the number of special symbol drawings, it is controlled to be in either the electric support state or the electric support state. The electric support state is, for example, one or more of the following: shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, and increasing the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. This is a gaming state controlled by combinations.
Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has, as game states, a time saving no state where the special symbol fluctuation time is long and a time saving state where the special symbol fluctuation time is shorter than the time saving no state.
In this embodiment, it is assumed that the electric support state and the time saving state are controlled at the same time. Further, in the following description, a state with electric support and a time saving state is simply referred to as a time saving state, and a state with no electric support and no time saving is simply referred to as a no time saving state.

In addition, in this embodiment, as other accessories related to winning and drawing, there is a grand prize opening 125 as a special electric accessory that opens according to the result of the special symbol drawing, and a lottery is not held even if a game ball wins. A normal winning opening 126, which is not included, is arranged on the game board 110. The big winning opening 125 is provided with a big winning opening door 125D that opens and closes the big winning opening 125. In the following description, the opening/closing state and opening/closing operation of the big winning opening door 125D may be explained as the opening/closing state and opening/closing operation of the big winning opening 125 for convenience.
In this embodiment, a display 130 is provided at the lower left of the game board 110 to display the lottery results and the number of reservations.

In addition, on the back side of the game board 110, there is a game control board that determines the winning of special symbols, a performance control board that centrally controls the performance, an image control board that controls the performance using images and sounds, various lamps, and the like. Various boards (not shown) such as a lamp control board for controlling the performance by the movable accessory 115 are attached. Further, on the back side of the game board 110, a switching power supply (not shown) is provided that converts the supplied 24V AC power into DC power and outputs it to various boards and the like.

When the player touches the handle 151 and rotates the lever 152 clockwise, the game frame 150 fires game balls at predetermined time intervals (for example, 100 balls per minute) with a batting force corresponding to the operating angle. It is equipped with a firing device (not shown) that fires electrically. The game frame 150 also includes a supply device (not shown) that sequentially supplies game balls one by one to the launch device at a timing linked to the player's operation using the lever 152, and a supply device (not shown) that sequentially supplies the game balls to the launch device. It includes an upper tray 153 for temporarily storing the balls, and a lower tray (not shown) provided below the upper tray 153 for holding the game balls falling from the upper tray 153. A ball is paid out onto the upper tray 153 by, for example, a payout unit.

The game frame 150 also includes a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the firing of game balls even when the player is touching the handle 151 of the firing device, and a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the firing of game balls accumulated in the lower tray. A take-out button 155 is provided for dropping the book into a box (not shown) and taking it out.
Furthermore, the gaming frame 150 includes a speaker 156 and a frame lamp 157 that announce the gaming status and situation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and perform various effects. The speaker 156 performs various performances using music, voices, and sound effects. The frame lamp 157 is composed of a light emitting body such as an LED, and performs various effects using light, such as lighting/blinking patterns and different emitted colors. Note that for the frame lamp 157, an example of a configuration is possible that makes it possible to perform an effect of changing the direction of light irradiation.
Furthermore, the game frame 150 includes a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board 110 from the player.

FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the pachinko game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 2(b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 100.
As shown in FIG. 2(a), the display 130 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a first special symbol display 221 that operates in response to a winning in the first starting opening 121, and a special symbol display 221 that operates in response to a winning in the second starting opening 122. It includes a second special symbol display 222 that operates in response to the passing of the gate 124, and a normal symbol display 223 that operates in response to passing through the gate 124. The first special symbol display 221 displays the special symbol in a variable manner and then stops displaying it to display the lottery result based on the winning of the first start opening 121. The second special symbol display 222 displays the special symbol in a variable manner based on the winning of the second starting port 122, and then stops displaying the symbol to display the lottery result. The normal symbol display 223, based on the game ball passing through the gate 124, displays the normal symbols in a variable manner and then stops displaying them to display the lottery result. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 are each constituted by a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode thereof. Similarly, the normal symbol display 223 is also constituted by a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode.

In addition, the display 130 includes a first special symbol reservation display 218 that operates in response to reservation on the first special symbol display 221, and a first special symbol reservation display 218 that operates in response to reservation on the second special symbol display 222. 2, a special symbol retention display 219 and a normal symbol retention display 220 that operates in response to reservation on the normal symbol display 223. In this embodiment, the first special symbol reservation display 218, the second special symbol reservation display 219, and the normal symbol reservation display 220 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of reservations is indicated by the lighting mode. Is displayed.

Here, suspension will be explained. If a game ball further enters the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 during the variable display operation of the special symbol (while the variable display for one win is being performed), the special symbol is in the process of changing. In addition, it is not possible to start the variable display operation of special symbols based on subsequent winnings. Therefore, later winnings are stored up to a specified number (for example, 4), and the right to start the special symbol for the winning game ball is held until the variable display operation for the winning game ball ends. It will be put on hold.
Note that the same processing as that for special symbols is performed for normal symbols. The fact that such a reservation is made and the number of reservations (unchanged number) are displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 218, the second special symbol reservation display 219, and the normal symbol reservation display 220.

Furthermore, the display 130 includes a status display 224 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In this embodiment, the status indicator 224 is composed of a display device in which three LEDs are arranged. One of the three LEDs lights up to notify whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a high probability state where the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is high. The other one is to notify by lighting whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a time saving state where the special symbol variation time is short. Still another one is to notify by lighting whether or not the player is in an advantageous state by hitting the game ball to the right (by changing the hitting force of the game ball).

In addition, the display 130 includes a round number display 225 that displays the number of rounds when the jackpot 125 is activated in a jackpot game performed according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery. The jackpot game will be described later. The round number display 225 is constituted by a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of operating rounds of the jackpot opening 125 in the jackpot game is displayed depending on the lighting mode.

The game slot 150 of the pachinko game machine 100 is equipped with an input device for a player to input information regarding the performance. As shown in FIG. 2(b), in this embodiment, as an example of an input device, a production button 161B, a production key 162 consisting of a plurality of keys arranged in a substantially cross shape adjacent to the production button 161B, is arranged in the game slot 150. In the illustrated example, consider a case where an effect is performed that accepts an operation of selecting one image from a plurality of images. In this case, for example, by operating the effect key 162 consisting of four keys arranged in a cross pattern, the player instructs one of the plurality of images displayed on the image display section 114, and presses the effect button 161B. By operating it, it is possible to perform effects such as selecting the designated image. Further, as the form of the input device, in addition to the illustrated performance button 161B and performance key 162, various input forms such as a lever or a handle can be adopted depending on the content of the performance.

[Control unit configuration]
Next, a control unit that performs operation control and signal processing in the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be explained.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment.
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of the image/sound control section and the lamp control section of this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control unit includes a game control section 200 as a main control means that determines whether or not a special symbol is won. Further, as sub-control means, a performance control section 300 that controls the performance in an integrated manner, and a payout control section 330 that performs payout control of the payout balls are provided.

[Configuration and functions of game control section]
The game control unit 200 includes a CPU 201 that performs arithmetic processing when determining the winning of special symbols, a ROM 202 that stores programs executed by the CPU 201, various data, etc., and a ROM 202 that is used as a working memory for the CPU 201. RAM 203 that can be used.

The game control unit 200 controls the game state of the pachinko game machine 100 to be either a high probability state or a low probability state, a no time saving state, or a time saving state. As a result, the gaming states of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are: a high probability time saving gaming state which is a high probability state and a time saving state, a low probability time saving gaming state which is a low probability state and a time saving state, and a high probability state which is a high probability state and a time saving no state. The state is one of a probability time-saving no-gaming state, a low-probability state, and a low-probability time-saving no-gaming state. Then, the game control unit 200 switches between a high probability state and a low probability state, and switches between a no time saving state and a time saving state based on predetermined conditions. In addition, the game control unit 200 performs controls such as making the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery higher in the time saving state than in the no time saving state, shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, and extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123. I do.

The game control unit 200 performs a special symbol lottery when a game ball enters the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122. Then, a special game such as a jackpot game is performed according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery. In the special game, the game control unit 200 plays a predetermined number of rounds in which the special electric accessory, the grand prize opening 125, remains open until a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds elapse or 10 game balls are won) is satisfied. control so that it repeats only Then, the game control unit 200 controls the opening/closing operation interval when the big prize opening 125 opens.

Further, the game control unit 200 performs a normal symbol lottery when the game ball passes through the gate 124. Then, the operation of the electric tulip is controlled according to the determination result of the normal symbol lottery.
In addition, the game control unit 200 also handles reservations that occur due to the game ball entering the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 during special symbol fluctuations, and the game ball passing through the gate 124 during normal symbol fluctuations. Configure the hold settings that occur due to this.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 performs game control such as determination results of special symbol drawings and normal symbol drawings, change information of high probability state and low probability state, change information of time saving no state and time saving state, reservation setting information, etc. The information is sent to the production control section 300 using a command described later.

Furthermore, when a game ball wins in the first starting hole 121, second starting hole 122, big winning hole 125, and normal winning hole 126, the game control unit 200 controls the game ball per one game ball according to the place where the game ball wins. The payout control unit 330 is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls. For example, if a game ball enters the first starting port 121, you will receive 3 prize balls; if a game ball enters the second starting port 122, you will receive 4 prize balls; and if a game ball enters the grand prize opening 125, you will receive 13 prizes. When a game ball enters the normal winning slot 126, an instruction command (command) is sent to the payout control unit 330 to pay out 10 prize balls respectively. Note that even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, the payout control unit 330 is not instructed to pay out the prize ball in conjunction with the detection.
When the payout control unit 330 pays out prize balls according to the instructions from the game control unit 200, the game control unit 200 acquires information regarding the number of paid out prize balls from the payout control unit 330. Thereby, the number of prize balls paid out is managed.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game control unit 200 includes a first starting port detection unit (first starting port switch (SW)) 211 that detects winning of a game ball to the first starting port 121 as a detection means. , a second starting port detection unit (second starting port switch (SW)) 212 that detects winning of a game ball to the second starting port 122, an electric tulip opening/closing unit 213 that opens and closes the electric tulip 123, and a gate 124. A gate detection unit (gate switch (SW)) 214 that detects passage of a game ball is connected.
Furthermore, the game control section 200 includes a large winning hole detection section (a large winning hole switch (SW)) 215 that detects winning of a game ball to the large winning hole 125, and a large winning hole door 125D of the large winning hole 125. A special prize opening door opening/closing section 216 that sets the door to a closed state and a protrudingly inclined open state, and a regular prize opening detection section (normal prize opening switch (SW)) 217 that detects winning of a game ball to the ordinary prize opening 126. , is connected.

In addition, the game control unit 200 includes a first special symbol retention display 218 that displays the number of retained unchanged pieces won in the first starting port 121 during the fluctuation of the special symbol, and a second special symbol retention display 218 that displays the number of retained unchanged pieces won in the first start opening 121 during the fluctuation of the special symbol. A second special symbol retention display 219 that displays the number of retained unchanged pieces that entered the starting slot 122, and a normal symbol retention display that displays the number of retained unchanged pieces that passed through the gate 124 during normal symbol fluctuations. 220 are connected.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 includes a first special symbol display 221 that displays a variable display of special symbols performed by winning a game ball into the first starter opening 121 and a result of a special symbol lottery, and a second special symbol display 221 that displays the results of a special symbol lottery. A second special symbol display 222 that displays a variable display of special symbols and the results of a special symbol lottery performed by winning a game ball to 122, and a normal symbol display that displays a variable display of normal symbols and the results of a regular symbol lottery. The machine 223 is connected to a status display 224 that displays the status of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

Then, the detection signals detected by the first starting port switch 211, the second starting port switch 212, the gate switch 214, the big winning port switch 215, and the normal winning port switch 217 are sent to the game control section 200. In addition, control signals from the game control unit 200 are transmitted to the electric tulip opening/closing unit 213, the big prize opening door opening/closing unit 216, the first special symbol retention display 218, the second special symbol retention display 219, and the normal symbol retention display 220. , the first special symbol display 221, the second special symbol display 222, the normal symbol display 223, and the status display 224. Thereby, the game control section 200 performs various controls related to the above-described number of payout prize balls.

Furthermore, an external information terminal board 350 for the board is connected to the game control section 200, which transmits various information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall. Then, the game control unit 200 transmits the information regarding the number of prize balls that have been paid out, the status of the game control unit 200, etc. obtained from the payout control unit 330 to the host computer via the board external information terminal board 350. do.

[Configuration and functions of payout control unit]
The payout control unit 330 includes a CPU 331 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the payout of balls, a ROM 332 that stores programs executed by the CPU 331 and various data, and a RAM 333 that is used as a working memory for the CPU 331. It is equipped with.
Then, the payout control unit 330 controls the payout of the payout balls based on the command sent from the game control unit 200.
Specifically, the payout control unit 330 obtains a command from the game control unit 200 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the location where the game ball has won (first starting port 121, etc.). Then, the payout drive unit 334 is controlled to pay out the number of prize balls specified in the command. The payout drive section 334 here is constituted by a drive motor that sends out game balls from the game ball storage section.

The payout control unit 330 also includes a payout ball detection unit 335 that detects the number of prize balls actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout drive unit 334, and a payout ball detection unit 335 that detects the number of prize balls that are actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout drive unit 334. A ball presence detection unit 336 detects whether or not there is a pool of balls, and a tray 153 that holds game balls used by players when playing games and paid-out prize balls is full. A full tank detection section 337 is connected. Then, the payout control unit 330 receives the detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, the ball presence detection unit 336, and the full tank detection unit 337, and performs predetermined processing according to these detection signals.
Furthermore, an external information terminal board 340 for slots is connected to the payout control unit 330, which transmits various information to a host computer installed in the hall. The payout control unit 330 then generates, for example, information regarding the number of prize balls that the payout drive unit 334 is instructed to pay out, information regarding the number of prize balls actually paid out detected by the put-out ball detection unit 335, etc. is transmitted to the host computer via the frame external information terminal board 340. Further, similar information is transmitted to the game control section 200 as well.

[Configuration and functions of production control section]
The production control unit 300 includes a CPU 301 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling production, a ROM 302 that stores programs executed by the CPU 301, various data, etc., a RAM 303 that is used as a working memory etc. of the CPU 301, and a date and time. A real-time clock (RTC) 304 for measuring.
The performance control unit 300 sets the content of the performance based on, for example, the determination result of whether or not the special symbol lottery is won or not and the fluctuation pattern sent from the game control unit 200. At this time, an operation input from the user using the effect button 161B or the effect key 162 may be received, and the effect contents may be set in accordance with the operation input. In this case, for example, a signal (operation signal) corresponding to the operation is received from a controller (not shown) such as the effect button 161B, and the operation content identified by this operation signal is reflected in the effect setting.
Furthermore, when the game is interrupted for a predetermined period of time, the performance control section 300 instructs setting of a screen display for waiting for customers as one of the performances.
Furthermore, the effect control section 300 sets the effect contents based on the change information of the high probability state and the low probability state, and the change information of the time saving no state and the time saving state, which are received from the game control section 200.
Further, the effect control section 300 sends a command to the image/sound control section 310 and the lamp control section 320 to instruct execution of the set effect contents.

Furthermore, an image/sound control unit 310 that controls performances using images and sounds, and a lamp control unit 320 that controls performances using various lamps and movable accessories 115 are connected to the production control unit 300. has been done.

[Configuration and functions of image/sound control unit]
As shown in FIG. 4, the image/sound control unit 310 includes a CPU 311 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling images and sounds expressing the content of the performance, and programs executed by the CPU 311 and various data stored therein. It includes a ROM 312, a RAM 313 used as a working memory for the CPU 311, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 314, a CGROM 315, and an SNDROM 316.

Then, the image/sound control section 310 controls the image displayed on the image display section 114 and the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the command sent from the production control section 300.
Specifically, the CGROM 315 stores symbol images and background images to be displayed during the game on the image display unit 114, decorative symbols to notify players of lottery results, characters to display preview effects to players, etc. Image data such as items etc. is stored. Further, the SNDROM 316 stores various types of audio data such as music, sounds, and sound effects such as jingles that are output from the speaker 156 in synchronization with the image data or independently of the image data.
The CPU 311 analyzes animation patterns, creates a display list that compiles drawing-related commands, and sends the display list to the VDP 314 based on the pending number command or variable performance start command sent from the performance control unit 300. conduct.

Based on the display list received from the CPU 311, the VDP 314 reads image data and audio data stored in the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, respectively. Furthermore, the VDP 314 performs drawing processing for background image display, pattern image display, pattern image variation, character/item display, etc. using the read image data, and audio processing using the read audio data. . Then, the VDP 314 controls screen display on the image display unit 114 using the image data that has been subjected to the drawing process. Further, the VDP 314 controls the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the sound data subjected to sound processing.
Note that in this embodiment, the VDP 314 is configured to perform audio processing in addition to drawing processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a separate processor that exclusively performs audio processing may be provided.

[Configuration and functions of lamp control unit]
The lamp control unit 320 includes a CPU 321 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 and the operation of the movable accessory 115, and a program that is executed by the CPU 321 and various data stored therein. It includes a ROM 322 and a RAM 323 used as a working memory for the CPU 321.
Then, the lamp control section 320 controls the lighting/blinking, emitted light color, etc. of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the command sent from the production control section 300. Further, the operation of the movable accessory 115 is controlled.

Specifically, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores lighting/flashing pattern data and light emission color pattern data (light emission pattern data) are stored. The CPU 321 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 322 that corresponds to the command sent from the effect control section 300. Then, the lamp control unit 320 controls the light emission of the board lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the read light emission pattern data.
Further, the ROM 322 of the lamp control section 320 stores motion pattern data of the movable accessory 115 according to the presentation content set by the presentation control section 300. The CPU 321 controls the motion of the movable accessory 115 based on the read motion pattern data.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game control section 200, the production control section 300, the image/sound control section 310, the lamp control section 320, and the payout control section 330 are each connected to a main board disposed on the rear surface of the game board 110. A game control board as a sub-board, an effect control board as a sub-board, an image control board, a lamp control board, and a payout control board are individually configured.
Further, in the configuration example described with reference to FIG. 4, the production button 161B and the production key 162 are connected to the production control section 300 and controlled by the production control section 300, but the present invention is not limited to this. The production button 161B and the production key 162 may be connected to the lamp control section 320 and controlled by the lamp control section 320.

[Functional configuration of game control unit]
Next, the functional configuration of the game control section 200 will be explained.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the game control section 200. As shown in FIG. 5, the game control unit 200 includes a random number acquisition unit 231, a normal symbol determination unit 232, a special symbol variation control unit 233, and a special symbol determination unit 234 as functional units that execute various lottery processes. , a normal symbol variation control section 236.
Furthermore, the game control section 200 includes a variation pattern selection section 235 as a functional section that executes processing associated with special symbol variations.
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 includes a large prize opening operation control unit 237, an electric tulip operation control unit 238, and a prize ball processing unit 239 as functional units that execute data processing related to operation control of various accessories and prize balls, etc. , an output control section 240 , and a random number control section 241 .

The random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value used for the special symbol lottery and a random number value used for the normal symbol lottery. In the case of random numbers used for special symbol drawings, specifically, on the condition that a game ball has won in the first starting hole 121 or the second starting hole 122, a numerical value within a predetermined range is selected for each type of random number. One value (random value) is selected (obtained) from among them. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the special symbol determination section 234. As will be described in detail later, the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery include a jackpot random number that indicates whether or not it is a jackpot, a symbol random number that indicates the type of jackpot, a variable pattern random number, a reach random number, and the like.
In addition, in the case of random numbers used for normal symbol drawings, specifically, one number (random number) is selected (obtained) from a predetermined range of numbers on the condition that the game ball passes through the gate 124. ) to be done. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the normal symbol determination section 232. In addition, as the random number used for the normal symbol lottery, in addition to the winning random number that indicates whether or not it is a win, a symbol random number that indicates the type of win, a variable pattern random number, etc. may be set.
The special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 221 or the second special symbol display 222 according to the lottery result when a special symbol lottery is performed.

The special symbol determining unit 234 uses a random number table such as shown in FIG. ``type of winning'' and ``whether it is a small win or a loss in the case where the jackpot has not been won'' is determined. That is, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value related to a special symbol when the passage of a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 211 or the second starting port switch 212, which is a detection means, and makes a special pattern determination. The unit 234 determines whether or not to play a special game (such as a jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, based on the obtained random number value. Note that the aforementioned special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) refers to processing in the random number acquisition section 231 and the special symbol determination section 234.

Here, the "jackpot" is divided into a plurality of types depending on the gaming state that occurs after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, the type of jackpot is determined by the combination of time saving no state or time saving state, and high probability state or low probability state. In other words, the types of jackpots based on the gaming state that occur after the end of the jackpot game are a jackpot that results in a high probability time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as a "jackpot in a high-probability time-saving gaming state"), and a low-probability time-saving gaming state. A jackpot that results in a low-probability time-saving no-gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving no-gaming state), a jackpot that results in a high-probability time-saving no-gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a jackpot in a high-probability time-saving no-gaming state), a jackpot that results in a low-probability time-saving no-gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a low-probability jackpot in a time-saving no-gaming state) It is possible to have a jackpot (with probability of shortening time and no playing). These jackpots are each associated with individual special symbols, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the type of special symbol won in the special symbol lottery.

In addition, "jackpot" may be divided into jackpot where the jackpot game is long and the payout of a large amount of game balls can be expected, and jackpot where the jackpot game is short and the payout of few game balls cannot be expected. The former is called "long hit" and the latter is called "short hit." For example, in "long win", a round is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) in which the open state of the big prize opening 125 is maintained until a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have elapsed or 10 game balls have won). It will be done. In addition, in the case of a "short win", a round in which the big prize opening 125 is kept open for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice).

In addition, a "small win" when a jackpot has not been won is a small win game in which the jackpot 125 is kept open for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) a predetermined number of times (for example, twice). It will be done. In addition, when winning a small winning, the game state before winning the small winning continues even after the small winning game ends. That is, if the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is the high probability time saving gaming state, the high probability time saving gaming state continues even after the small winning game ends and the gaming state does not shift. Similarly, if the gaming state at the time of winning a small win is a low probability time saving no gaming state, the low probability time saving no playing state continues even after the small winning game ends and the gaming state does not shift.
Furthermore, a "small win" is a type of "miss", and none of the above game conditions that are advantageous to the player are set.

The variation pattern selection unit 235 selects a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbols to be displayed on the first special symbol display 221 or the second special symbol display 222. Specifically, the variation pattern selection unit 235 selects a variation pattern (for example, 13.5 seconds or more) that allows a reach effect in the decorative symbol variation production accompanying the special symbol variation and the determination result of whether or not to play a jackpot game. ), the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the determination result of whether or not. Then, based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit 235, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol. Details of the operations of the variation pattern selection section 235 and the special symbol variation control section 233 will be described later.
Here, "reach" is an effect to make the player expect a jackpot in a decorative pattern to be described later.

The normal symbol determination unit 232 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. 20(d), which will be described later, to determine whether the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit or not when the variation of the normal symbol starts. That is, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not to perform the auxiliary game of opening and closing the electric tulip 123 based on the random number value for the regular symbol lottery acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231. In addition, when a plurality of types of winnings are set in the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol determining unit 232 determines the "win type" when the determination result is a winning. Note that the normal symbol lottery is a process performed by the random number acquisition section 231 and the normal symbol determination section 232.
The normal symbol variation control unit 236 controls the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 223 according to the lottery result when the normal symbol lottery is performed.
The electric tulip operation control unit 238 opens the electric tulip 123 for a specified time and a specified number of times when the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines that the normal symbol lottery is a “win”, and causes the game ball to enter the second starting port 122. To generate a state in which it is easy to win a prize. Moreover, when it is determined that the electric tulip 123 is "off", such an open state of the electric tulip 123 is not generated. The operation patterns of the electric tulip 123 will be described later, and include, for example, an operation pattern in which the electric tulip 123 opens once in an opening time of 0.15 seconds, and an operation pattern in which it opens three times in an opening time of 1.80 seconds.

When the special symbol determination section 234 determines that the special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the big winning opening operation control unit 237 operates the big winning opening as a jackpot game with an operation pattern specified based on the type of jackpot won. Controls the opening operation of 125. In addition, when the special symbol determination section 234 determines a "small win" in the special symbol lottery, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 opens the large winning opening 125 for a specified time and a specified number of times as a small winning game. .
The prize ball processing unit 239 sets commands for managing the number of prizes won in various accessories related to winnings and drawings, and controlling the payout of prize balls according to winnings.
The output control section 240 controls the output of control commands from the game control section 200 to the production control section 300 and the payout control section 330.
The random number control unit 241 updates various random numbers that the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires at predetermined timings.

[Basic operation of gaming machines]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be explained.
When the power is turned on, the game control unit 200 of the pachinko game machine 100 initializes and initializes various devices as basic processing at startup. After performing the basic processing, the game control section 200 repeatedly executes the main control processing, which is a series of processing related to the progress of the game. Furthermore, when shutting off the power, the game control section 200 executes a series of power-off processing.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the operation of basic processing by the game control section 200.
When the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned on, the game control unit 200 first allows access to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) (step (hereinafter referred to as "S") 601). Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether the RAM clear switch for clearing the RAM 203 is turned on (S602).
When the RAM clear switch is OFF (No in S602), next, the game control unit 200 determines whether the backup flag regarding the operation at the time of power cutoff is ON (S603).
If the backup flag is ON (Yes in S603), then the game control unit 200 determines whether the checksum created at the time of power cut-off is normal or not (S604).
If the checksum is normal (Yes in S604), then the game control unit 200 executes a return process (S605). In this return processing, the game control section 200 performs settings of sub-control means such as the performance control section 300 in connection with the return from the power-off state. Specifically, the game control unit 200 determines the gaming state of the pachinko game machine 100 (whether or not a jackpot game is in progress, either a high probability state or a low probability state, a time saving state or a no time saving state) when the power is cut off. A command for setting the sub-control means is output to the production control unit 300 so as to reflect any of the following. Also, in this return process, the game control unit 200 turns off the backup flag.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is ON (Yes in S602), the backup flag is OFF (No in S603), or the checksum is abnormal (No in S604), then the gaming control unit 200 initializes the As a process, the storage contents of the RAM 203 are cleared (S606), and a work area of the RAM 203 is set (S607). Then, the game control section 200 outputs a command for setting (initializing) the sub-control means to the production control section 300, and sets the sub-board (sub-control means) (S608). The sub-board settings include clearing the RAM 303, RAM 313, and RAM 323 mounted on each sub-board.

After the return process (see S605) is completed, or after the sub-board setting (see S608) is completed, the game control unit 200 sets various counters and timers used for game control (S609). Then, the game control unit 200 performs interrupt permission (S610), interrupt prohibition (S611), symbol random number control processing (S612), initial value random number update processing (S613), and judgment as to whether or not the power cutoff flag is ON. (S614) is repeatedly executed as a loop process.
Here, interrupt enable (S610) and interrupt disable (S611) are provided to enable interrupt processing to be executed during execution of this loop processing (S610 to S614). In this embodiment, the main control process in game control is executed by this interrupt process. Details of the main control process will be described later.
In the symbol random number control process (S612), the game control unit 200 updates the variable pattern random number used in the special symbol lottery.
In the initial value random number update process (S613), the game control unit 200 updates the initial values of various random numbers used in game control.
In the determination of the power cutoff flag, if the power cutoff flag is OFF (No in S614), the power to the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not cut off, and the game control unit 200 performs main control using an interrupt as well as loop processing (S610 to S614). Repeat the process. On the other hand, if the power cutoff flag is ON (Yes in S614), the game control unit 200 starts a process for cutting off the power to the pachinko game machine 100 (power cutoff process).

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the operation of the power cut-off process by the game control unit 200.
In the power-off processing, the game control unit 200 first clears the settings of the output ports for performing various outputs (S701). Next, the game control unit 200 creates a checksum and stores it in the RAM 203 (S702). Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the backup flag (S703), prohibits access to the RAM 203 (S704), and shifts to an infinite loop.

[Main control processing of gaming machines]
Next, the main control process of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be explained.
In the main control process, the game control unit 200 controls the games in the pachinko game machine 100, instructs the performance control unit 300, which is a sub-control means, to control the performance, and issues prize balls to the payout control unit 330. instructs the control of payout.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main control processing of the game control section 200.
The main control process consists of a series of processes in game control, and is repeatedly executed at preset fixed time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). In this embodiment, the game control unit 200 generates an interrupt at preset fixed time intervals, and when the interrupt is permitted (see S610) in the loop process shown in FIG. Execute processing. As shown in FIG. 8, in the main control process, a random number update process, a switch process, a symbol process, an electric accessory process, a prize ball process, and an output process are sequentially executed (S801 to S806).

In the random number update process (S801), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number control unit 241, and updates the values of various random numbers used in game control by the game control unit 200. Details of setting the random number and updating the random number will be described later.

As the switch processing (S802), starting port switch processing and gate switch processing are performed.
In the starting port switch process, the game control section 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition section 231, monitors the states of the first starting port switch 211 and the second starting port switch 212 in FIG. 3, and determines whether the switch is ON or not. When this happens, processing for special symbol lottery is executed. In addition, although details will be described later, when performing preliminary determination processing in the first starting port switch 211 and the second starting port switch 212, each function (subroutine) of the special symbol determining section 234 and the fluctuation pattern selecting section 235 is called, Execute processing for preliminary determination.
In the gate switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231, monitors the state of the gate switch 214 in FIG. Execute processing.
The detailed contents of these switch processes will be described later.

As the symbol processing (S803), special symbol processing and normal symbol processing are performed.
In the special symbol processing, the game control section 200 calls each function (subroutine) of the special symbol variation control section 233, the special symbol determination section 234, and the variation pattern selection section 235, and executes the special symbol variation and the processing associated with this symbol variation. do.
In the normal symbol processing, the game control section 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the normal symbol determination section 232 and the normal symbol variation control section 236, and executes the normal symbol variation and the processing associated with this symbol variation.
The detailed contents of these symbol processing will be described later.

As the electric accessory processing (S804), a big prize opening processing and an electric tulip processing are performed.
In the big winning hole process, the game control section 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the big winning hole operation control section 237, and controls the opening operation of the big winning hole 125, which is a special electric accessory, based on predetermined conditions.
In the electric tulip process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the electric tulip operation control unit 238 and controls the opening operation of the electric tulip 123, which is a normal electric accessory, based on predetermined conditions.
The detailed contents of these electric accessories processing will be described later.

In the prize ball processing (S805), the game control section 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the prize ball processing section 239, and sets commands for controlling the management of the number of prizes won and the payout of prize balls according to the winnings.

In the output process (S806), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the output control unit 240, outputs a command for production control to the production control unit 300, and outputs a command for payout control to the payout control unit 330. Output. The production control command is generated in each process from S802 to S804, and stored (set) in a control command storage area provided in the RAM 203. The payout control command is generated in the process of S805, and stored (set) in a control command storage area provided in the RAM 203. Storage areas are set in the RAM 203 for each type of control command.

The output control unit 240 sequentially checks the storage areas of each control command in the RAM 203, and if the control command is stored in each storage area (that is, if the control command has not been generated in the processing of S802 to S805). (b), reads the control command and outputs it to the output destination (production control section 300 or payout control section 330).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, output processing is performed at the end of a series of main control processing. That is, the commands generated in each process of S802 to S805 by each of the above functions as the first processing means are stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203 in each process. After these processes, the output control unit 240 as a second processing means collectively outputs the commands generated in each process stored in the storage area of the RAM 203. In other words, in this embodiment, when the main control process is executed for one cycle, the commands generated during that one cycle of execution are output after the last command generation for that one cycle of execution is performed.

[Variations of basic operations of gaming machines]
In the operation examples described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8, interrupts are permitted in the loop processing portion of the basic processing, and the main control processing consisting of a series of processing is executed as the interrupt processing. However, the main control process may be configured to be repeatedly executed at regular intervals, and the specific implementation means (execution procedures) are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 6 to 8. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the main control process is incorporated into a series of operations of the basic process, the elapsed time is measured at a predetermined timing, and the process returns to the main control process at fixed time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). Furthermore, while incorporating the main control process into the series of operations of the basic process, interrupts are generated at regular intervals, and when an interrupt occurs, It may be configured to return to the main control process incorporated during the basic process.

In addition, when outputting a command generated by basic processing, in principle, each time a command is generated, it is stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203 and the function of the output control unit 240, which is the second processing means, is called. Output. The basic processing is different from the main control processing related to the progress of the game, and is special processing such as an initial operation that is performed only when the power is turned on. In addition, since the basic processing may vary due to branching based on conditions such as the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is turned on, the generated commands should be output promptly to ensure that there are no omissions in the output processing. It is processing. Note that, in response to specific processing requests, such as when commands are continuously generated by multiple related processes, a processing procedure is adopted in which multiple commands are stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203 and output at once. It's okay.

[Random number update processing by game control unit]
The random number value as determination information used for various kinds of lottery in game control such as special symbol lottery is counted by a counter, and starting from a predetermined initial value, the random number update process (S801) of the main control process shown in FIG. 8 is performed. Each time it is performed, it is incremented by 1. Then, the value at the time of each lottery is acquired in the starting gate switch process (Figure 9) and the gate switch process (Figure 10), and is used in the special symbol process (Figure 11) and the normal symbol process (Figure 16). Ru. This random number counter is an infinite loop counter, and after the counted random number reaches the maximum value of the set random number (for example, 299 for the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 20(a) described later), , returns to the initial value again. Further, since the random number update process is performed at regular intervals, if the initial value of each random number is specified, there is a risk that the winning value will be estimated based on the update interval and information on the initial value. Therefore, after returning from the main control process to the basic process shown in FIG. 6, the initial value of each random number is randomly changed in the initial value random number update process of S613.

[Start switch processing by game control unit]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the contents of the starting port switch process of the switch process shown in S802 of FIG.
In this starting port switch process, processing for winning at the first starting port 121 and processing for winning at the second starting port 122 are sequentially performed. Referring to FIG. 9, the game control unit 200 first determines whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 121 and the first starting port switch 211 has been turned on (S901). If the first starting port switch 211 is turned on, the game control unit 200 next determines whether the unchanged pending number U1 of winnings in the first starting port 121 is less than the upper limit (S902). . In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is set to four. If the number of reservations U1 has reached the upper limit (No in S902), the unchanged winnings cannot be held any longer, so the process for winnings at the first starting port 121 is ended.

On the other hand, if the number of reservations U1 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S902), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value for determination based on the current winning, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S903) . Here, since the winning is for the first start opening 121, a random number value for the special symbol lottery is acquired. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated in the random number update process of S801. Then, based on this random number value, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined in the later special symbol processing. The random number here includes the jackpot random number that determines a jackpot, small win, or miss, the type of jackpot (time-saving state or no-time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game, high probability state and low probability state, long win, short win). A random symbol value (jackpot symbol random value) that determines the hit), a fluctuation pattern random value that identifies the fluctuation pattern in the symbol fluctuation, a reach random value that determines whether or not to perform the reach effect described below in the event of a loss. , etc. are included.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a preliminary determination process (S904). Pre-judgment processing refers to winning balls (pending balls) for which random numbers have already been obtained by winning a prize at the starting opening, but whose random numbers have not yet been determined by the special symbol processing described later. This is a process in which the random number is determined before it is determined (pre-determination).

Then, the performance control unit 300 of the present embodiment determines a random number by a special symbol process based on the determination result (prior determination result) of the random number determined by the preliminary determination process, and notifies the result of the determination. It is possible to perform a preview performance that suggests the judgment result beforehand. For example, this preview effect may be displayed on the image display screen in response to the occurrence of a winning ball (pending ball) whose random number has already been obtained by winning a prize at the starting hole, but whose random number has not yet been determined by special symbol processing. This is performed using a hold display effect (described later) displayed at 114. The advance notice performance based on this advance determination suggests to the player the determination result when random number determination is subsequently performed by special symbol processing regarding the reserved ball corresponding to the advance determination related to the advance notice performance. This allows the player to play the game while having high expectations for the reserved balls. Details of the preview performance based on the advance determination will be described later.

Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the pending number U1 (S905).
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets a preliminary determination result command including preliminary determination information obtained by the preliminary determination process of S904 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the performance control unit 300 of the preliminary determination result (S906).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a pending number increase command in the RAM 203 to notify the performance control unit 300 of the increase in the pending number U1 in S905 (S907), and ends the processing for winning at the first starting port 121. .

Next, processing for winning at the second starting port 122 is performed. Referring to FIG. 9, next, the game control unit 200 determines whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 122 and the second starting port switch 212 has been turned on (S908). If the second starting port switch 212 is turned on, next, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the pending number U2 of the unchanged winnings in the second starting port 122 is less than the upper limit (S909 ). In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is set to four. If the number of reservations U2 has reached the upper limit (No in S909), the unchanged winnings cannot be held any longer, so the process for winnings at the second starting port 122 is ended.

On the other hand, if the number of reservations U2 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S909), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value for the lottery based on the current winning prize, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S910). . Here, since the winning is for the second starting opening 122, the random values for the special symbol lottery (jackpot random value, jackpot symbol random value, reach random value, fluctuating pattern random value, etc.) are obtained in the same way as in S903 above. Ru. The random number value acquired at this time is the value updated in the random number update process of S801. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined in the later special symbol processing based on this random number value.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a preliminary determination process (S911). The contents of this preliminary determination process are the same as in S904 above.
Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the pending number U2 (S912).
After this, the game control unit 200 sets a preliminary determination result command including preliminary determination information obtained by the preliminary determination process of S911 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the performance control unit 300 of the preliminary determination result (S913).
Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets a pending number increase command in the RAM 203 to notify the performance control unit 300 of the increase in the pending number U2 at S912 (S914), and ends the process for winning at the second starting port 122. .

[Gate switch processing by game control unit]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the gate switch process when a game ball passes through the gate 124.
In this gate switch process, the game control unit 200 first determines whether the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the gate switch 214 has been turned on (S1001). Once the gate switch 214 is turned on, the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the unchanged pending number G is less than the upper limit (S1002). In the example shown in FIG. 10, the upper limit is set to four. If the number of reservations G has reached the upper limit (No in S1002), the gate switch process ends because the unchanged winnings cannot be reserved any more.

On the other hand, if the number of reservations G is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S1002), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value for the lottery based on the current winning prize, and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1003). . Here, since it is a win at the gate 124, a random value (such as a winning random value) for the normal symbol lottery is acquired.

Next, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the number of reservations G (S1004).
After the value of the number of reservations G is added in S1004, the game control unit 200 sets a command to increase the number of reservations G in the RAM 203 to notify the production control unit 300 of the increase in the number of reservations G in S1004 (S1005), The process for winning at the gate 124 ends.

[Special symbol processing by game control unit]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol processing of the symbol processing shown in S803 of FIG.
In this special symbol processing, the special symbol variation control section 233 of the game control section 200 first checks whether the jackpot game flag is turned on in the flag setting (hereinafter referred to as flag setting) set in the RAM 203 ( S1101). Here, the jackpot game flag is a flag that is set to identify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

If the jackpot game flag is ON, the pachinko game machine 100 has already hit the jackpot, so the special symbol processing ends without starting the special symbol variation (Yes in S1101). On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is OFF (No in S1101), then the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines whether or not the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is during special symbol variation (S1102). If the special symbol is not changing (No in S1102), then the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 performs processing regarding the unchanged reserved numbers U1 and U2 (see FIG. 9) of the special symbol (S1103 to S1106). In this embodiment, since the number of reservations U1 related to winnings in the first starting port 121 and the number U2 of holdings related to winnings in the second starting port 122 are distinguished, this process is also performed individually for each corresponding starting port. .

Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 first determines whether the pending number U2 related to winnings in the second starting port 122 is 1 or more (S1103). When the number of reservations U2 is 1 or more (Yes in S1103), the special symbol variation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations U2 (S1104). On the other hand, if the number of reservations U2 = 0 (No in S1103), the special symbol variation control unit 233 next determines whether the number of reservations U1 related to the winning of the first starting opening 121 is 1 or more (S1105). When the number of reservations U1 is 1 or more (Yes in S1105), the special symbol variation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations U1 (S1106). On the other hand, if the pending number U1 = 0 (No in S1105), it means that there is no winning to start the special symbol lottery, so the special symbol fluctuation is not started and the customer waiting setting process is performed in a separate routine. is executed and the process ends (S1116).
In addition, in this embodiment, the process regarding the pending number U2 related to the winnings of the second starting port 122 is performed with priority. That is, when the number of reservations U2 is 1 or more, processing related to the number of reservations U2 is performed, and when number of reservations U2=0, processing regarding the number of reservations U1 is performed (see S803 to S806). On the other hand, it is also possible to perform control such that the reserved numbers U1 and U2 are subtracted in the order of winning, regardless of which of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 wins.

After subtracting the pending number U1 or U2 in S1104 or S1106, the special symbol variation control unit 233 turns off the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1107). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (S1116, see FIG. 15 described later).

Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 executes a jackpot determination process and a variation pattern selection process using a separate routine (S1108, S1109). As will be described in detail later, by this jackpot determination process and variation pattern selection process, setting information for variation of special symbols (jackpot symbols, game state, variation pattern, etc.) are determined. Note that these pieces of information are included in the variation start command sent to the production control section 300.

After this, the special symbol variation control unit 233 causes the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 shown in FIG. The special symbols start changing (S1110). Then, a fluctuation start command including setting information (jackpot symbol, gaming state, fluctuation pattern, etc.) indicating the setting contents is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1111). The variation start command set in S1111 is transmitted to the production control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

If it is determined that the special symbol is changing in S1102 (Yes in S1102), or after the fluctuation start command is set in S1111, the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 determines whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1112 ). That is, it is determined in S1110 whether the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol has reached the variation time set in the variation pattern selection process in S1109. If the variation time has not elapsed (No in S1112), the special symbol variation continues, so the special symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has elapsed (Yes in S1112), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 first performs the jackpot determination process in S1108 to control the fluctuation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222. It stops at the symbol determined in (S1113). A fluctuation stop command to stop the decorative patterns, which will be described later, is set in the RAM 203 (S1114). Then, the stop processing of another routine is executed (S1115). The details of the stopped processing will be described later. The fluctuation stop command set in S1114 is transmitted to the production control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

[Jackpot determination processing by game control unit]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot determination process (S1108 in FIG. 11).
In this jackpot determination process, the special symbol determination section 234 of the game control section 200 first determines the jackpot random number value in the current special symbol lottery (S1201), and determines whether there is a jackpot or a small win (S1202). , S1205). Whether or not there is a jackpot or a small win is determined by whether the value of the jackpot random number obtained in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 matches the value set as the jackpot winning value or the small win winning value. (See FIG. 20(a)).

If the result of the random number determination in S1201 is a jackpot (Yes in S1202), then the special symbol determination unit 234 determines the jackpot symbol random number value (S1203). Depending on the result of this determination, the type of jackpot (such as a jackpot in a high-probability time-saving gaming state, a jackpot in a low-probability time-saving no-gaming state, etc.) is determined. Which jackpot will result is determined by which value of the jackpot symbol random number acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 matches with which of the preset values for each jackpot type (FIG. 20 ( b)).

After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets the symbol representing the type of jackpot (jackpot symbol) determined by the determination of the jackpot symbol random number in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1204).

If the result of the random number determination in S1201 is a small hit (No in S1202, Yes in S1205), then the special symbol determination unit 234 sets a symbol representing a small win (hereinafter referred to as a small win symbol) as setting information. Set it in the RAM 203 (S1206).

If the result of the random number determination in S1201 is neither a jackpot nor a small hit (No in S1202 and S1205), then the special symbol determination unit 234 stores a symbol representing a loss in the lottery (hereinafter referred to as a loss symbol) as setting information in the RAM 203. (S1207).

[Variation pattern selection process by game control unit]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S1109 in FIG. 11).
In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern selection unit 235 of the game control unit 200 first refers to the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (no time saving state or time saving state, and whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state). (S1301). Then, using the determination result of S1202 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), it is determined whether or not there has been a jackpot in the current special symbol lottery (S1302). If it is a jackpot (Yes in S1302), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for the jackpot from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1303).

On the other hand, if there is no jackpot (No in S1302), then the fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 determines a random number value to determine whether or not to perform a so-called reach effect to make the player expect a jackpot. (S1304). Whether or not to perform the reach effect is determined by determining whether the value of the reach random number obtained in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 matches a preset value (see FIG. 20(c)). .
As a result of the determination using the random number value, if the ready-to-win effect is to be performed (Yes in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the ready-to-reach variation pattern table from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1306). Moreover, when the reach effect is not performed (No in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for losing from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1307).
Here, the fluctuation pattern table refers to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance (fluctuation times of 3 seconds, 7 seconds, 13 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) and fluctuation pattern random number values. This is a table that maps .

Next, the variation pattern selection unit 235 determines the variation pattern random value using the variation pattern random value obtained in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 and the variation pattern table set in S1303, S1306, and S1307 (S1308 ). That is, the variation pattern selection unit 235 refers to the variation pattern table set in the RAM 203 and selects a variation pattern according to the random value of the variation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is obtained, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (time saving state or no time saving state, and high probability state or low probability state), the result of the special symbol lottery (whether it was a jackpot or not) Since the fluctuation pattern table that is referred to differs depending on the difference in whether or not to perform a reach effect if there is no jackpot, etc., the fluctuation pattern to be determined differs.

Thereafter, the variation pattern selection unit 235 sets the variation pattern selected in S1308 in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1309). The setting information of the variation pattern set in S1309 is included in the variation start command set in S1111 of FIG. 11, and is transmitted to the production control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG. Details of the variation patterns selected in this embodiment and their settings will be described later.

[Stopped processing by game control unit]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stopping process (S1115 in FIG. 11).
In this stopping process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether the flag indicating the time saving state (hereinafter referred to as the time saving flag) is turned on in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1401). When the time saving flag is ON (Yes in S1401), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of drawings (number of fluctuations) J in the time saving state (S1402), and determines whether the number of drawings J has become 0 or not. is checked (S1403). If the number of lottery numbers J=0 (Yes in S1403), the time saving flag is turned OFF (S1404). The operation of turning on the time saving flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number J are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the later-described big prize opening process (FIG. 17).

If the time saving flag is OFF (No in S1401), or after the time saving flag is turned OFF in S1404, or if the value of the number of drawings J after being subtracted in S1402 is not 0 (No in S1403), then game control The unit 200 checks whether a flag indicating a high probability state (hereinafter referred to as a high probability flag) is turned on in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1405). In addition, if this high probability flag and the previous time saving flag are both ON, it is a high probability time saving gaming state, and if the high probability flag is ON and the time saving flag is OFF, it is a high probability time saving no gaming state. be.

If the high probability flag is ON (Yes in S1405), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of drawings (number of fluctuations) X in the high probability state (S1406), and determines whether the number of drawings X has become 0. It is checked whether or not (S1407). If the lottery number X=0 (Yes in S1407), the high certainty flag is turned OFF (S1408). The operation of turning on the high probability flag and the setting of the initial value of the number of drawings X are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the later-described big winning opening process (FIG. 17).

If the high certainty flag is OFF (No in S1405), or after the high certainty flag is turned OFF in S1408, or if the value of the number of drawings X after subtraction in S1406 is not 0 (No in S1407), then The game control unit 200 determines whether or not there has been a jackpot in the current special symbol lottery (S1409). If it is a jackpot (Yes in S1409), then the game control unit 200 determines the type of jackpot (S1410). Here, as an example of determining the type of jackpot, it is determined whether or not it is a long win.

Here, whether or not it is a jackpot can be determined based on the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process (FIG. 12). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the diagram of FIG. 20(b) to be described later is set, the answer is Yes in S1409. If a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is set in the RAM 203 by the jackpot determination process, the result is No in S1409.

When the type of jackpot is a long hit (Yes in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the long hit game flag (S1411). As a result, the gaming state setting of the RAM 203 becomes a jackpot gaming state (long winning gaming state) in which the type of jackpot is long winning. Note that in this case, no distinction is made between a high probability state and a low probability state in winning a long game. Whether it will be a high probability state or a low probability state is specified by turning on the corresponding flag in the gaming state setting process (FIG. 18) in the later-described big winning opening process (FIG. 17).

If the type of jackpot is not a long hit (No in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the short hit game flag (S1412). As a result, the gaming state setting of the RAM 203 becomes a jackpot gaming state (short winning gaming state) in which the type of jackpot is short winning. As with the case of long wins, there is no distinction made between high probability states and low probability states in the case of short wins.

After turning on the jackpot game flag in S1411 or S1412, the game control unit 200 initializes the values of the lottery numbers J and X (S1413). Further, the game control unit 200 turns the time saving flag OFF when the time saving flag is ON in S1401 and the number of lottery times J is not 0 in S1403 (S1414). Similarly, if the high certainty flag is ON in S1405 and the number of lottery times X is not 0 in S1407, the high certainty flag is turned OFF (S1414).

After initializing the values of the lottery numbers J and X in S1413, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation (S1417). Here, the contents of the opening operation differ depending on whether the winning game flag is turned ON in S1411 or S1412. In other words, the opening operation is set according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery.
Thereafter, the game control unit 200 sets an opening command in the RAM 203 for performing a performance in the opening operation according to the jackpot game flag in the performance control unit 300 (S1418), and ends the stopped processing. This opening command is sent to the production control section 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

On the other hand, if the result of this special symbol lottery is not a jackpot (No in S1409), then the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the result of this special symbol lottery is a small hit (S1415). ). If it is not a small hit (No in S1415), the stopping process ends.
On the other hand, if it is a small win (Yes in S1415), the game control unit 200 starts a small win game (S1416). As a result, the gaming state of the RAM 203 is set to the small winning gaming state. In addition, in the small winning game, as described above, the big prize opening 125 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and ends after a predetermined time has elapsed.

[Customer waiting setting process by game control unit]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (S1116 in FIG. 11).
In this customer waiting setting process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether the customer waiting flag is turned on in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1501). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag that is set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state.

If the customer waiting flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a customer waiting state, and therefore the process ends (Yes in S1501). On the other hand, when the customer waiting flag is OFF, the game control unit 200 generates a customer waiting command and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1502), and turns the customer waiting flag ON (S1503). The customer waiting command set in S1502 is transmitted to the production control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 in FIG. Note that the customer waiting flag is set when the special symbols have stopped changing and there is no hold.

[Normal symbol processing by game control unit]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol processing of the symbol processing shown in S803 of FIG.
In this normal symbol processing, the normal symbol variation control section 236 of the game control section 200 first checks whether the auxiliary game flag is turned on in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1601). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when the player wins the normal symbol lottery. The state in which the auxiliary game flag is set is a state in which the electric tulip 123 is opened according to the electric tulip process (FIG. 19) described later, and it is easy to win a prize in the second starting opening 122 (auxiliary game state).

When the auxiliary game flag is ON, the auxiliary game state is already in place and the normal symbols are stopped, so the normal symbol processing is ended without starting the normal symbol fluctuation (Yes in S1601). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in S1601), then the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 determines whether the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the normal symbol fluctuation state (S1602). If the normal symbol is not changing (No in S1602), then the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 determines whether the pending number G (see FIG. 10) of the unchanged portion of the normal symbol is 1 or more (S1603). If the number of reservations G=0 (No in S1603), it means that there is no winning for starting the normal symbol lottery, so the process ends without starting the normal symbol variation.

On the other hand, when the number of reservations G is 1 or more (Yes in S1603), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations G (S1604). Then, the normal symbol determination unit 232 determines the winning random number in the current regular symbol lottery, and determines whether or not the regular symbol lottery has been won (S1605). Whether or not you have won is determined by determining whether the value of the winning random number obtained in S1003 of FIG. 10 matches the value set as the winning value in the table shown in FIG. 20(d) described later. It is determined.

Next, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 sets the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery (S1606). That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, a symbol representing the winning (hereinafter referred to as a winning symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is not won, a symbol representing that the lottery was unsuccessful (hereinafter referred to as a "lost symbol") is set in the RAM 203 as setting information.

Next, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 sets the variation time of the normal symbol (S1607). This variable time is set based on a time saving flag set in processes such as S1404 and S1414 in FIG. 14 and S1804 and S1807 in FIG. 18, which will be described later. That is, if the time saving flag is ON at the time of setting in S1607, it is set to a short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and when the time saving flag is OFF, it is set to a long time (for example, 4.0 seconds). be done. After this setting, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 starts the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 223 shown in FIGS. 2(a) and 3 based on the setting contents of S1607 (S1608). Note that the variation pattern of the normal symbols can also be determined by lottery. In this case, for example, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires the fluctuation pattern random value of the normal symbol, and in S1607, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 acquires the fluctuation pattern random value of the normal symbol. The fluctuation time is set by the determination.

After starting the variation of the normal symbol in S1608, or when it is determined that the normal symbol is changing in S1602 (Yes in S1602), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether or not the variation time has elapsed (S1609 ). That is, it is determined in S1608 whether the elapsed time since the start of the variation of the normal symbols has reached the variation time set in S1607. If the variation time has not elapsed (No in S1609), the normal symbol variation continues, and the normal symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the variation time has ended (Yes in S1609), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 stops the variation of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 223 (S1610). Then, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether or not the determination result in S1605 is a win (S1611). If it is a win (Yes in S1611), the auxiliary game flag is turned ON (S1612). On the other hand, if the lottery is unsuccessful (No in S1611), the normal symbol processing is ended without turning on the auxiliary game flag.

[Big winning opening processing by game control unit]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the contents of the big winning opening process of the electric accessory process shown in S804 of FIG.
In this big winning hole process, the big winning hole operation control section 237 of the game control section 200 first checks whether the jackpot game flag is turned on in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1701). When the jackpot game flag is OFF, there is no winning in the jackpot 125, and thus the jackpot processing ends (No in S1701). On the other hand, if the jackpot game flag is ON (Yes in S1701), then the jackpot operation control unit 237 controls the opening in the jackpot operation control started in the pachinko gaming machine 100 stop process (FIG. 14). It is determined whether or not an operation is in progress (S1702).

If the pachinko game machine 100 is opening (Yes in S1702), then the big prize opening operation control unit 237 determines whether a preset time for the opening operation (opening time) has elapsed. (S1703). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation at the big winning hole 125 is continued, so the big winning hole processing ends (No in S1703). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1703), then the big winning opening operation control unit 237 performs operation settings for the big winning opening 125 (S1704), and initializes the winning number C (C=0). (S1705), 1 is added to the value of the round number R of operation of the grand prize opening 125 from the current value (S1706), and the operation of the grand prize opening 125 is started (opened) (S1707).

In the operation setting of S1704, the operation pattern of the big prize opening 125 and the number of rounds (operation round number) to be operated with that operation pattern are set. Examples of cases in which the big prize opening 125 operates include cases where there is a long or short jackpot in a special symbol lottery, and cases where there is a small win. The operation pattern and the number of rounds are variously set depending on the type of winning. In addition, in the jackpot game, it is stipulated that the jackpot 125 be operated a plurality of times (multiple rounds) in succession. As an example, in the case of a long win, for example, 15 rounds (15R) are activated, and one round is performed with one release of 29.5 seconds. In the case of a short hit, for example, two rounds (2R) are activated, and in one round, one release of 0.9 seconds is performed. To explain further, it opens for 0.9 seconds, closes for 1.0 seconds, and then opens for 0.9 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of a small win, for example, the door is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 seconds, and then opened for 0.9 seconds. Here, when comparing the operation for a short hit and the operation for a small hit in the above example, the opening for 0.9 seconds is performed twice in both cases. That is, the operation of the big winning hole 125 visible to the player is the same for short wins and small wins, and short wins and small wins can be distinguished from only the movement of the big winning hole 125 on the game board 110. I can't.

Incidentally, in the case of a small win, it is stipulated by law that the cumulative opening time of the big prize opening 125 must be set within 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, in the event of a jackpot (long or short win), the jackpot 125 must be opened multiple times in succession. Therefore, when trying to make it difficult to visually distinguish between the small hit operation and the short hit operation as described above, for a small hit, as long as the cumulative opening time for one operation is within 1.8 seconds, An operation mode is set in which the big prize opening 125 is opened twice or more, and in the case of a short win, the number of rounds is set to be the same as the number of openings of the small win.

Next, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the opening time in the operation pattern set in S1704 has elapsed (S1708). If the open state of the big winning hole 125 has not passed the opening time (No in S1708), then the big winning hole operation control unit 237 determines that the number of winnings C in the big winning hole 125 is a specified number (for example, 9 ) or more (S1709). If the opening time has not elapsed and the number of winning prizes C is less than the specified number, the operating state (open state) of the big winning hole 125 continues, so the big winning hole processing ends (No in S1709). ). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1708) or the number of winnings C reaches the specified number (Yes in S1709), the big winning hole operation control unit 237 ends the operation of the big winning hole 125 (closes it). (S1710).

Next, the big winning hole operation control unit 237 determines whether the number of rounds R of operation of the big winning hole 125 has reached the maximum value set in S1704 (S1711). If the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operations are performed, and the big winning opening process ends (No in S1711).

If the number of rounds R of operation of the big winning hole 125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S1711), then the big winning hole operation control section 237 starts the ending operation (S1712). Here, the content of the ending action corresponds to the state of the jackpot game flag among the ending actions set in each game of the long winning game and the short winning game.
Thereafter, the big winning opening operation control section 237 sets an ending command in the RAM 203 for performing a presentation in the ending operation according to the jackpot game flag in the presentation control section 300 (S1713). This ending command is transmitted to the production control section 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

Next, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 resets the number of rounds R of operation of the big winning opening 125 to 0 (S1714), and then an ending operation is performed in which the elapsed time from the start of the ending operation is set in advance. It is determined whether a certain time (ending time) has elapsed (S1717). If the ending time has not elapsed, the ending operation continues, and the big winning opening process ends (No in S1717). On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (Yes in S1717), then the big winning opening operation control unit 237, after passing through the gaming state setting process by the gaming control unit 200 (S1718), turns off the jackpot game flag, The big prize opening process ends (S1719). The details of the game state setting process will be described later.

If it is determined in S1702 that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening stage (No in S1702), then the grand prize opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not in the ending stage (S1715). If ending is in progress (Yes in S1715), the operations from S1717 onwards are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko game machine 100 is not in the process of ending (No in S1715), then the big winning hole operation control unit 237 determines whether the big winning hole 125 is operating (opened) or not (S1716). If it is not in operation (No in S1716), the operations from S1705 onwards are executed, and if it is in operation (Yes in S1716), the operations from S1708 onwards are executed.
Note that the performance performed in the above-mentioned small winning game is similar to the performance performed in the short winning game, and short winnings and small winnings cannot be distinguished from the performance.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 18 shows the contents of the game state setting process (S1718) by the game control unit 200, which is executed when the ending time has passed (S1717: Yes).
When the game state setting process is performed, the jackpot game flag is turned ON in S1701 of FIG. 17 as a premise. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, the game control unit 200 first determines the type of jackpot (S1801, S1802, S1803, S1806). These judgments can be made, for example, based on the type of symbol set as setting information in the RAM 203 in the jackpot judgment process (FIG. 12). In addition, since these determinations are generally the same as S1202, S1203, and S1205 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), the determination results of S1202, S1203, and S1205 may be used.

If it is a small win (Yes in S1801), the gaming state is not changed, and therefore the gaming state setting process is ended.
If the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a low probability time-saving game state (No in S1801, Yes in S1802, S1803), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1804). As a result, the gaming state of the RAM 203 is set to the low probability time saving gaming state. Furthermore, the game control unit 200 sets an initial value of the number of lottery numbers J (S1805), and ends the game state setting process. The initial value of the lottery number J is 100 in the illustrated example. Therefore, if the lottery in the low probability time saving game state is held 100 times, the low probability time saving gaming state ends and a low probability time saving no game state is entered.

On the other hand, if the type of jackpot is a low-probability time-saving no-gaming jackpot (No in S1801, Yes in 1802, No in S1803), the game control unit 200 performs processing without turning on both the time-saving flag and the high-probability flag. finish. Therefore, the gaming state of the RAM 203 for the game after this jackpot is set to a low probability time-saving no-gaming state.

If the type of jackpot is a jackpot in a high probability time-saving gaming state (No in S1801, S1802, Yes in S1806), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1807) and sets the initial value of the number of drawings J. (S1808). In this case, the initial value of the lottery number J is 10,000 in the illustrated example. Further, the game control unit 200 turns on the high certainty flag (S1809) and sets the initial value of the number of lottery times X (S1810). The initial value of the lottery number X is 10,000 in the illustrated example. As a result, the gaming state of the RAM 203 is set to the high probability time saving gaming state. If the lottery in this high probability time saving game state is carried out 10,000 times, the high probability time saving game state ends and a low probability time saving no game state is entered.

On the other hand, if the type of jackpot is a high-probability time-saving no-game jackpot (No in S1801, S1802, and S1806), the game control unit 200 turns on only the high probability flag (S1809), and sets the initial value of the number of drawings X. (10000 times) is set (S1810). As a result, the gaming state of the RAM 203 is set to a high probability time-saving no-gaming state. If the lottery in this high probability time saving no game state is carried out 10,000 times, the high probability time saving no game state ends and the low probability time saving no game state begins.

[Electric tulip processing by game control unit]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the contents of the electric tulip process of the electric accessory process shown in S804 of FIG.
In the electric tulip process, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether the auxiliary game flag is turned on in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1901). If the auxiliary game flag is OFF, the electric tulip 123 will not be opened, so the electric tulip process ends (No in S1901). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is ON (Yes in S1901), then the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines whether or not the electric tulip 123 is in operation (S1902).

If the electric tulip 123 is not in operation (No in S1902), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 sets an operation pattern for the electric tulip 123 (S1903), and operates the electric tulip 123 in the set operation pattern (S1904). . Here, the operation pattern is set based on the time saving flag set in processes such as S1404 and S1414 in FIG. 14 and S1804 and S1807 in FIG. 18. For example, if the time saving flag is OFF at the time of setting in S1903, an operation pattern is set that opens once every 0.15 seconds, and if the time saving flag is ON, the operation pattern is set to open once every 0.15 seconds. An operation pattern is set in which the valve is opened three times in an hour. In this way, normally, when the time saving flag is ON (in the time saving state), the electric tulip 123 is opened multiple times for a long time, and the winning support (electronic chew support) that makes it easier to win at the second starting port 122 will be held. In addition, multiple operation patterns (auxiliary game types) of the electric tulip 123 are prepared when the time saving flag is ON or OFF, and the operation is performed according to the type of hit determined by the normal symbol processing (see Figure 16). It may be configured to set a pattern.

If it is determined in S1902 that the electric tulip 123 is operating (Yes in S1902), or after operating the electric tulip 123 in S1904, the electric tulip operation control unit 238 determines whether the open time in the set operation pattern has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1905). If the open time has not elapsed, the operating state (open state) of the electric tulip 123 is continued, so the electric tulip process ends (No in S1905). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (S1905: Yes), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 turns off the auxiliary game flag and ends the electric tulip process (S1906).

[Determination method using random numbers]
Here, the method of determination using random numbers, which is performed in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 13), the normal symbol process (FIG. 16), etc., will be described in detail.
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration example of random numbers (determination table) used in the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery in this embodiment.
Figure 20(a) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot random numbers used in the special symbol lottery, Figure 20(b) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot random numbers used in the special symbol lottery, and Figure 20(c) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot random numbers used in the special symbol lottery. An example of the structure of the reach random number used, and an example of the structure of the winning random number used in the normal symbol lottery are shown in FIG. 20(d).

Referring to FIG. 20(a), the judgment value of the jackpot random number is a jackpot when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 at the time of jackpot judgment is a low probability state and a jackpot when the gaming state at the time of jackpot judgment is a high probability state. There are two types of prizes, and a small prize. The range of random numbers (jackpot random numbers) is 300 from 0 to 299. In the case of a special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) in a low probability state, only one winning value is set, and the winning probability is 1/300. Further, in the case of a special symbol lottery with a high probability state, ten winning values are set, and the winning probability is 10/300 (=1/30). That is, in the illustrated example, when a special symbol lottery is performed by winning the starting slots 121 and 122 in a high probability state, the probability of winning is ten times higher than when a special symbol lottery is performed in a low probability state. Furthermore, three winning values for the small win are set regardless of whether the game is in a low probability state or a high probability state, and the winning probability is 3/300 (=1/100).
Here, to explain a special symbol lottery in a low probability state as an example, the jackpot random number value (see S903, S910) obtained by winning the first starting hole 121 or the second starting hole 122 is as shown in FIG. It is determined whether it matches "5", which is the winning value of the jackpot lottery in the low probability state in (a). Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery in a high probability state and the special symbol lottery for small wins.

Referring to FIG. 20(b), five types of jackpot symbols are prepared: low probability symbol A, low probability symbol B, high probability symbol A, high probability symbol B, and potential probability symbol. Here, low probability symbol A and low probability symbol B are symbols representing a jackpot in a low probability state, and among these, low probability symbol A is a long hit (8 rounds) and a jackpot in a low probability time saving gaming state. Show that something is true. The low probability symbol B indicates a long win (4 rounds) and a jackpot in a low probability time-saving gaming state. High probability symbol A and high probability symbol B indicate a long win (15 rounds) and a jackpot in a high probability time-saving gaming state. The high probability symbol C and the high probability symbol D indicate a long win (8 rounds) and a jackpot in a high probability time-saving gaming state. The high probability symbol E indicates a short hit (2 rounds) and a high probability jackpot in a time-saving no-play state. The potential pattern is a pattern that represents a short hit (2 rounds) and a high probability jackpot in a time-saving no-gaming state. Therefore, the high probability symbol B and the potential symbol have the same gaming state after a jackpot game, but the potential symbol is a condition for performing a hidden effect that does not clearly notify the player that it is in a high probability state. Therefore, it is provided separately from the high probability symbol B. The range of random numbers is 250 from 0 to 249. In addition, in the jackpot symbol random number, a winning value is set for each of the first starting hole 121 and the second starting hole 122, which serve as an opportunity for the special symbol lottery to be performed.

In the low probability symbol A, 35 values are assigned as winning values to both the first starting hole 121 and the second starting hole 122. Therefore, when winning the jackpot, the probability of winning with low probability symbol A is 35/250 (=7/50).
In the low probability symbol B, 15 values are assigned as winning values to both the first starting hole 121 and the second starting hole 122. Therefore, when winning the jackpot, the probability of winning with low probability symbol B is 15/250 (=3/50).

In the high-probability symbol A, 20 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting hole 121 wins. Therefore, when winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting slot 121, the probability of winning with the high probability symbol A is 20/250 (=2/25).
On the other hand, 150 values are assigned as winning values in the case of winning in the second starting slot 122. Therefore, when winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with high probability symbol A is 150/250 (=15/25).

In the high-probability symbol B, five values are assigned as winning values when the first starting hole 121 wins. Therefore, when winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by entering the first starting hole 121, the probability of winning with high probability symbol B is 5/250 (=1/50).
On the other hand, 25 values are assigned as winning values when a prize is won in the second starting slot 122. Therefore, when winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the high probability symbol B is 25/250 (=1/10).

In the high-probability symbol C, 25 values are assigned as winning values when winning in the first starting hole 121. Therefore, when winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by entering the first starting slot 121, the probability of winning with the high probability symbol C is 25/250 (=1/10).
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as winning values when a prize is won in the second starting slot 122. Therefore, when winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with high probability symbol B is 10/250 (=1/25).

In the high-probability symbol D, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting hole 121 wins. Therefore, when winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting slot 121, the probability of winning with the high probability symbol D is 25/250 (=1/10).
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as winning values when a prize is won in the second starting opening 122. Therefore, when winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the high probability symbol D is 10/250 (=1/25).

In the high probability symbol E, 25 values are assigned as the winning value when the first starting hole 121 wins. Therefore, when winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by entering the first starting hole 121, the probability of winning with the high probability symbol E is 25/250 (=1/10).
On the other hand, five values are assigned as winning values when a prize is won in the second starting opening 122. Therefore, when winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by entering the second starting hole 122, the probability of winning with the high probability symbol E is 5/250 (=1/50).

In the potential pattern, 100 values are assigned as the winning value when the first starting hole 121 is won. Therefore, when winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting opening 121, the probability of winning with a probability symbol is 100/250 (=2/5).
On the other hand, the winning value of the potential symbol is not assigned to the second starting hole 122, and when a prize is won in the second starting hole 122, it will not be a winning value of the potential symbol.

Here, to explain the low probability symbol A as an example, the jackpot symbol random number value (see S903, S910) obtained by winning the first starting hole 121 or the second starting hole 122 is as shown in FIG. 20(b). ), it is determined whether it matches the winning value "0 to 34" of the low probability symbol A. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the same applies to special symbol lottery such as low probability symbol B.

As described above, by differentiating the probability of winning the type of jackpot in the case of winning in the first starting opening 121 and in the case of winning in the second starting opening 122, various gaming features can be provided. In addition, the arrangement of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 on the game board 110 has been devised so that it is easier to aim at either the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 in a specific state (mode). By configuring the system to be more flexible, it is also possible to encourage players to participate more actively in the game.

Next, determination of the reach random number will be explained. Note that the reach random number is set according to the number of reservations, as described later. Here, as an example, the reach random number when the number of reservations is 0 will be explained.
Referring to FIG. 20(c), the range of random numbers is 250 from 0 to 249, and 22 random numbers are assigned to the lottery result with reach effect (with reach effect), and the lottery result without reach effect. 228 random numbers are assigned to the result (no reach). That is, in the illustrated example, if there is no jackpot in the special symbol lottery, a reach effect is performed with a probability of 22/250 (=11/125). Here, the ready-to-reach performance is a performance performed on the image display section 114 when a special symbol changes. Hereinafter, the performance at the time of special symbol variation without the reach performance will be referred to as the no-reach performance, and correspondingly, the reach performance will also be referred to as the reach-present performance.

Here, to explain with reach as an example, the reach random value (see S903, S910) obtained by winning at the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is the reach in FIG. 20(c). It is determined whether the winning value matches the winning value "0 to 21". Although detailed explanation will be omitted, the same applies to special symbol lottery without reach.

In many cases, when a special symbol changes, it is linked to the display control of the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 (hereinafter referred to as special symbol displays 221 and 222 if these are not distinguished). , an effect using decorative patterns is performed on the image display section 114. The decorative pattern is composed of, for example, three rows of symbols each consisting of a series of numbers 1 to 9 written consecutively in the vertical direction. Then, at the same time as the special symbol displays 221 and 222 start varying display of the special symbols, the decorative symbols displayed on the image display section 114 start scrolling. Furthermore, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the special symbols (the start of scrolling the decorative symbols), the decorative symbols also stop at the same time as the special symbols are stopped and displayed. Generally, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, three identical numbers are lined up in a horizontal or diagonal straight line in the decorative symbol stop display. The performance using decorative patterns that is performed in conjunction with the variable display of this special symbol is called a variable performance.

In the reach effect, the following operations are performed regarding decorative symbols as a variable effect. First, when the decorative symbols scrolling in the vertical (horizontal) direction stop and each symbol is stopped and displayed, any two symbols (sequence of numbers) are stopped first. At this time, the same numbers are stopped and displayed on a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal straight line. To explain further, if the decorative pattern is scrolled in the vertical direction, the same numbers are stopped and displayed in a row in the horizontal direction.
Next, the last row gradually slows down the scrolling speed, giving the player a feeling of anticipation that three identical numbers will line up in a straight line. In such a reach effect, the SP reach effect or the SP/SP reach effect may be performed before the scrolling of the last column stops. In addition, SP Reach production is generally called Super Reach or Special Reach, and it is a production that makes you expect a bigger hit than Reach, and it is a production of moving images in which various characters appear and the story unfolds. . In addition, SP/SP Reach is generally called Super Super Reach or Special Special Reach, and is a performance that makes you expect a bigger hit than SP Reach. This is a production of
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 21, which will be described later, in this embodiment, when the variation time is longer (for example, 90 seconds or 60 seconds), it is set to execute SP reach or SP/SP reach effect. . Note that the above-mentioned fluctuating performance that is performed together with the ready-to-reach performance is also called a reach-time fluctuating performance.
On the other hand, in the no-reach performance, when the decorative symbols scrolling in the vertical (horizontal) direction stop and each symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect that gives the player a sense of expectation like the reach-to-reach performance is not created. , the symbols are stopped and displayed in a state where the same numbers are not aligned in a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal straight line.

In this way, the reach random number is used to determine whether to perform a reach effect or a reach effect on the image display section 114 when the jackpot random number determination result is a loss. A reach effect is made to appear with a probability to give players a moderate sense of expectation.
In addition, if you win the jackpot, a reach effect will be performed, and the decorative pattern will eventually stop and display in a horizontal (vertical) or diagonal straight line with the same numbers aligned. Can be done. On the other hand, in the reach effect in the case of a small win or a loss, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the above-mentioned straight line in a state where the same numbers are not aligned.

Next, the determination of the winning random number used for the normal symbol lottery will be explained.
Referring to FIG. 20(d), the range of random numbers is 10 from 0 to 9, and one value is assigned as the winning value when the time saving flag is OFF, and one value is assigned as the winning value when the time saving flag is ON. Nine values are assigned. Therefore, when a game ball passes through the gate 124 and a normal symbol lottery is performed when there is no time saving state, the probability of winning is 1/10. On the other hand, if a game ball passes through the gate 124 during the time saving state and a normal symbol lottery is performed, the player will win with a probability of 9/10.

Here, to explain with the time saving flag OFF as an example, the winning random number value (see S1003) obtained when a game ball passes through the gate 124, the first starting port 121, or the second starting port 122 is shown in FIG. It is determined whether it matches "0" which is the winning value of the time saving flag OFF in d). Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the same applies to the normal symbol lottery with the time saving flag ON.

Furthermore, although not particularly illustrated, it is possible to set a plurality of wins in which the content of the auxiliary game (opening pattern of the electric tulip 123) that is performed when a win is determined in the normal symbol lottery is different. In this case, for example, similar to the jackpot symbol random number (see FIG. 17(b)) that specifies the type of jackpot in the special symbol lottery, a winning symbol random number for specifying the type of win in the normal symbol lottery is set. Then, the game control unit 200 uses the random number acquisition unit 231 to acquire the random value of the winning random number as well as the random number of the winning symbol through the gate switch process (see FIG. 10), and the normal symbol determination unit 232 acquires the random number of the winning random number. Identify the type of win based on random numbers.
Note that the range of random numbers, the ratio of winning values, and the values of winning values shown in the configuration example of each random number in FIG. 20 are merely examples, and are not limited to the values shown.

[Example of setting fluctuation pattern]
Next, an example of setting a variation pattern and a table used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 13 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of a variation pattern and a table used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 13. Note that FIG. 21 shows a setting example of a low probability time saving no-gaming state. Although not shown, for other game states such as the high probability time-saving game state, a separate table is provided for the settings of the fluctuation patterns selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process.
Further, FIG. 21 shows a setting example when a game ball enters the first starting port 121. When a game ball enters the second starting port 122, a separate table may be provided for setting the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process, or when a game ball enters the first starting port 121. In some cases, the table to be referenced may be shared and referenced.

As shown in FIG. 21, if the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot (Yes in S1302 of FIG. 13), the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines a variation pattern based on the jackpot symbol and the variation pattern random number. . Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit 233 determines whether the variation pattern random number value (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the variation pattern random numbers assigned to each jackpot symbol. Determine the fluctuation pattern based on whether For example, if the jackpot symbol is "high probability symbol A" and the fluctuation pattern random number is "51", it matches the fluctuation pattern random number range "50 to 69" assigned to "high probability symbol A" in FIG. Therefore, "PB3" is selected as the variation pattern. The special symbol variation time in this "PB3" is "90.18 seconds".

In addition, if the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a loss (No in S1302 in FIG. 13), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 controls the special symbol lottery based on the pending number U1, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number of the first special symbol lottery. to determine the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, when the pending number U1 of the first special symbol lottery is "0", the special symbol fluctuation control section 233 determines that the reach random value (see S903) acquired by the random number acquisition section 231 together with the jackpot random value is , it is determined whether to be allocated to the reach random number range "0 to 21" which is allocated to the "missing" pending number "0" in FIG. 21, or to the reach random number range "22 to 249". When the obtained reach random number is included in the reach random number range "0 to 21", the fluctuation pattern random number (see S903) obtained together with the jackpot random number by the random number acquisition unit 231 is included in the reach random number range "0 to 21". The fluctuation pattern is determined based on which of the fluctuation pattern random values assigned to "21" matches. For example, when the variation pattern random number is "51", it matches the variation pattern random number range "50 to 89", so "PR4" is selected as the variation pattern.

As described above, the game control unit 200 uses the fluctuation pattern random values (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired when the game ball enters the starting slots 121 and 122, the game state of the pachinko game machine 100, and the reach. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on conditions such as presence or absence of performance and the number of reservations. Then, information on the determined special symbol variation pattern is included in the variation start command and sent from the game control section 200 to the production control section 300. As will be described later, the production control unit 300 creates a production that corresponds to the variation time specified based on the information on the variation pattern included in the variation start command (that can be executed during that variation time) as a production when the special symbol changes. is selected and executed.

[Configuration of the RAM of the game control unit and the RAM of the performance control unit for performing preview performance based on advance determination]
Next, the configurations of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 and the RAM 303 of the performance control unit 300 in this embodiment for executing the preview performance based on the advance determination will be explained.
FIG. 22 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) of game control section 200 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the storage area 204, and FIG. 22(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each storage section shown in FIG. 22(a).

As shown in FIG. 22(a), the RAM 203 includes a storage area 204 as a special symbol retention storage area that stores jackpot random numbers obtained by jackpot random number lottery. This storage area 204 has eight storage units corresponding to the maximum values of the number of reservations for the first starting port 121 and the number of reservations for the second starting port 122 (when the upper limit of each number of reservations is 4). . Specifically, the storage area 204 includes a first storage section 204a, a second storage section 204b, a third storage section 204c, a fourth storage section 204d, a fifth storage section 204e, a sixth storage section 204f, and a seventh storage section. 204g and an eighth storage section 204h.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 22(b), each of these storage units 204a to 204h is an area in which information representing the winning starting opening (first starting opening 121 or second starting opening 122) is stored. , an area where the acquired jackpot random numbers are stored, an area where the symbol random numbers are stored, an area where the reach random numbers are stored, and an area where the fluctuating pattern random numbers are stored. That is, each of the storage units 204a to 204h stores a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number.

Here, each random number is stored in order starting from the first storage unit 204a. To explain more specifically, for example, when no random number is stored in any of the first storage section 204a to the eighth storage section 204h, the obtained random number is stored in the first storage section 204a. Further, for example, when random numbers are already stored in the first storage unit 204a to fourth storage unit 204d, the obtained random number will be stored in the fifth storage unit 204e.

FIG. 23 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of RAM 303 (see FIG. 3) of production control section 300 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the reserved storage areas 305 and 306, and FIG. 23(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the storage units shown in FIG. 23(a).
As shown in FIG. 23(a), the RAM 303 includes a first holding storage area 305 and a second holding storage area 306, which serve as holding status storage areas that store the status of holding balls. The first reservation storage area 305 and the second reservation storage area 306 respectively correspond to reservations for winnings to the first starting hole 121 and reservations for winnings to the second starting hole 122, and each store four storage sections. have. Specifically, the first reserved storage area 305 includes a first storage section 305a, a second storage section 305b, a third storage section 305c, and a fourth storage section 305d. Further, the second reserved storage area 306 includes a first storage section 306a, a second storage section 306b, a third storage section 306c, and a fourth storage section 306d.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23(b), each of these storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d has a holding flag storage area for turning on/off the holding flag, and a notification flag storage area for turning the notification flag ON/OFF. It has an area. The reservation flag is a flag for identifying whether there is a reserved ball in each of the storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d. That is, for example, when the number of reservations due to winnings in the first start opening 121 is 3, the reservation flags are turned ON in the three reservation flag storage areas of the first to third storage sections 305a, 305b, and 305c. The notification flag is a flag for setting whether or not to perform a preview performance based on the preliminary determination result for each reserved ball. In the pachinko game machine 100 of the present embodiment, the performance control section 300 can set whether or not to perform a preview performance based on the preliminary determination result depending on the game state and the performance situation. Therefore, the notification flag is turned ON when a preview performance is to be performed, and the notification flag is turned OFF when a preview performance is not to be performed. For example, when a preview performance is performed for the third held ball among the three held balls, the notification flag is turned ON in the notification flag storage area of the third storage section 305c.

That is, the RAM 203 and the RAM 303 function as storage means in the game control section 200 and the performance control section 300 to store suspension information, which is start information based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, up to a predetermined number. In addition, the game control unit 200 determines the special game state based on the hold information, which is the start information, before the special symbol determination unit 234 makes a determination triggered by the establishment of the start condition corresponding to the start information. This is a preliminary determination means that performs preliminary determination processing regarding whether or not to shift to. The performance control unit 300 is a performance control unit that performs a preview performance for previewing (suggesting) the preliminary determination result.

Further, although not particularly illustrated, the RAM 203 has an area in which preliminary determination information is stored (hereinafter referred to as a preliminary determination information storage area) in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 22(a). The preliminary determination information is information obtained by the preliminary determination process (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) based on each random number described above. The contents of the preliminary judgment information are the same as the information obtained as various judgment results in the special symbol processing (see Figure 11), and specifically, whether or not there was a big hit (and whether or not there was a small hit), and whether there was a big hit or not. If so, the information is for indicating the type of jackpot, whether the performance is a reach performance or a no-reach performance, and the content of the fluctuation pattern (variation time). The advance determination information stored in the advance determination information storage area may be used together with information regarding reservation (hereinafter referred to as reservation information) corresponding to the winning ball (retention ball) for which advance determination processing has been performed, or in its own unique information separately from this reservation information. At the same time, it is included in the preliminary determination result command and sent from the game control section 200 to the production control section 300.

[Advance judgment processing]
Next, the preliminary determination process (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) will be described in detail.
In the preliminary determination process in this embodiment, the game control unit 200 performs preliminary determination as follows using a random number table similar to the random number configuration example described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21.

FIG. 24-1 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preliminary determination process (S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) according to this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 24-1, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state (S2401), and if it is determined that it is a high probability state (Yes in S2401), the high probability state A preliminary judgment of jackpot random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers is performed by selecting a table for the jackpot (S2402). On the other hand, if it is determined No in S2401, a table for a low probability state is selected and a preliminary determination of jackpot random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers is performed (S2403).

After the preliminary determination of the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number in S2402 or S2403, the gaming control unit 200 determines whether the gaming state is in a time saving state (S2404), and if it is determined that it is in a time saving state (Yes in S2404), A table for the time-saving state is selected, and a reach random number is pre-determined (S2405). Furthermore, a table for the time-saving state is selected and a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern random number is performed (S2406).
On the other hand, if it is determined No in S2404, a table for time saving and no state is selected and a preliminary determination of reach random numbers is performed (S2407). Furthermore, a table for time saving and no state is selected, and a preliminary determination of fluctuation pattern random numbers is performed (S2408).

Thereafter, the game control unit 200 uses the results of the preliminary determination of the jackpot random number, the preliminary determination result of the jackpot symbol random number, the preliminary determination result of the reach random number, and the preliminary determination result of the fluctuation pattern obtained as described above. It is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area as preliminary determination information (S2409). Furthermore, in order to transmit the preliminary determination information to the production control section 300, a preliminary determination result command including the preliminary determination information is set in the RAM 203 (S2410).

Here, the above-mentioned preliminary determination is based on the random number values (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired in response to the winning of game balls in the starting ports 121 and 122, and the determination table used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 20). ) and a determination table with a similar configuration. That is, the determination itself after selecting the determination table to be used is the same as the determination in the jackpot determination process (see S1201 in FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, the subroutine of the jackpot determination process (see S1108 in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12) used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) is called to determine the random number in the above-mentioned preliminary determination.

With this configuration, in this embodiment, in order to determine random numbers in the advance determination process, there is no need to prepare a processing function (subroutine) for determining random numbers separately from the jackpot determination process. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of control instructions and suppress an increase in the size of the program related to the jackpot determination process and the preliminary determination process. Further, as described above, when the determination table used in the preliminary determination has the same configuration as the determination table used in the jackpot determination, the determination table used in the jackpot determination may also be used in the preliminary determination.

In addition, although only the preliminary judgment regarding the special symbol lottery (whether it is a jackpot or not) has been explained here, in this embodiment, the variation pattern when performing the variable display and stop display of the special symbol is also read in advance (preliminary judgment). I do. The selection of the variation pattern in the special symbol lottery is performed using random numbers for variation pattern selection (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) and a variation pattern table (see FIG. 21 (see S1109 in FIG. 11 and FIG. 13). Therefore, when pre-reading the variation pattern, the random value for variation pattern selection obtained at the time of winning a prize and the pre-read table having the same structure as the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol processing are used to select the variation pattern. Fluctuation patterns can be predicted.

In this case, in order to pre-read the variation pattern to be selected in the variation pattern selection process, the subroutine of the variation pattern selection process (see S1109 in FIG. 11 and FIG. 13) used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) is called and used. be able to. Also, regarding the pre-read table used for pre-reading the variable pattern selection, the variable pattern table used in the variable pattern selection process of the special symbol process may be used. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of control instructions related to pre-reading of variation pattern selection, and to suppress an increase in the size of the program.

In addition, if the preliminary judgment process and the jackpot judgment process when special symbols change are performed in the same subroutine using the same judgment table group, the execution time of each process is different, so the preliminary judgment result and the jackpot judgment process when special symbols change There may be cases where the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process is different. That is, this is a case where the gaming state (high probability state or low probability state, time saving state or no time saving state) of the pachinko gaming machine 100 changes after execution of the preliminary determination process and before the start of special symbol variation. In this case, different types of judgment tables are used depending on the gaming state, so the specific judgment table used for judgment will be different when executing the preliminary judgment process and when executing the jackpot judgment process. . Therefore, even if the same random number value obtained when winning the starting slots 121 and 122 is used, the preliminary determination result and the determination result of the jackpot determination process may differ. In such a case, in the performance control unit 300, if the game state changes after the execution of the preliminary determination process and before the start of the special symbol variation, the performance based on the preliminary determination result is not executed (prohibited) control, etc. You may do so.

[Command configuration and transmission method]
Here, the configuration and transmission method of commands (effect control commands and setting commands) output from the game control section 200 to the effect control section 300 will be explained.
FIG. 24-2 is a diagram showing the structure of a command. FIG. 24-2(a) shows the data structure of a command, and FIG. 24-2(b) shows the structure of the command as a bit string.

As shown in FIG. 24-2(a), one command output from the game control section 200 to the production control section 300 is composed of 2 bytes. This command consists of a 1-byte "code" as a first data section and 1-byte "data" as a second data section. "Code" indicates the type of command, and "data" indicates the value of the command. This command is transmitted from the game control section 200 to the performance control section 300 using start-stop synchronization using one serial signal. In addition, more generally, the "code" which is the first data part has a size of a bit (a is an integer of 2 or more), and the value of the first bit is specified as either 1 or 0. , the second data section "data" has a size of n x a bits (n is an integer of 1 or more), and the value of the first 1 bit is different from the value of the first 1 bit of the first data section. Specific to the value.

In order to use start-stop synchronization, a 1-bit start bit (indicated by "S" in the diagram) is provided at the beginning of each "code" and "data" that make up the command, and a 1-bit start bit is provided at the end. An end bit (bit labeled "E" in the figure) is provided. Further, each of the "code" and "data" constituting the command is provided with a 1-bit parity bit (the bit labeled "P" in the figure).

As shown in FIG. 24-2(a), the "code" and "data" that make up the command both have a data size of 1 byte (8 bits). When transmitted, the "code" and "data" are each provided with a start bit, an end bit, and a parity bit. Therefore, in the production control unit 300 that receives the command, it is not easy to identify whether the received data string is the "code" or "data" of the command from the outer shape of the data string. Therefore, in this embodiment, a flag is set to distinguish between "code" and "data." Specifically, the value of a specific part of the 8-bit value that makes up the "code" is different from the value of the part of the 8-bit value that makes up the "data" that corresponds to the specific part of the "code". .

In the example shown in FIG. 24-2(b), the first bit of each of "code" and "data" is used as a flag. That is, in the 8-bit value that makes up the "code", the value of the first 1 bit is "1", and in the 8-bit value that makes up the "data", the value of the first 1 bit is "0". . Thereby, the effect control unit 300 can identify whether the received data string is a "code" or "data" by checking the value of the first bit following the start bit of the received data string. Note that the specific values of the flags are merely examples, and values different from those shown above may be used as long as "code" and "data" can be distinguished.

Here, the value of the first bit of the "code" is specified as "1", so the range of values that the "code" can take is 128 from 10000000B (=80H) to 11111111B (=FFH). It is. Note that the letter "B" attached to each value indicates binary notation, and the letter "H" indicates hexadecimal notation. Also, since the value of the first bit of "data" is specified as "0", the range of values that "data" can take is 128 from 00000000B (=00H) to 01111111B (=7FH). be. That is, according to the configurations shown in FIGS. 24-2(a) and 24-2(b), 128 types of commands can be set, each of which can take 128 types of values.

By the way, in the pachinko game machine 100, many types of performances are executed depending on the game state, the determination result of special symbol lottery, etc. Therefore, a large number of commands are prepared for effect control. In particular, the above 128 pieces of "data", which is a value indicating the specific contents of a command, may be insufficient. On the other hand, the number of "codes" indicating the type of command is usually smaller than the above-mentioned 128. Therefore, it is conceivable to use part of the bit string of the "code" to describe the value of the "data".

For example, consider a case where the last bit of the "code" is used to describe the value of "data". Hereinafter, each bit in the 8-bit bit string constituting the "code" and "data" will be referred to as the first bit to the eighth bit. In addition, apart from the bit string that makes up the "code," the value of the "code" that actually indicates the type of command is called the "code value." The value of the "data" shown is called a "data value." Then, the code value is described using the 1st to 7th bits of the "code" bit string, and the data value is written using all of the "data" bit strings (from the 1st bit to the 8th bit). , the 8th bit of the "code".

With this configuration, the possible range of the code value is from 1000000B (=40H) to 1111111B (=7FH) since the value of the first bit is specified as "1" and the total size is 7 bits. ) up to 64 pieces. In addition, the possible range of data values is 128 expressed by 8 bits of "data" where the value of the first bit is specified as "0", and the value of the 8th bit of "code" is "0", " 1'', the total number is 256. Therefore, it is possible to set a command having 256 types of data values.

Note that the above configuration in the case where a data value is described using a part of the "code" is merely an example, and the specific number of bits and values are not limited to the above configuration example. For example, the data value may be described using the 7th and 8th bits of the "code". More generally, a predetermined type of data (data value) is created by using predetermined bits that make up the first data portion, ie, “code,” and bits that make up the second data portion, “data.” is recorded. Then, other types of data (code values) different from the predetermined type of data (data values) are recorded using the remaining bits other than the above-mentioned predetermined bits in the first data section "code". Ru. In other words, the a bits that make up the "data" that is the second data part and the b bits that make up the "code" that is the first data part (b is an integer smaller than a-1 and greater than or equal to 1). is used to record a data value of size (a+b) bits.

Furthermore, as a means to increase the number of data values that can be handled, it is also possible to increase the number of bit strings of "data" that describe data values. For example, it is conceivable to prepare "first data" and "second data" as bit strings that describe data values. In this case, if each bit string is 8 bits, it becomes possible to describe a data value using a total of 16 bit strings. If the second bit of the 8-bit bit string is used as a flag in order to identify "first data" and "second data", for example, the first bit and second bit of "first data" can be set to "00B", and the first and second bits of "second data" can be set to "01B". Note that the first bit has a value of "0" as a flag for identifying it as a "code". In other words, "data" which is the second data part is divided into 8-bit units (more generally, , for each a bit above), the same value as the value of the first bit is set.

With this configuration, the range of values that the "first data" can take is 64 from 00000000B (=00H) to 00111111B (=3FH), and the range of values that the "second data" can take is: Since there are 64 pieces from 01000000B (=40H) to 01111111B (=7FH), the total is 4096 (=64×64) pieces. Note that here, the first bit is used as a flag to identify "code" and "data" ("first data" and "second data"), and "first data" and "second data" are distinguished. Although the second bit is used as a flag for identifying four types of bit strings, the first and second bits may be used to set flags for identifying four types of bit strings. For example, for "code", the value of the first and second bits can be "11B", and for "data", the value of the first and second bits can be "00B", "01B", or "10B". Conceivable.

[Example of configuration for command output in RAM of gaming control unit]
FIG. 24-3 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a command storage area in the RAM 203.
As shown in FIG. 24-3, the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 has a command storage area (storage area) to which individual commands generated by various processes such as the main control process shown in FIG. . In the example shown in FIG. 24-3, 31 command storage areas from area 01 to area 031 are set in the RAM 203. Here, the assignment of commands to each command storage area does not necessarily have a one-to-one correspondence. For example, it is possible to allocate multiple commands that are not generated simultaneously to the same command storage area. In the example shown in Figure 24-3, multiple commands are assigned to area 01, area 09, area 012, area 019, area 020, area 021, area 022, area 023, and area 030, and other commands One command is assigned to each storage area.

In the example shown in FIG. 24-3, commands related to power-on are assigned to area 01. Commands related to power-on include commands for controlling power-on when RAM is cleared and commands for controlling power-on during recovery. Since these commands are generated in different scenes, they are not generated at the same time, and all of them are assigned to area 01.

Areas 02 to 04 are assigned three commands related to winning in the first starting port 121 (described as "starting port 1 winning" in the figure). One of the commands related to winning in the first starting opening 121 is a command (in the figure, "Special Figure 1 It is described as "Symbol Pre-Reading") and is assigned to area 02. The other one is a command (described as "Special Figure 1 Variation Pattern Pre-Read" in the figure) that indicates the pre-read (pre-determination) result of the variation pattern specified together with the determination result, and is assigned to area 03. Furthermore, another command is a command (in the figure, "Special symbol 1 pending (+1)") that indicates that the number of pending special symbol drawings has been updated (here, the value is increased by 1) based on the prize entered into the first starting opening 121. ) and is assigned to area 04.

Three commands related to winning in the second starting port 122 (described as "starting port 2 winning" in the figure) are assigned to areas 05 to 07. One of the commands related to winning in the second starting hole 122 is a command (in the figure, "Special Figure 2 Symbol Pre-Read") that indicates the judgment result in the preliminary judgment (see S911 in FIG. 9) based on the winning in the second starting hole 122. ) and is assigned to area 05. The other one is a command (described as "Special Figure 2 Variation Pattern Pre-read" in the figure) that indicates the pre-read result of the variation pattern specified together with the determination result, and is assigned to area 06. The other one is a command (in the figure, "Special symbol 2 pending (+1)") that indicates that the number of pending special symbol drawings has been updated (here, the value is increased by 1) based on the prize entered into the second starting port 122. ) and is assigned to area 07.

Areas 08 to 010 contain five commands related to normal symbol drawings (in the figure, "Permanent pattern hold", "Permanent pattern type", "Permanent pattern confirmed", "Public pattern open/close", "Permanent pattern reserved"), respectively. ) has been assigned. Among the commands related to the normal symbol lottery, one of the "general symbol reservation" commands indicates that the number of reservations for the regular symbol lottery has been updated (here, the value is increased by 1) based on the game ball passing through the gate 124. This is a command (in the figure, it is written as "Public drawing reservation (+1)") and is assigned to area 08. The "Normal symbol type" command is a command indicating that the normal symbol representing the determination result has been specified in the normal symbol lottery and the variable display of the normal symbol display 223 has started (in the figure, it is written as "Normal symbol variation start"). and is assigned to area 09. The "normal symbol confirmation" command is a command that stops and displays the normal symbol display 223 in the normal symbol lottery, and indicates that the normal symbol representing the determination result of the normal symbol lottery has been confirmed (in the figure, it is called "normal symbol confirmation"). ) and is assigned to area 09. The "Public figure open/close" command is a command (described as "Public power open/close" in the figure) that indicates to operate the electric tulip 123, which is a normal electric accessory (auxiliary game), based on the determination result of the normal pattern lottery. Yes, and assigned to area 09. The other one of the "Fuzu design reservation" commands is a command that indicates that the number of reservations has been updated (in this case, the value is decreased by 1) due to the processing of the regular symbol lottery (in the figure, "Fuzu design reservation (- 1)" and is assigned to area 010.

Here, in the normal symbol lottery process, the variable display of the normal symbol, the stop display of the normal symbol, and the operation of the electric tulip 123 by the auxiliary game are sequentially executed as a series of operations. Then, while the electric tulip 123 is in operation, the variable display of the normal symbols based on another game ball passing through the gate 124 will not start (see FIG. 16). Therefore, the above-mentioned three types of commands, ``general map type'', ``common map confirmation'', and ``general power switch opening/closing'', are never generated at the same time. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 24-3, these three types of commands are allocated to the same command storage area (area 09).

Areas 011 to 014 are assigned nine commands related to special symbol lottery (described as "special symbol fluctuation" and "special symbol special electric" in the figure). Among the commands related to special symbol drawings, one of the "special symbol variation" commands is a command ( In the figure, it is indicated as "gaming state") and is assigned to area 011. Another one of the "special symbol variation" commands is to designate a special symbol representing the judgment result of the special symbol lottery in the special symbol lottery, and to display the variable display on the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222. This is a command (described as "special figure designation" in the figure) indicating that the program has started, and is assigned to area 012. Yet another one of the "special symbol variation" commands is a command (described as "variation pattern" in the figure) that specifies a variation pattern of special symbol variation performed in the special symbol lottery, and is assigned to area 013. Yet another one of the "special pattern fluctuation" commands is a command that indicates that the number of reservations has been updated (in this case, the value is decreased by 1) due to the processing of the special symbol lottery (in the figure, "special pattern reservation ( -1)" and is assigned to area 014.

On the other hand, one of the "special map special train" commands is a command indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a waiting state for a customer (described as "waiting for a customer" in the figure), and is assigned to area 012. Another one of the "Special figure special electric" commands is a command (in the figure, "Special electric (described as "open") and is assigned to area 012. Still another one of the "special figure special electric" commands is a command (described as "jackpot OP" in the figure) indicating that the opening operation of the jackpot game has started, and is assigned to area 012. Still another one of the "special figure special electric" commands is a command (described as "jackpot ED" in the figure) indicating that the ending operation of the jackpot game has started, and is assigned to area 012. Still another one of the "Special symbol special electric" commands stops and displays the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222, and indicates that the special symbol representing the judgment result of the special symbol lottery has been determined. This is a command shown (described as "Special Figure Confirmation" in the figure) and is assigned to area 012.

Here, in the processing of the special symbol lottery, the variable display of the special symbol, the stop display of the special symbol, and the operation of the big prize opening 125 by the special game are sequentially executed as a series of operations. Then, during the execution of the special game, the variable display of special symbols based on winnings of other game balls will not be started (see FIG. 11). In addition, in the jackpot game, the opening action, the operation of the jackpot 125, and the ending action are sequentially executed as a series of operations. Therefore, none of the "special figure designation" command and the five types of "special figure special electric" commands in the above-mentioned "special figure variation" command are generated at the same time. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 24-3, these six types of commands are allocated to the same command storage area (area 012).

Areas 015 to 018 are assigned four commands related to switch detection (indicated as "switch passage" in the figure). One of the commands related to switch detection is a command indicating that the game ball has passed through the gate 124L on the left side of the game area 111 (described as "left gate passage" in the figure), and is assigned to area 015. Another command related to switch detection is a command indicating that the game ball has passed through the gate 124R on the right side of the game area 111 (described as "pass through right gate" in the figure), and is assigned to area 016. . Yet another command related to switch detection is a command indicating that a game ball has entered the second starting port 122 (described as "passing starting port SW2 (electric chew)" in the figure), and is assigned to area 017. It is being Yet another command related to switch detection is a command indicating that a game ball has won in the grand prize opening 125 (described as "grand prize opening prize" in the figure), and is assigned to the area 018.

Commands related to errors (denoted as "error" in the figure) are assigned to areas 019 to 030. Errors detected by the game control unit 200 of the pachinko game machine 100 include, for example, a full tank error indicating that the tray 153 (see FIGS. 1 and 2(b)) is full of payout balls, and a front side of the game slot 150. A door open error indicating that the frame is open, a payout error indicating that the payout unit can no longer pay out game balls, and various detection switches such as the gate switch 214 and the start switch 211, 212 are not activated. There is an error such as a switch not connected, which indicates that the device is connected. In the example shown in FIG. 24-3, these errors are assigned to areas 019 to 023, respectively. Also, for each error, there are commands that indicate that each error has occurred (indicated as "~error start" in the figure) and commands that indicate that each error has been resolved (indicated as "~error end" in the figure). , are allocated to the same command storage area.

In addition, various control items and error items are set according to the specifications and functions of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and commands corresponding to the control items, commands indicating that an error has occurred, and depending on the type of error, the error can be resolved. It may be configured to generate a command or the like indicating this. These commands can then be appropriately allocated to the command storage area. In the example shown in FIG. 24-3, commands related to various errors are individually assigned to areas 024 to 030. Further, a command for detecting and notifying a specific winning prize (described as "winning notification designation" in the figure) is assigned to the area 031.

As described above, in the command storage area provided in the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200, one or more types of commands are associated with one command storage area. Then, in the main control process shown in FIG. 8, the game control section 200 stores the generated command in the command storage area associated with the command.
Here, in the main control processing, not all commands are necessarily generated every time one cycle of processing is executed. For example, when there is no winning in the first starting opening 121 or the second starting opening 122, the command related to winning in the starting opening 121, 122 and the "special figure variation" command are not generated. Also, among the commands related to the regular symbol lottery, the "regular symbol open/close" command and the "special symbol special electric" command are not generated unless it is the timing to activate these electric accessories. Further, a command related to the occurrence of an error is not generated unless an error has occurred in the first place.
Therefore, when output processing of the main control processing (see S806 in FIG. 8) is performed, commands are normally stored in some command storage areas among the command storage areas provided in the RAM 203. No commands are stored in the other command storage areas.

[Command output behavior]
FIG. 24-4 is a flowchart showing the content of output processing by the output control unit 240.
In this embodiment, the output control unit 240 focuses on the command storage areas of the RAM 203 shown in FIG. 24-3 in order from the top (in order of area number), and outputs the commands stored in each command storage area. .

As shown in FIG. 24-4, the output control section 240 of the game control section 200 first selects the first command storage area (area 01 in the example shown in FIG. 24-3) among the command storage areas provided in the RAM 203. (S2411), and checks whether a command is stored (S2412). If the command is stored (S2412: Yes), the output control unit 240 reads the stored command and outputs it to the production control unit 300 (S2413).

If no command is stored in the command storage area of interest (initially area 01) (No in S2412), or after outputting the command stored in the command storage area in S2413, the output control unit 240 , it is checked whether there is a command storage area with the next area number (S2414). If there is a next command storage area (Yes in S2414), the output control unit 240 focuses on that command storage area (S2415), returns to S2412, checks whether there is a command (S2412), and outputs (S2413). repeat. Then, if the last command storage area (area 031 in the example shown in Figure 24-3) is processed, there is no command storage area with the next area number (No in S2414), so the output process ends. do.

[Setting the command output order]
In the main control process, when a command is generated in each process described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19, the generated command is normally immediately stored in the corresponding command storage area of the RAM 203. That is, commands are generally stored in the command storage area in the order in which the commands are generated.
On the other hand, as explained with reference to FIG. 24-4, in the output processing by the output control unit 240, each command storage area is focused on and stored in a certain order (in the above example, in the order of area numbers). Output the command. That is, the commands are output in a specific predetermined order, regardless of the order in which the commands are generated. This is because in order to prevent confusion in the performance control of the performance control unit 300 based on commands, it may be desirable to transmit specific commands to the performance control unit 300 in a specific order. That is, since the production control unit 300 executes production control based on the commands in the order received from the game control unit 200, a difference in the order of receiving commands may cause confusion such as inconsistency in production control. , this needs to be prevented.

[Operation of production control section]
Next, the operation of the production control section 300 will be explained.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the operation of the production control section 300.
The operation of the production control section 300 consists of a main process shown in FIG. 25(a) and an interrupt process shown in FIG. 25(b). Referring to FIG. 25(a), the production control unit 300 first performs initial settings at startup (S2501), and after setting the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) cycle (S2502), according to the set cycle. , while updating the random numbers used in production control (S2503), accepts interrupt processing.

Interrupt processing is performed periodically according to the cycle set in S2502. Referring to FIG. 25(b), in this interrupt process, the production control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 and performs a command reception process (S2511). In this command reception process, the performance content (performance pattern) is selected. Further, the performance control unit 300 performs performance button processing for accepting operations of the performance button 161B and the like by the player (S2512). Thereafter, the effect control unit 300 performs a command sending process to send a command including information on the selected effect pattern to the image/sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 (S2513). As a result, effects are performed by displaying an image on the image display section 114, outputting sound, moving the movable accessory 115, emitting light from the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, and the like.

[Command reception processing by the production control unit]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command reception process (S2511 in FIG. 25(b)).
In this command reception process, the production control unit 300 first determines whether or not a preliminary determination result command and a pending number increase command have been received (S2601). The preliminary determination result command and the pending number increase command are set in the game control unit 200 in the start switch processing shown in FIG. 9 (S906, S907, S913, S914), and are set in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG. ) is the command sent to the production control unit 300.
When the production control unit 300 determines that the preliminary determination result command and the hold count increase command have been received (S2601: Yes), the effect control unit 300 adds 1 to the hold count held in the RAM 303 (S2602). Furthermore, the production control unit 300 performs a pre-judgment production selection process based on the pre-judgment result command and the reservation number increase command (S2603). In addition, the content of the advance determination effect selection process will be explained later.

If the received command is not a preliminary determination result command or a pending number increase command (No in S2601), the effect control unit 300 determines whether the received command is a fluctuation start command (S2604). This fluctuation start command is a command that is set in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 in the game control section 200 (S1111) and sent to the production control section 300 in the output processing shown in FIG. 8 (S806).
If the received command is a variation start command (Yes in S2604), the effect control unit 300 executes effect selection processing (S2605). Furthermore, when a fluctuation start command is received, a random value for effect control used in the effect selection process is acquired. This random value is a random value that is periodically updated in S2503 of the main process shown in FIG. 25(a). Details of the effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a preliminary determination result command, a pending number increase command, or a fluctuation start command (No in S2601 and S2604), the production control unit 300 determines whether the received command is a fluctuation stop command (S2606). This fluctuation stop command is a command that is set in the game control section 200 in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 (S1114) and sent to the production control section 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG.
If the received command is a variation stop command (Yes in S2606), the production control unit 300 executes a process during the completion of variation production (S2607). In addition, in the fluctuating performance finishing process, the performance control unit 300 analyzes the received fluctuation stop command and sets in the RAM 303 a fluctuating performance end command for instructing the end of the symbol fluctuation performance.

If the received command is not a preliminary determination result command, a pending number increase command, a fluctuation start command, or a fluctuation stop command (No in S2601, S2604, and S2606), the production control unit 300 starts the opening operation of the jackpot game based on the received command. It is determined whether or not the opening command is intended to do so (S2608). This opening command is a command that is set in the stopping process shown in FIG. 14 (S1418) and sent to the production control section 300 in the output process shown in FIG. 8 (S806).
If the received command is an opening command (Yes in S2608), the production control unit 300 executes a jackpot production selection process (S2609). Details of the jackpot performance selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a preliminary determination result command, a pending number increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, or an opening command (No in S2601, S2604, S2606, and S2608), the production control unit 300 determines that the received command is a jackpot game. It is determined whether the ending command is for starting the ending operation of (S2610). This ending command is a command that is set in the big prize opening process shown in FIG. 17 (S1713) and sent to the production control section 300 in the output process (S806) shown in FIG.
If the received command is an ending command (Yes in S2610), the effect control unit 300 executes an ending effect selection process (S2611). Details of the ending effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a preliminary determination result command, a pending number increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, or an ending command (No in S2601, S2604, S2606, S2608, and S2610), then the production control unit 300 , the received command executes a customer waiting command reception process for transitioning to a customer waiting state (S2612). Details of the customer waiting command reception process will be described later.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the contents of the advance determination effect selection process (S2603) and the effect selection process (S2605) of FIG. 26.
In the advance determination performance selection process, the performance control unit 300 first analyzes the advance determination result command received from the game control unit 200 (S2801). Furthermore, the production control unit 300 analyzes the pending number increase command received from the game control unit 200 (S2802). Then, the performance control unit 300 selects a performance pattern (pre-judgment performance pattern) to be used in the pre-judgment performance based on the pre-judgment result command and the reservation number increase command (S2803).

Here, as the advance judgment performance pattern, various performance patterns can be provided that foretell the random number determination result by the special symbol processing before the start of fluctuation based on the random number determination result by the special symbol processing. For example, a performance such as a hold display performance or a continuous preview performance can be provided as a predetermined performance pattern. In this embodiment, when a reserved ball occurs, a display representing the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first special symbol reserved display 218 and the second special symbol reserved display 219 of the display 130 (see FIG. 2). At the same time, a hold display indicating the occurrence of hold and the number of holds is displayed on the image display unit 114 (hold display effect). Therefore, in this hold display performance, by reflecting the preliminary judgment result in the display mode of the hold display, the player can see the judgment result when the random number judgment is subsequently performed by special symbol processing regarding the held ball. It can be a pre-judgment performance that suggests.

In addition, here we have explained the case where the pending display effect is used as a preliminary judgment effect, but by reflecting it in the contents of various effects performed before the start of fluctuations based on the judgment results of random numbers by special symbol processing, various preview effects can be realized. It becomes possible to do this. For example, a performance using a performance image displayed on the image display unit 114, a performance using light emission from the panel lamp 116 or the frame lamp 157, a performance using the movement of movable characters, a performance using sound output such as music or sound effects, etc. can be prepared in advance. It can be set as a judgment performance pattern.

Further, the preliminary determination performance is executed in conjunction with the symbol variation for other winning balls that is performed before the symbol variation for the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the preliminary determination has been performed. In this embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls is four per starting port (first starting port 121 or second starting port 122) (see FIG. 9). Furthermore, priority is given to extinguishing the reserved balls in the second starting port 122. In this case, for example, if a preliminary determination is made for a reserved ball with the second starting port 122, before a symbol variation is performed for that reserved ball, including the currently varying variation (referred to as the variation), Symbol changes will be made for a maximum of four winning balls. In a preview performance related to a reserved ball for which a preliminary judgment has been made, if multiple symbol changes occur before the symbol change for that reserved ball, a preview performance that spans the multiple symbol changes (continuous preview performance) ).

Then, the production control unit 300 sets in the RAM 303 a pending number command that includes the value of the pending number after the addition and information on the pre-judgment production pattern selected in the pre-judgment production selection process (S2804). Note that the reservation number command includes information indicating the selected predetermined performance pattern to the CPU 311 of the image/sound control unit 310. By receiving the pending number command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for causing the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected predetermined production pattern. Based on the display list, etc., the VDP 314 reads out image data and audio data representing the selected pre-judgment effect pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, and expresses the pre-judgment effect using the image display section 114 and the speaker 156. .

In the performance selection process, the performance control unit 300 first analyzes the received variation start command (S2811). Further, the value of the number of reservations held in the RAM 303 is subtracted by 1 (S2812). Then, the production control unit 300 displays the information on the image display unit 114 based on various setting information (information such as the type of jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot game, and the variation pattern) obtained from the analysis result of the variation start command. A variation effect pattern of symbol variation based on the image is selected (S2813).

Finally, the production control unit 300 sets in the RAM 303 a variable production start command that instructs to start executing the selected production (S2814). Note that the variable effect start command includes information indicating the selected variable effect pattern in order to notify the CPU 311 of the selected variable effect pattern. Upon receiving the variable effect start command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for causing the VDP 314 to draw and output images and sounds corresponding to the selected variable effect pattern. Based on the display list and the like, the VDP 314 reads out image data and audio data representing the selected variable effect pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316, and expresses the variable effect using the image display section 114 and the speaker 156.

Although not described in detail, in the process of selecting a variation effect pattern of symbol variation in S2813, a variation effect pattern is determined based on the variation pattern. Based on the variable effect pattern determined here, the variable display of decorative symbols, the background effect, the preview effect, etc. are determined. Note that the variable display of decorative symbols is an effect display performed on the image display section 114 in conjunction with the variable display of special symbols performed on the first special symbol display 221 or the second special symbol display 222. In this fluctuating display of decorative symbols, a reach effect or the like is performed. Note that, unlike this embodiment, if a plurality of variable effect patterns are set for the variable pattern, the effect random number (one of the random numbers updated in S2503 of FIG. 25(a)) , the effect random number value is obtained when the change start command is received), and the variable effect pattern may be selected by lottery.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot effect selection process (S2609) of FIG. 26.
In this jackpot production selection process, the production control unit 300 first analyzes the received opening command (including information about the type of jackpot symbol) (S3001), and selects a production pattern (jackpot production pattern) (S3002). . Then, the performance control unit 300 reads image data and sound data used for the performance according to the selected jackpot performance pattern from the ROM 302, sets in the RAM 303 a jackpot performance start command that instructs the selected performance together with these data, The jackpot effect selection process ends (S3003). This determines the performance during the jackpot. In addition, in selecting the jackpot performance pattern (S3002), a determination may be made based on a random number value obtained at the time of command reception.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process (S2611) in FIG. 26.
In this ending performance selection process, the performance control unit 300 first analyzes the received ending command (including information about the type of jackpot symbol) (S3101), and selects a performance pattern (ending performance pattern) (S3102). . Then, the performance control unit 300 reads image data and sound data used for the performance according to the selected ending performance pattern from the ROM 302, and sets in the RAM 303, together with these data, an ending performance start command that instructs the selected performance. The ending effect selection process ends (S3103). In addition, in the selection of the ending effect pattern (S3102), a determination may be made based on a random value obtained at the time of command reception.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting command reception process (S2612) in FIG.
The production control unit 300 determines whether a customer waiting command for transitioning to a customer waiting state has been received (S3201). When the customer waiting command is received (Yes in S3201), the production control unit 300 starts measuring the elapsed time (S3202) and turns on the measurement flag in the RAM 303 (S3203). On the other hand, if the received command is not a customer waiting command (No in S3201), the production control unit 300 determines whether the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 is turned on (S3204). If the measurement flag is OFF (No in S3204), the customer waiting command reception process ends.

If the measurement flag is ON (Yes in S3204 or turned ON in S3203), then the production control unit 300 determines whether the measurement time has reached a predetermined time-up time (for example, 10 seconds). (S3205). If the time has not expired (No in S3205), the customer waiting command reception process ends. On the other hand, if the time is up (Yes in S3205), the performance control unit 300 turns off the measurement flag held in the RAM 303 (S3206), and sends a customer waiting performance command to the RAM 303 for performing the customer waiting performance (demonstration performance). is set, and the customer waiting command reception process is ended (S3207).

When the command reception process is completed as described above, any one of the variable performance start command, variable performance end command, jackpot performance start command, ending performance start command, and customer waiting performance command is set in the RAM 303.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the contents of the production button process (S2512 in FIG. 25(b)).
In this performance button processing, the performance control unit 300 first determines whether or not the player operates the operation means such as the performance button 161B during a predetermined reception period (validity period) (S3301). Here, the operation of the operating means includes pressing the production button 161B and turning it on, and pressing the center key and the surrounding keys of the production key 162 and turning it on. Furthermore, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided with an operation device such as a touch panel other than the performance button 161B and the performance key 162, this includes detection of the operation of the device. The performance control unit 300 receives operation signals from the controllers of these devices and detects that the operation has been performed.

If the operation means such as the production button 161B is operated (Yes in S3301), the production control unit 300 sets a production button command including information indicating the operation content of the operation means in the RAM 303, and ends the production button processing. (S3302).

After this, the production control unit 300 performs the command transmission process (S2513) in FIG. The information is transmitted to the control unit 320. Then, based on the received command, the image/sound control section 310 and the lamp control section 320 display an image on the image display section 114, output sound, operate the movable accessory 115, emit light from the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, etc. to execute the set effects.

(Production operation device)
Next, the configuration of the production operation device will be explained.
FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram of the production operation device 161 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 32(A), the game frame 150 includes a production operation device 161 that can be operated by a player. The performance operation device 161 is provided on the lower side of the game frame 150 and near the upper tray 153. Further, the performance operation device 161 is provided with the above-mentioned performance button 161B (see FIG. 2(b)).
Note that, in the following description, the front side of the game frame 150 shown in FIG. 32(A) on the page will be referred to as the "front side", the back side on the page will be referred to as the "rear side", and these directions will be referred to as the "back and forth direction". In addition, the right side of the game frame 150 shown in FIG. 32(A) on the page will be referred to as the "right side", the left side on the page will be referred to as the "left side", and these directions will be referred to as the "left-right direction" for explanation. Furthermore, the upper side of the page of the game frame 150 shown in FIG. 32(A) will be referred to as the "upper side", the lower side of the page will be referred to as the "lower side", and these directions will be referred to as the "vertical direction" for explanation.
Further, the front side of the game slot 150 is the player side that the player faces. The above-mentioned directional relationship corresponds to the directional relationship seen from the player playing the pachinko game machine 100.

The production operation device 161 of this embodiment is provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction according to the progress of the game. More specifically, the production operation device 161 is provided so as to be movable upward as shown in FIG. 32(B) from the position shown in FIG. It is provided so that it can be moved downward from the position. In addition, below, the state of the production operation device 161 shown in FIG. 32(A), that is, the state in which the production operation device 161 is not moved upward, will be referred to as a "non-projecting state." Further, the state of the production operation device 161 shown in FIG. 32(B), that is, the state in which the production operation device 161 has moved upward is referred to as a "protruding state."

As shown in FIG. 32(B), the production operation device 161 is provided with a production lever 161L that can be operated by the player. The player can grasp the production lever 161L and pull it forward.
When the production operation device 161 is in the protruding state, the player can operate the production lever 161L. On the other hand, when the performance operation device 161 is in the non-protruding state (see FIG. 32(A)), the player cannot operate the performance lever 161L. On the other hand, the production button 161B is provided at the top of the production operation device 161, and the player can press the production button 161B regardless of whether the production operation device 161 is in the non-protruding state or the protruding state. can be operated.

FIG. 33 is a partial plan view of the game frame 150.
As shown in FIG. 33, the game frame 150 includes a performance key 162 (see FIG. 2(b)), a ball rental button 163, a return button 164, a ball removal button 165, a light amount adjustment section 166, and a volume adjustment section. 167. Further, a warning sticker 41 is pasted on the game slot 150 to call attention to the player. The ball lending button 163, the return button 164, the ball removal button 165, the light amount adjustment section 166, the volume adjustment section 167, and the caution sticker 41 are all located on the lower side of the game frame 150 and are located on the lower side of the production operation device 161. It is located nearby.

The production keys 162 include a rear button 162a located on the rear side of the production keys 162, a front button 162b located on the front side of the production keys 162, a right button 162c located on the right side of the production keys 162, and a right button 162c located on the right side of the production keys 162. A left button 162d located on the left side is provided.

The ball rental button 163 is a button for renting game balls. When the player presses the ball lending button 163, the balance stored in a storage medium accepted by a ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the pachinko game machine 100 is subtracted, and game balls are lent out.
The return button 164 is a button for returning a storage medium such as a card that stores the balance. When the player presses the return button 164, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine.
The ball removal button 165 is a button for moving the game balls accumulated in the upper tray 153 to the lower tray. When the player presses the ball removal button 165, the game balls accumulated in the upper tray 153 fall into the lower tray through a passage (not shown) connecting the upper tray 153 and the lower tray.

The light amount adjustment section 166 is an operation section for adjusting the light amount of various lamps. The light amount adjustment section 166 is provided with an increase button 166a for increasing the light amount and a decrease button 166b for decreasing the light amount. When the player presses the increase button 166a of the light intensity adjustment section 166, the effect control section 300 increases the light intensity of the various lamps. Furthermore, when the player presses the decrease button 166b of the light intensity adjustment section 166, the effect control section 300 reduces the light intensity of the various lamps.
The volume adjustment section 167 is an operation section for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156. The volume adjustment section 167 is provided with an increase button 167a for increasing the volume and a decrease button 167b for decreasing the volume. When the player presses the increase button 167a of the volume adjustment section 167, the performance control section 300 increases the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156. Furthermore, when the player presses the decrease button 167b of the volume adjustment section 167, the performance control section 300 decreases the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156.

Each of the above-described production button 161B, production lever 161L, production key 162, light amount adjustment section 166, and volume adjustment section 167 is an example of an input device for the player to input information regarding production. When various input devices are operated, the production control unit 300 receives an operation signal indicating that the input device has been operated, and detects that the input device has been operated.

The production operation device 161 of this embodiment is provided at the center of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (see FIG. 1) in the left-right direction. In addition, the production key 162, the ball rental button 163, the return button 164, the ball removal button 165, the light amount adjustment section 166, the volume adjustment section 167, and the caution sticker 41 are all provided on the right side of the production operation device 161. ing. That is, the production key 162, the ball lending button 163, the return button 164, the ball removal button 165, the light amount adjustment section 166, the volume adjustment section 167, and the warning sticker 41 are all provided on the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 100. There is.
In addition, the caution sticker 41 of this embodiment is provided near the performance operation device 161, the performance key 162, the ball rental button 163, the return button 164, the ball removal button 165, the light amount adjustment section 166, and the volume adjustment section 167. ing.

(Caution sticker)
Next, the caution sticker 41 will be explained.
34(A) is a diagram showing the front side of the caution sticker 41, and FIG. 34(B) is a diagram showing the back side of the caution sticker 41.
The attention sticker 41 shown in FIG. 34(A) includes an operation attention call part 410 that calls attention to the operation of the production lever 161L, a lever attention call part 411 that calls attention to the existence of the production lever 161L, and an upper part. An accessory attention calling section 412 that calls attention to the presence of the object 5 is provided. Further, the caution sticker 41 includes a caution illustration section 413 in which a picture to call attention is shown, a general warning mark section 414 in which a mark to call attention is shown, and letters to call attention to An attention-calling character portion 419 is provided.

The operation attention calling section 410 displays information for calling the player's attention when operating the production lever 161L. More specifically, the operation alert unit 410 includes a device for alerting the player to unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the player operates the production lever 161L. Information is displayed. In the illustrated example, the operation alert section 410 displays a text that reads, "Be careful of getting your hand caught when operating the production lever."
The lever attention calling section 411 is provided with a lever attention-calling section 411 that is provided when the player unintentionally presses the effect lever 161L when the effect operation device 161 changes from the non-protruding state (see FIG. 32(A)) to the protruding state (see FIG. 32(B)). Information is displayed to warn people not to come into contact with the person. In the illustrated example, the lever attention calling section 411 displays the text "Beware of protruding production lever."
The accessory attention calling section 412 displays information for alerting the player to the player's unintentional contact with the upper accessory 5 when the upper accessory 5 moves upward. In the illustrated example, the accessory object attention calling section 412 displays the text "Beware of the accessory objects popping out at the top of the frame."

The attention-calling illustration section 413 displays a target illustration section 413L in which the object of attention is illustrated by a picture, and an impact illustration section 413I for making the player imagine an impact.
The target illustration section 413L shows a picture imitating the production lever 161L, which is the target of attention. More specifically, the target illustration section 413L shows a picture of a structure similar to, but not the same as, the production lever 161L.
The impact illustration section 413I is provided adjacent to the target illustration section 413L. In this case, the player who sees the attention-calling illustration section 413 can be made aware that the object of attention in the attention-calling sticker 41 is the production lever 161L. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player imagine that there is a possibility that the player will collide with the production lever 161L or a structure in the vicinity of the production lever 161L.

The mark provided in the general warning mark section 414 has a display mode defined by the ISO standard and the JIS standard. More specifically, the mark provided in the general warning mark section 414 is a mark defined as a style of a safety sign according to ISO3864 and JIS9101, and is used to warn the user. The mark shown in the general warning mark section 414 is hereinafter referred to as a general warning mark. General warning marks are used together with text, illustrations, etc. to indicate potential danger, and call attention to the user.
The general warning mark section 414 includes an exclamation mark 415, an outline 416 having a triangular shape surrounding the exclamation mark 415, a background part 417 located between the exclamation mark 415 and the outline 416, and a triangular shape. An outline 418 surrounding the outer shape line 416 is provided.

An exclamation mark 415 is provided at the center of the general warning mark section 414. In the illustrated example, exclamation mark 415 is shown in black.
Outline 416 is shown in black.
The background portion 417 is shown in yellow.
Outline 418 is shown in yellow.
In this way, the general warning mark section 414 has display colors of black, yellow, black, and yellow in order from the center to the outside, that is, in the order of the exclamation mark 415, the background section 417, the outline 416, and the outline 418. It becomes. In this case, the difference in brightness between the adjacent yellow and black colors in the general warning mark section 414 stands out, making it easy for the player to notice the presence of the general warning mark section 414. This makes it easier for people to recognize the danger.

The attention-calling character section 419 is provided next to the general warning mark section 414, and together with the general warning mark section 414, alerts the player. In the illustrated example, the text “Caution” is shown in the caution text portion 419.

The attention sticker 41 also has a notch 41N formed by cutting out one of the four corners of the rectangle. As a result, the length L1 of the first side of the left end of the caution sticker 41 is longer than the length L2 of the second side of the right end. Further, in the caution sticker 41, the length L3 of the third side at the upper end is longer than the length L4 of the fourth side at the lower end.

As described above, the caution sticker 41 is provided with the operation caution part 410 and the caution illustration part 413. In this case, the player who sees the operation attention calling section 410 and the attention calling illustration section 413 can be made to imagine that there is a risk that the player's hand may get caught in the production lever 161L when the player operates the production lever 161L.
Further, the caution sticker 41 is provided with a lever caution portion 411 and a caution illustration portion 413. In this case, the player who sees the lever attention-calling section 411 and the attention-calling illustration section 413 is given an image of the possibility that the player may collide with the production lever 161L when the production operation device 161 changes from the non-protruding state to the protruding state. can be done.

Further, as described above, the caution sticker 41 is located near the production button 161B, production lever 161L, production key 162, ball rental button 163, return button 164, ball removal button 165, light amount adjustment section 166, and volume adjustment section 167. It is set in.
The production button 161B, the production lever 161L, the production key 162, the ball lending button 163, the return button 164, the ball removal button 165, the light amount adjustment section 166, and the volume adjustment section 167 are operation means that can be operated by the player, respectively. . The area near the area where these operating means are provided is easily visible to the player when the player operates each operating means. Therefore, in this embodiment, by providing an attention sticker 41 in an area that is easily visible to the player when the player operates each operation means, the caution sticker 41 is provided to alert the player when the player operates each operation means. This makes it easy for the player to notice the presence of the sticker 41.

Further, the attention-calling sticker 41 is provided with an accessory attention-calling part 412. That is, the attention-calling sticker 41 of this embodiment not only calls attention to the production lever 161L but also calls attention to the upper accessory 5. In other words, the caution sticker 41 includes information for calling attention to each of the plurality of caution objects. In this case, compared to the case where the pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided with an attention-calling sticker 41 for each object of attention, the design of the pachinko gaming machine 100 can be suppressed, and the player can notice the objects of caution. It is possible to call attention to each situation.

Further, the attention-calling sticker 41 does not call attention to the production button 161B of the production operation device 161, but calls attention to the production lever 161L. In this case, even if the performance operation device 161 is provided with the performance button 161B and the performance lever 161L as one unit, the player who sees the caution sticker 41 will be notified of the part of the performance operation device 161 that is the target of attention. It becomes easier to recognize.

Note that the configuration of the caution sticker 41 is not limited to the above example. For example, the caution sticker 41 may not include the caution illustration portion 413. In this case, the background color of the caution sticker 41 may be black. In other words, the color of the portion of the caution sticker 41 where the operation caution portion 410, the lever caution portion 411, the accessory caution portion 412, the general warning mark portion 414, and the caution text portion 419 are not provided. may be black. Furthermore, the text shown in the operation attention calling section 410, the lever attention calling section 411, the accessory attention calling section 412, and the attention calling text section 419 may be white. In this case, only the general warning mark portion 414 of the caution sticker 41 has a yellow portion, and the other portions different from the general warning mark portion 414 are white or black. Therefore, compared to the case where the background of the caution sticker 41 and the text shown on the caution sticker 41 are yellow, the general warning mark section 414 becomes more noticeable, and the player who sees the caution sticker 41 receives the general warning. This makes it easier to notice the presence of the mark portion 414.

Next, the back side of the caution sticker 41 will be explained.
One side of the back side of the caution sticker 41 is an adhesive surface (adhesive surface) for adhering to the game frame 150. Then, the entire back surface of this caution sticker 41 is attached to the game frame 150. That is, the caution sticker 41 is pasted on the game frame 150 without the adhesive surfaces being pasted together.
When a worker pasting the caution sticker 41 on the pachinko game machine 100 views the caution sticker 41 from the back side, the yellow of the background portion 417 and the yellow of the outline 418 are transparent, as shown in FIG. 34(B). visible to the worker. Furthermore, although the colors of the exclamation mark 415 and the outline 416 are not visible to the operator, the exclamation mark 415 is surrounded by the background part 417, and the outline 416 is sandwiched between the background part 417 and the outline 418. , exclamation mark 415 and outline 416 are visible to the operator. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the operator who views the caution sticker 41 from the back side aware that the general warning mark section 414 is displayed on the caution sticker 41. In this case, it becomes easier for the worker to recognize that the caution sticker 41 is a sticker attached to the pachinko game machine 100 to call attention, and the worker forgets to attach the caution sticker 41 to the pachinko game machine 100. can be suppressed.

Note that the color of the exclamation mark 415 and the color of the outline line 416 are changed so that the color of the exclamation mark 415 and the color of the outline line 416 can be seen through the worker when the worker views the caution sticker 41 from the back side. may be applied. That is, when the worker views the caution sticker 41 from the back side, at least the yellow portion of the caution sticker 41 may be configured to be visible to the worker.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the configuration of the portion of the game frame 150 to which the attention-calling sticker 41 is attached and the portion near the portion.
As shown in FIG. 35(A-1), the game frame 150 is provided with a pasted portion 168 to which the caution sticker 41 is pasted. The attached portion 168 is made of a material that does not transmit light. This can prevent the light from the various lamps from passing through the attached portion 168 and the attention sticker 41 and entering the player's eyes, making it difficult for the player to recognize the displayed content of the attention sticker 41.

Further, the game frame 150 is provided with a recessed portion 169 having a depression. This recessed portion 169 has the same external shape as the attention-calling seal 41 and is provided slightly wider than the attention-calling seal 41 . The attached portion 168 is provided on the bottom surface of this recessed portion 169.
When the worker affixes the caution sticker 41 so that it fits on the bottom surface of the recess 169, the caution sticker 41 is affixed to the affixed portion 168, as shown in FIG. 35 (A-2). be done. According to the configuration in which the caution sticker 41 is attached to the bottom surface of the recess 169 as described above, it is possible for the operator to easily position the caution sticker 41 with respect to the game frame 150. Further, the caution sticker 41 attached to the attached portion 168 becomes difficult to peel off.

Note that the configuration near the affixed portion 168 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 35(A-1).
As shown in FIG. 35(B-1), instead of the recess 169, the game frame 150 may be provided with a protruding first protrusion 170 and a second protrusion 171. Both the first convex portion 170 and the second convex portion 171 are formed in an L-shape. Further, the first convex portion 170 is provided so as to surround the left end and front end of the attached portion 168. Further, the second convex portion 171 is provided so as to surround the right end and the rear end of the attached portion 168.
When the worker attaches the caution sticker 41 so that the caution sticker 41 fits between the first convex portion 170 and the second convex portion 171, the caution sticker 41 becomes as shown in FIG. 35 (B-2). As shown, it is pasted on the pasted part 168. In this way, even with the configuration in which the caution sticker 41 is pasted between the first convex portion 170 and the second convex portion 171, it is easy for the operator to position the caution sticker 41 with respect to the game frame 150. can be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 35 (C-1), the game frame 150 may be provided with a protruding third convex portion 172. The third convex portion 172 is formed to surround the periphery of the attached portion 168.
When the worker attaches the caution sticker 41 so that the caution sticker 41 fits into the area surrounded by the third convex portion 172, the caution sticker 41 will appear as shown in FIG. 35 (C-2). It is pasted on the pasted part 168. In this way, even with the configuration in which the caution sticker 41 is affixed to the area surrounded by the third convex portion 172, the operator can easily position the caution sticker 41 with respect to the game frame 150. . Further, the caution sticker 41 attached to the attached portion 168 becomes difficult to peel off.

In particular, according to the structure of the recess 169 shown in FIG. 35(A-1) and the structure of the third protrusion 172 shown in FIG. It is pasted so that it fits inside the. Furthermore, as described above, in the caution sticker 41, the first side length L1 (see FIG. 34(A)) is longer than the second side length L2, and the third side length L3 is longer than the second side length L3. is longer than the length L4 of the fourth side. In this case, if the worker tries to attach the caution sticker 41 with the top, bottom, left, and right sides of the caution sticker 41 being reversed, the caution sticker 41 will not fit inside the area where the unevenness is provided. The warning sticker 41 cannot be pasted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the caution sticker 41 from being pasted in a region shifted from the pasted portion 168.

FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an operator applies a caution sticker 41 to a game frame 150 using a jig.
As shown in FIG. 36(A), the caution sticker 41 may be affixed to an affixed portion 168 provided on a flat surface with no unevenness around it. In this case, the operator may affix the caution sticker 41 using a jig J, as shown in FIG. 36(B).

The jig J includes a first fixing part J1 and a second fixing part J2 that fix the jig J to the game frame 150, and a flat surface that is movable with respect to the first fixing part J1 and the second fixing part J2. and a section J3. Further, an opening J4 having an opening shaped like the caution sticker 41 is formed in the flat portion J3.
When an operator applies the caution sticker 41 to the affixed part 168 using the jig J, the first fixed part J1 is fixed to the right end of the game frame 150, and the second fixed part J2 is fixed to the right end of the game frame 150. It is fixed to the front end of the frame 150. Then, with the plane part J3 positioned so that the opening J4 overlaps the pasted part 168, the operator pastes the warning sticker 41 on the game frame 150 through the opening J4, as shown in FIG. 36(C). As shown in FIG. 2, a warning sticker 41 is pasted on the pasted portion 168. Even in this case, the operator can easily position the attention sticker 41 with respect to the game frame 150.

Next, the positional relationship between the production lever 161L, the handle 151, and the caution sticker 41 will be explained.
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the production lever 161L, the handle 151, and the caution sticker 41.

As shown in FIG. 37(A), the caution sticker 41 is located on the right side of the production lever 161L and on the left side of the handle 151. That is, in this embodiment, the attention sticker 41 is provided at a position between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, even when the player operates the handle 151 with his right hand and the production lever 161L with his left hand, the player's body may be between the player's eyes and the caution sticker 41. This makes it difficult for players to get into the game, and the caution sticker 41 tends to get into the player's field of vision. Therefore, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L while operating the handle 151, it is easy to make the player aware of the presence of the caution sticker 41, and the caution sticker 41 can be used to alert people.

Here, "between the production lever 161L and the handle 151" includes the space between the left end 161LL of the production lever 161L and the right end 151R of the handle 151. That is, "between the production lever 161L and the handle 151" includes the space between the tip of the production lever 161L and the handle 151 on one side and the other side in the left-right direction. In addition, in this embodiment, the attention sticker 41 is provided at a position between the center part 161LC of the production lever 161L in the left-right direction and the center part 151C of the handle 151 in the left-right direction.

Further, the position where the caution sticker 41 is attached is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 37(A).
For example, the caution sticker 41 may be provided so as to be located between the right end 161LR of the production lever 161L and the left end 151L of the handle 151.

Further, as shown in FIG. 37(B), a portion 41P of the caution sticker 41 may be provided to be located between the left end 161LL of the production lever 161L and the right end 151R of the handle 151. . That is, "the caution sticker 41 is provided at a position between the production lever 161L and the handle 151" means that the part 41P of the caution sticker 41 is located between the production lever 161L and the handle 151, It also includes that the other part of the evocation seal 41 is provided so as not to be located between the production lever 161L and the handle 151. Even in this case, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L while operating the handle 151, the part 41P of the caution sticker 41 easily enters the player's field of view. . Therefore, it becomes easier to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41, and the player can be alerted by the attention-calling sticker 41.
Further, the caution sticker 41 may be provided at a position above the production lever 161L and the handle 151 as long as it is between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction.

Further, the two operating means provided on both sides of the caution sticker 41 in the left-right direction are not limited to the production lever 161L and the handle 151. For example, in the left and right direction, a warning sticker 41 is placed between each of the production key 162, ball rental button 163, return button 164, ball removal button 165, light amount adjustment section 166, and volume adjustment section 167 and the production lever 161L. may be provided. Further, the take-out button 155 (see FIG. 1) may be provided on the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and the caution sticker 41 may be provided between the take-out button 155 and the production lever 161L in the left-right direction.

Here, the production lever 161L is regarded as a first operating means that can be operated by the player. In addition, each of the handle 151, eject button 155, production button 161B, production key 162, ball lending button 163, return button 164, ball removal button 165, light amount adjustment section 166, and volume adjustment section 167 can be operated by the player. Therefore, it can be regarded as a second operating means different from the first operating means. Furthermore, when the production lever 161L is considered as the first operation means and the production button 161B is considered as the second operation means, the handle 151, take-out button 155, production key 162, ball lending button 163, return button 164, ball removal button 165, the light amount adjustment section 166, and the volume adjustment section 167 are each considered as a third operation means that can be operated by the player and is different from the first operation means and the second operation means.
Further, the caution sticker 41 can be regarded as a cautionary means to call attention to the player.

(Modified example of warning means)
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a modified example of attention calling means.
In the present embodiment, it has been described that the player is alerted using the alert sticker 41, which is an example of an alert means. Here, the attention-calling means is not limited to the attention-calling sticker 41.

Instead of the caution sticker 41, a caution part 42 may be provided in the game frame 150, as shown in FIG. 38(A). The attention calling section 42 is provided by printing on the game frame 150. In this way, the attention calling means does not have to be a sticker.

The attention calling section 42 is provided near each of the production lever 161L, the production key 162, the ball rental button 163, the return button 164, the bulb removal button 165, the light amount adjustment section 166, and the volume adjustment section 167. The caution section 42 includes a lever caution section 421 that calls attention to the operation of the production lever 161L, a damage caution section 422 that calls attention to damage to the production lever 161L, and a general warning with a general warning mark. A mark portion 423 is provided. Further, the attention-calling section 42 is provided with a laminate section 427 that is laminated on one surface of the attention-calling section 42 .

The lever attention calling section 421 displays information for calling the player's attention when operating the production lever 161L. In the illustrated example, the lever attention calling section 421 displays the text "Beware of production lever operation."
The damage warning section 422 displays information for calling attention to the fact that the production lever 161L will be damaged. More specifically, the damage alert unit 422 includes a function to alert the player that the production lever 161L may be damaged if the player operates the production lever 161L without paying attention to it. Information is displayed. In the illustrated example, the damage warning section 422 displays a text that reads, "There is a risk of damage if operated violently." In this case, the player who sees the lever attention calling part 421 and the damage warning part 422 is advised that if the player operates the production lever 161L without paying attention to it, the production lever 161L may be damaged. It can make you imagine something.

The general warning mark section 423 is provided with an exclamation mark 424, an outline 425 having a triangular shape and surrounding the exclamation mark 424, and a background part 426 located between the exclamation mark 424 and the outline 425. . In this way, the general warning mark provided on the attention calling means does not need to be provided with an outline surrounding the outer shape line 425.

The exclamation mark 424 is shown in black at the center of the general warning mark section 423.
Outline 425 is shown in black.
The background portion 426 is shown in the same color as the game frame 150.
Furthermore, the parts of the attention calling section 42 where the lever attention calling section 421, the damage warning section 422, and the general warning mark section 423 are not provided are shown in the same color as the game frame 150. Furthermore, a laminate portion 427, which will be described later, is colorless. In this case, the presence of the attention-calling section 42 in the pachinko game machine 100 becomes less noticeable, and it is possible to call attention to the players while suppressing deterioration of the design of the pachinko game machine 100.

The laminate portion 427 of this embodiment is made of a resin material. By laminating the laminate portion 427 on one surface of the attention-calling portion 42, for example, when the attention-calling portion 42 is scratched by a player, information displayed on the attention-calling portion 42 is suppressed from being erased. can.
Note that the structure of the laminate portion 427 may be provided on the caution sticker 41 (see FIG. 34(A)). More specifically, a protective layer for protecting the information displayed on the attention sticker 41 may be laminated on one side of the layer on which the information is displayed in the attention sticker 41. That is, not only a protective layer may be provided on the attention-calling means configured by printing on the game frame 150, but also a protective layer may be provided on the attention-calling means in the form of a sticker.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38(B), an accessory caution sticker 43 for calling attention to the upper accessory object 5 may be provided in the game frame 150. The accessory warning sticker 43 is attached to a position of the game frame 150 between the speaker 156 (see FIG. 1) and the frame lamp 157. That is, the accessory warning sticker 43 is attached near the upper accessory 5 (see FIG. 1).
The accessory caution sticker 43 includes an attention-calling character portion 431 in which characters calling for attention are shown, an accessory attention-calling portion 432 that calls attention to the presence of the upper accessory 5, and a general warning mark, respectively. Two general warning mark sections 433 are provided. Further, the accessory caution sticker 43 is provided with a frame line portion 438 surrounding the caution character portion 431, the accessory caution portion 432, and the two general warning mark portions 433.

The attention-calling character portion 431 is provided at a position between the two general warning mark portions 433 in the left-right direction. The warning text section 431, together with the general warning mark section 433, calls the player's attention. In the illustrated example, the text "Caution" is displayed in the caution text section 431.
Information for alerting the player to unintentional contact with the upper accessory object 5 when the upper accessory object 5 moves is displayed in the accessory attention calling section 432. In the illustrated example, the accessory object attention calling section 432 displays the text "The accessory object will pop out from the top of the frame. Please be careful not to hit your head."

The general warning mark section 433 includes an exclamation mark 434, an outline 435 having a triangular shape surrounding the exclamation mark 434, a background part 436 located between the exclamation mark 434 and the outline 435, and a triangular shape. An outline 437 surrounding the outer shape line 435 is provided.

The exclamation mark 434 is shown in black at the center of the general warning mark section 433.
Outline 435 is shown in black.
The background portion 436 is shown in yellow.
Outline 437 is shown in white. In this way, the color of the outline in the general warning mark section is not limited to yellow like the outline 418 in the caution sticker 41 (see FIG. 34(A)).

The frame line portion 438 is shown in white. The frame line portion 438 surrounds the attention-calling character portion 431, the accessory attention-calling portion 432, and the two general warning mark portions 433, so that the information shown inside the frame line portion 438 is displayed on the accessory attention-calling sticker 43. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the information is intended to alert the player.

Both the attention-calling part 42 (see FIG. 38(A)) and the accessory attention-calling sticker 43 can be regarded as attention-calling means for calling attention to the player. In the modified example, an attention-calling part 42 is attached near the production lever 161L, and an accessory attention-calling sticker 43 is attached near the upper accessory 5. Further, the attention calling unit 42 targets the production lever 161L, but does not target the upper accessory 5. Further, the accessory caution sticker 43 targets the upper accessory 5, but does not target the production lever 161L. In this way, when a corresponding attention-calling means is provided near the object for each object of attention, when one attention-calling means includes information for calling attention to each of multiple objects of attention. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the target of the attention given by the attention calling means.

Note that each text displayed on the attention-calling sticker 41, the attention-calling section 42, and the accessory attention-calling sticker 43 are all displayed in a Gothic style.
In addition, when using the warning means, it is important to note which of the components such as text, pictures, general warning marks, etc. shown on the warning sticker 41, the warning part 42, and the accessory warning sticker 43. It may be displayed on the evocation means. In this case, the display mode of the constituent parts displayed on the attention-calling means is any one of the display modes of the constituent parts shown on the attention-calling sticker 41, the attention-calling part 42, and the accessory attention-calling sticker 43. It may be an aspect.

(Amount of displacement of operating means)
Next, the displacement amount of the production button 161B and the displacement amount of the production lever 161L will be explained.
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing the displacement amount of the production button 161B and the displacement amount of the production lever 161L.
The production button 161B shown in FIG. 39(A-1) is not touched by the player. In this state, when the player presses the performance button 161B, the performance button 161B can be displaced up to a distance M1 as shown in FIG. 39 (A-2).

The production lever 161L shown in FIG. 39(B-1) is in a state where it is not touched by the player. In this state, when the player grasps the production lever 161L and pulls it forward, the production lever 161L can be displaced up to a distance M2, as shown in FIG. 39 (B-2).

Thus, in this embodiment, the distance over which the production lever 161L can be displaced by the player's operation is longer than the distance over which the production button 161B can be displaced by the player's operation.
In this case, since the effect lever 161L has a longer displaceable distance than the effect button 161B, it becomes easier for the player to operate the effect lever 161L with momentum. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the displaceable distance of the presentation lever 161L is long, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or from damaging the presentation lever 161L.

Although not shown in the drawings, in this embodiment, the distance in which the production lever 161L can be displaced by the player's operation is the distance in which the eject button 155 can be displaced by the player's operation, and the distance in which the production key 162 can be displaced by the player's operation is a distance in which the ball lending button 163 can be displaced by the player's operation, a distance in which the return button 164 can be displaced by the player's operation, a distance in which the ball withdrawal button 165 can be displaced by the player's operation, The distance is set to be longer than either the distance in which the light amount adjustment section 166 can be displaced by the player's operation, or the distance in which the volume adjustment section 167 can be displaced by the player's operation.

(Modified example of production lever 161L)
Next, a modification of the production lever 161L will be explained.
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a production lever 161L of a modified example.
As shown in FIG. 40, the production button 161B is provided at the center of the game frame 150 in the left-right direction. On the other hand, the production lever 161L is provided on the left side of the production button 161B in the left-right direction. In this way, the production lever 161L may be provided separately from the production button 161B. Even in this case, the caution sticker 41 is provided at a position between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction.

(Fluctuating performance pattern table)
FIGS. 41 and 42 are diagrams illustrating an example of setting a variable effect pattern and a table used in the variable effect pattern selection (S2813) in the effect selection process of FIG. 27(b). Note that FIG. 41 shows a variable performance pattern table for a jackpot in a low probability time-saving no-game state, and FIG. 42 shows a variable performance pattern table for small wins and losses in a low-probability time-saving no-game state.

A plurality of variable effect patterns are set in the variable effect pattern table for jackpot shown in FIG. For the variation patterns "PA1" to "PA6", "PB1" to "PB14", and "PC1 to PC2" set using FIG. 21 above, the variation effect patterns "EA1" to "EA6", ""EB1" to "EB14" and "EC1 to EC2" are associated on a one-to-one basis.
Further, a plurality of variable effect patterns are set in the variable effect pattern table for small hits and misses shown in FIG. The variable effects patterns “ES1 to ES2” and “ER1” to “ER10” are set in a one-to-one relationship with the variable patterns “PD1 to PD2” and “PR1” to “PR10” set using the above-mentioned Figure 21. are associated.

Here, the fluctuating performance is a performance for visually announcing the determination result of the special symbol lottery (that is, whether or not a jackpot has been won) by displaying the decorative symbols in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying them.
In addition, in the fluctuating effect pattern shown in the figure, "Pseudo consecutive number", "Normal", "SP Reach", "SPSP Reach", "Final display color", "Promotion", "Production button", "Production lever" The performance is executed by combining one or more of them. Note that "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding effect is not executed. Further, a description different from "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding effect is executed.

Here, the "number of pseudo consecutive performances" is the number of pseudo continuous performances (pseudo consecutive performances). This pseudo-continuous performance is a performance that makes it appear as if a plurality of variable displays of decorative symbols are being displayed in a variable display of one variation of a special symbol. In the pseudo-continuous performance, the performance control unit 300 changes the decorative pattern before entering the ready-to-win state, temporarily stops the decorative pattern, and then starts the variable display of the decorative pattern again. In other words, in a pseudo-continuous performance, after the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the decorative pattern temporarily stops and fluctuates again for the set number of pseudo-successive times, and then it is finally stopped, so that one fluctuation of the special symbol is Finish the variable display. Here, the term "temporary stop" refers to a pseudo-stop state in which the decorative pattern appears to be stopped at first glance, but in reality the pattern is slightly oscillating. In other words, the temporary stop of the decorative symbols is a state that is treated as continuing fluctuations in terms of game control. In addition, the fixed stop of a decorative pattern refers to a state in which a special pattern is fixed as a stopped pattern in a variable display of one variation of a special pattern.
In the illustrated example, the "pseudo consecutive number" is set to "-", "1", "2", and "3", that is, between 0 and 3 times. Further, the number of pseudo consecutive runs is set in association with the degree of expectation (reliability) that is the degree to which the player expects to win a jackpot. In other words, it is set so that the higher the number of pseudo consecutive times, the higher the expectation level.

“Normal” indicates the type of reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "N1", "N2", and "N3" is executed as the type of reach effect.
“SP reach” indicates the type of SP reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3" is executed as the type of SP reach effect. Further, in the order of "SP1", "SP2", and "SP3", the higher the number, the higher the expectation level.
“SPSP reach” indicates the type of SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, one of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3" is executed as the type of SPSP reach effect. Further, in the order of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3", the higher the number, the higher the expectation level.

"Final display color" indicates the final display color of a variable image (described later) due to change effect. The change performance is a performance that changes the display mode of the variable image. More specifically, the change performance is a performance that changes the display color, pattern, shape, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "display color etc.") of the variable image. In this embodiment, by changing the display color of the variable image, etc., the player is informed or suggested of the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot. The change effect of the variable image can be executed based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process. In the illustrated example, one of "blue," "green," and "red" is selected as the final display color. For example, the final display color of the variable image may be set in the order of blue, green, and red so that the later the order, the higher the expectation level.

"Promotion" is an effect in which the decorative symbol that informs that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is temporarily stopped, and then changes to a decorative symbol that notifies the player that the gaming state will be more advantageous to the player. Promotion performance, re-lottery performance). In this promotion performance, for example, after "444" is temporarily stopped as a decorative symbol, a decorative symbol "777" is displayed as a stopping symbol.

“Rendering button” indicates the type of button operation rendering. The button operation performance is a performance that prompts the player to operate the performance button 161B. In the illustrated example, either "BU1" or "BU2" is executed as the type of button operation effect.

The production button 161B has a plurality of production modes. Examples of the performance mode of the performance button 161B include a light emitting color mode of the performance button 161B, a flashing light emission mode of the performance button 161B, a vibration mode of the performance button 161B, and the like. Examples of the mode of the luminous color of the production button 161B include a mode in which the production button 161B is made to emit red light, a mode in which the production button 161B is made to emit white light, and the like. Examples of the manner in which the effect button 161B blinks and emits light include a mode in which the effect button 161B blinks and emits light according to any one of a plurality of blinking patterns. Examples of the mode of vibration of the production button 161B include a mode in which the production button 161B is vibrated according to any one of a plurality of vibration patterns.
The performance button 161B changes into a performance mode according to the type of button operation performance during execution of the button operation performance.

In addition, the execution timings of the button operation performance are set as ``before temporary stop'', ``normal time'', ``SP reach time'', ``SPSP reach time'', and ``promotion incitement time time''.
"Before temporary stop" means the timing after the start of variation of the decorative patterns and before any of the decorative patterns temporarily stops.
"Normal time" means a timing when the ready-to-reach effect is being executed and neither the SP ready-to-reach effect nor the SPSP ready-to-reach effect is being executed.
“SP reach time” means the timing when the SP reach effect is being executed.
“SPSP reach time” means the timing when the SPSP reach effect is being executed.
"At the time of promoting promotion performance" means the timing when promotion promotion production is being executed. A promotion agitation performance is a performance that agitates whether or not a person will be promoted.

"Production lever" indicates the type of lever operation production. The lever operation performance is a performance that prompts the player to operate the performance lever 161L. In the illustrated example, "LE1" is executed as the lever operation effect. That is, a plurality of types of presentation modes are provided as a button operation presentation, whereas one type of presentation mode is provided as a lever operation presentation. The performance lever 161L assumes a specific performance mode during execution of the lever operation performance. Specific presentation modes include, for example, a mode in which the production lever 161L emits light in a specific color, a mode in which the production lever 161L flashes light in a specific blinking pattern, a mode in which the production lever 161L vibrates in a specific vibration pattern, and the like. .
In addition, the execution timings of the lever operation performance are provided as "SPSP reach time" and "promotion promotion performance time".

Now, the effect control section 300 determines a variable effect pattern based on the tables shown in FIGS. 41 and 42. Specifically, the effect control unit 300 selects a variable effect pattern corresponding to the variable pattern set in the variable pattern selection process (see FIG. 13) based on the tables shown in FIGS. 41 and 42.
For example, in FIG. 41, when the "jackpot symbol" is "high probability symbol A" and the variation pattern is "PB1", "EB1" is selected as the variation effect pattern. In this variable performance pattern "EB1", the "pseudo-continuous number of times" is "-", that is, the pseudo-continuous performance is not executed. Further, "N1" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", and "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach". In addition, the "final display color" is red, "promotion" is executed, "BU1" is executed as the "production button" during "normal", and "BU2" is executed as the "production button" during "SPSP reach". is executed, and "LE1" is executed as a "production lever" during "promotion promotion production".
In addition, in this embodiment, it has been explained that "-" in each column of the table shown in FIGS. 41 and 42 indicates that the corresponding effect is not executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Depending on the model of the pachinko game machine 100, even if "-" is shown in the column of the table shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the corresponding performance may be executed.

(Production image)
FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating one aspect of a variation presentation of the decorative pattern 61 performed by the presentation control section 300 using the image display section 114.
As shown in FIG. 43, the effect image is displayed on the image display section 114 under the control of the effect control section 300. In this embodiment, the effect images include a decorative pattern 61, a variable image 51, a pending image 52, a pending number display 55, and a small pattern 56. In addition, the image display unit 114 includes a change inciting image 530, a button operation image 531, an expected image 532, a pseudo continuous number image 533, an SP reach image 534, a SPSP reach image 535, a lever inciting first stage image 536, a lever inciting second stage image 537 , a lever operation image 538, a promotion promotion image 539, a button promotion image 540, and a right hit image 542 may be displayed.
Each of these effect images will be explained below.

(Decorative pattern 61)
As shown in FIG. 43(1), three decorative patterns 61 are displayed on the image display section 114. The three decorative patterns 61 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. In addition, when explaining each of the three decorative patterns 61 individually, the pattern placed on the left side is the "left decorative pattern 61", the pattern placed in the center is the "medium decorative pattern 61", and the pattern placed on the right side is the "left decorative pattern 61". The pattern is referred to as a "right decorative pattern 61."

In the variable presentation of the decorative patterns 61, the production control unit 300 first temporarily stops the left decorative pattern 61 (for example, the number "4") after displaying the three decorative patterns 61 in a variable manner, for example, by vertical scrolling. Next, the right decorative pattern 61 (for example, the number "6") is temporarily stopped, then the middle decorative pattern 61 (for example, the number "5") is temporarily stopped, and finally all the decorative patterns 61 are finally stopped. Note that the combination "456" of the decorative symbols 61 that are stopped and displayed, shown in FIG. 43(1), is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the decorative pattern 61 includes a highly decorative display mode in which characters such as numbers and images of characters are displayed (see FIG. 43 (1)), and a highly decorative display mode in which characters such as numbers are displayed (see FIG. There is a less decorative display mode (see FIG. 48-1 (1)) in which characters are mainly displayed. Here, the display mode of the decorative symbols 61 is switched according to changes in the game state or progress of the performance. The details will be described later, but for example, the decorative pattern 61 with low decorativeness is displayed in SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, high probability time saving game state, etc., and the decorative pattern 61 with low decorativeness is displayed in cases other than these. be done.

(Variation image 51)
As shown in FIG. 43(1), the image display section 114 shows that the special symbol is being varied (the decorative symbol 61 is being displayed in a variable manner) by the special symbol variation control section 233 (see FIG. 5, etc.). A variation image 51 shown is displayed. Then, the variable image 51 starts to be displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower center part of the display area of the image display section 114) at the same time as the variable display of the special symbol starts, and The display disappears when the symbols stop changing. Furthermore, a variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.

Here, the display mode of the variable image 51 is determined based on the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination process. Further, the variable image 51 may notify or suggest the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process by changing the display mode such as the display color, for example.

(Pending image 52)
As shown in FIG. 43(1), the reserved image 52 is displayed on the image display unit 114 based on the information of the storage area corresponding to the currently reserved ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3, etc.). In other words, the pending image 52 is an image indicating that the right to determine a jackpot is reserved. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the pending image 52 on the screen is determined based on the preliminary determination result of the preliminary determination process.
Furthermore, a variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the pending image 52 is displayed. The variable pedestal of the variable image 51 and the variable pedestal of the pending image 52 are displayed in different manners.

In addition, the pending image 52 notifies or suggests the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot by changing the display mode such as the display color based on the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination process. Here, the display mode such as the display color of the pending image 52 is set so that the type of display mode has a higher expectation level when the pre-judgment result of the pre-judgment process is a jackpot than when it is a loss. ing. For example, when white, blue, green, and red are set as the colors of the pending image 52, the expectations may be set higher in this order.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the reserved image 52 and the variable image 51 are each basically configured in the same or similar form. However, the form may differ between the pending image 52 and the variable image 51, or between the plurality of pending images 52, depending on the performance content and the progress of the performance.

(Pending number display 55)
As shown in FIG. 43(1), a pending number display 55 is displayed on the image display unit 114 based on the information of the storage area corresponding to the held balls in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3, etc.). This pending number display 55 is an image showing the pending number. Here, the number of the above-mentioned pending images 52 displayed on the image display section 114 changes depending on the number of pending prizes for each of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122.

(Small pattern 56)
Here, the display position, display size, design, etc. of the decorative pattern 61 may change, for example, as the variable effect progresses. Further, the decorative pattern 61 may be entirely or partially hidden by the movable accessory 115 that is movable with respect to the display screen of the image display section 114. In such a case, it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative pattern, which is originally intended to notify the player that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner.
Therefore, in this embodiment, by displaying the small symbols 56 on the display screen of the image display unit 114, the player is informed that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, in this embodiment, by displaying the small pattern 56, notification of the jackpot determination result based on the decorative pattern 61 and notification of the type of jackpot pattern indicated by the decorative pattern 61 are performed auxiliary. .
In the embodiment, the small symbols 56 are displayed on the display screen of the image display unit 114 in a manner that allows the player to always see them. In other words, the small pattern 56 is not entirely or partially hidden by other images, the movable accessory 115, etc.

As shown in FIG. 43(1), the small pattern 56 is composed of three patterns corresponding to the decorative pattern 61. The three small patterns 56 are arranged vertically at the right corner of the image display area of the image display section 114. This small pattern 56 is displayed as an image smaller in display size than the decorative pattern 61. Further, as described above, the decorative pattern 61 may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode or in a low decorative display mode, but the small pattern 56 may be displayed in a low decorative display mode. Displayed only in .
Note that the small symbols 56 are not limited to one pair provided in the image display section 114, with three symbols forming one pair. For example, two or more pairs of small symbols 56 may be displayed simultaneously on the image display section 114.

(Change inciting image 530)
As shown in FIG. 44(2), the image display unit 114 displays a change prompting image 530 that indicates whether or not the display mode of the variable image 51 will change. The change-stimulating image 530 is displayed in a part of the display area of the change image 51. The change-stimulating image 530 may be displayed in any color including the color that can be displayed as the change image 51. Further, when the change-inciting image 530 is displayed, the display area of the change-inciting image 530 may be widened or narrowed. Further, the change stimulating image 530 may be any effect image that acts on the variable image 51 to change the display mode such as the display color of the variable image 51, and is not limited to an image of a specific color. Moreover, the change-stimulating image 530 may act not only on the fluctuation image 51 but also on the pending image 52.

(Button operation image 531)
As shown in FIG. 44(5), the image display section 114 displays a button operation image 531 that prompts the player to operate the production button 161B. By displaying this button operation image 531, the player can recognize that it is the timing to operate the effect button 161B. In the illustrated example, an image imitating the effect button 161B is displayed as the button operation image 531. Further, the button operation image 531 displays a gauge indicating the period during which the operation of the production button 161B is valid.

(Expected image 532)
As shown in FIG. 44(6), the image display section 114 displays an expectation image 532 that makes the player expect that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery will be a jackpot. In the illustrated example, an image of a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed as the expected image 532.

(pseudo continuous number image 533)
As shown in FIG. 45-1 (7), the image display section 114 displays a pseudo-continuation count image 533 indicating the pseudo-continuation count. In the illustrated example, since this is the second variable display, the pseudo continuous number image 533 includes "x2" images.

(SP reach image 534)
As shown in FIG. 45-2 (11), the image display section 114 displays an SP ready-to-reach image 534 indicating that the SP ready-to-reach effect is being executed. This SP reach image 534 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini-game.

(SPSP reach image 535)
As shown in FIG. 45-2 (12), the image display section 114 displays an SPSP reach image 535 indicating that the SPSP reach effect is being executed. This SPSP reach image 535 is, for example, a moving image in which characters appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 fight.

(Image 536 before lever activation)
As shown in FIG. 45-2 (13), the image display section 114 displays a lever pre-stage image 536 that encourages the lever operation effect to be performed. As the lever pre-movement image 536, an image imitating a part of the production lever 161L is displayed. In the illustrated example, an image simulating a part of the production lever 161L and an image simulating another part of the production lever 161L are displayed as the lever pre-stage image 536.

(Image 537 after lever activation)
As shown in FIG. 45-2 (14), the image display section 114 displays a lever activation subsequent stage image 537 that encourages the lever operation effect to be performed. The lever-up later image 537 is displayed after the lever-up front image 536 is displayed. As the lever rearward image 537, an image imitating the production lever 161L is displayed. Further, as the lever-increasing post-stage image 537, an image simulating a flame is displayed in the background of an image simulating the production lever 161L.

(Lever operation image 538)
As shown in FIG. 45-2 (15), the image display section 114 displays a lever operation image 538 that prompts the player to operate the production lever 161L. By displaying this lever operation image 538, the player can recognize that it is the timing to operate the production lever 161L. In the illustrated example, an image simulating the production lever 161L and an image simulating a flame are displayed as the lever operation image 538. Further, in the lever operation image 538, a gauge indicating a period during which the operation of the production lever 161L is valid is displayed. Further, in the lever operation image 538, a text of "Draw!!" is displayed that urges the player to operate the production lever 161L. Furthermore, the display size of the lever operation image 538 in this embodiment is larger than the display size of the button operation image 531 (see FIG. 44(5)).

(Promotion incitement image 539)
As shown in FIG. 45-3 (18), the image display section 114 displays a promotion promotion image 539 that indicates whether or not promotion will be performed.

(Button provocation image 540)
As shown in FIG. 46-2 (9), the image display section 114 displays a button promotion image 540 that encourages the button operation effect to be performed. As the button pushing image 540, an image in which an image imitating the effect button 161B moves from the right side toward the center of the display area of the image display section 114 is displayed.

(Right-handed image 542)
As shown in FIG. 48-1 (1), the image display unit 114 displays a right-hitting image 542 that urges the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the gaming area 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the variation presentation of the decorative pattern 61 performed by the presentation control section 300 using the image display section 114 will be specifically explained.
Note that FIG. 43 shows a variation effect that is executed when "ER1" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 42. When "ER1" is selected as this "variable effect pattern", effects such as "normal" are not executed.

(Variable effect example 1)
First, as shown in FIG. 43(1), as the variation of the previous special symbol is finished by the production control unit 300, the highly decorative decorative symbol 61 is fixed and stopped on the screen of the image display unit 114. It is assumed that At this time, the image display section 114 displays a variable image 51, a pending image 52, a pending number display 55, and a small pattern 56. Further, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "1", and the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 shows "0". Further, at this time, the production operation device 161 is in a non-protruding state (see FIG. 32(A)), and the player cannot operate the production lever 161L.

Then, as shown in FIG. 43(2), the decorative pattern 61 starts to change as the next special pattern starts to be displayed. In this way, when the next variable display of the special symbol is started, the pending image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. In addition, when it is shown in the drawing that the decorative pattern 61 and the small pattern 56 are displayed in a particularly high-speed fluctuating display (scrolling), the decorative pattern 61 and the small pattern 56 are each indicated by an arrow (↓) in order to make it easier to understand. . Further, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 shows "0".

Then, as shown in FIG. 43(3), the left decorative pattern 61 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at the position where it was fixed and stopped until the start of the fluctuation. More specifically, the number "1" which is the left decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped. In addition, when it is shown in the drawing that the decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped, a display similar to a double quotation mark is used around the decorative pattern 61 to make it easier to understand.
Next, as shown in FIG. 43(4), the right decorative pattern 61 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at the position where it was fixed and stopped until the start of the fluctuation. More specifically, the number "3" which is the right decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 43(5), the medium decorative pattern 61 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at the position where it was fixed and stopped until the start of the fluctuation. More specifically, the number "2" which is the middle decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped.
Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 61 are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 43(6). The combination of numbers "123" of this decorative pattern 61 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 also stop. At this time, the combination "123" of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 61.

(Variable effect example 2)
FIG. 44 is a diagram showing one aspect of the performance that the performance control unit 300 performs using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, another specific example (variation effect example 2) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 61 will be described.
Note that FIG. 44 shows a fluctuating effect that is executed when "ER2" is selected as the "fluctuating effect pattern" in FIG. 42. When "ER2" is selected as this "variable effect pattern", "N1" is executed as "normal", and the "final display color" is "blue". Further, "BU1" is executed as a "performance button" in "normal mode". In addition, in the following explanation, the points that are different from the first example of variable performance will be mainly explained, and the explanation of the points that are the same as the first example of variable performance will be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 44(1), the highly decorative decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114 by the production control section 300 as the variation of the previous special symbol is finished. It is assumed that there is
Then, as shown in FIG. 44(2), the decorative pattern 61 starts to change with the start of the variable display of the next special pattern. Also, at this time, a change effect is started. During execution of this change effect, a change inciting image 530 is displayed. In the illustrated example, a blue image is displayed as the change-inciting image 530.

Then, as shown in FIG. 44(3), the display color of the variable image 51 changes to blue due to the change effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 44(4), a reach effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped, the number "4" which is the right decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped, and the number "4" is temporarily stopped, and a reach state is established.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(5), an operation effect is performed. While this operation effect is being performed, a button operation image 531 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B while the button operation image 531 is displayed, the expected image 532 is displayed as shown in FIG. 44(6).

Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (7), the medium decorative pattern 61 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at the number "5".
Then, as the special symbols stop changing, the three decorative symbols 61 are fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 44(8). The combination of numbers "454" of this decorative pattern 61 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss. Further, as the special symbols stop changing, the small symbols 56 also stop. At this time, the combination "454" of the small patterns 56 matches the combination of the decorative patterns 61.

(Variable effect example 3)
FIGS. 45-1 to 45-3 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 45-1 to 45-3, another specific example (variable effect example 3) of the variable effect of the decorative pattern 61 will be described.
Note that FIGS. 45-1 to 45-3 are variable effects that are executed when "EA3" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. 41. When "EA3" is selected as this "variable effect pattern", the "pseudo consecutive number" is "2", "N2" is executed as "normal", and "SP2" is executed as "SP reach". "SPSP2" is executed as "SPSP reach", and the "final display color" is "red". In addition, "BU1" is executed as a "performance button" before "temporary stop" and "during promotion incitement production", and "LE1" is executed as a "production lever" during "SPSP reach". In addition, in the following explanation, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned performances will be mainly explained, and explanations about points that are the same as each of the above-mentioned variable performances may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 45-1 (1), the effect control unit 300 causes the highly decorative decorative pattern 61 to be fixed and stopped in the image display unit 114 as the previous special pattern changes. It is assumed that Also, at this time, the pending image 52 is displayed in blue.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45-1 (2), the decorative pattern 61 starts to change with the start of the variable display of the next special pattern. In this way, when the next variable display of the special symbol is started, the pending image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. Also, at this time, a change performance is performed. While this change effect is being executed, a change inciting image 530 is displayed. In the illustrated example, a red image is displayed as the change-inciting image 530.
Next, as shown in FIG. 45-1 (3), the display color of the variable image 51 changes to red due to the change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-1 (4), a button operation effect is executed. While this button operation effect is being executed, a button operation image 531 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B while the button operation image 531 is displayed, a role model effect is performed as shown in FIG. 45-1 (5).
The accessory effect is an effect in which the movable accessory object 115 moves to the front side of the image display section 114 and covers the entire or part of the image display section 114. In the illustrated example, the movable accessory 115 placed on the left side of the three movable accessories 115 (see FIG. 1) covers a part of the image display section 114. Moreover, the role performance where the movable accessory 115 placed in the center moves is better than the role performance where the movable accessory 115 placed on the left side of the three movable accessory objects 115 moves. Expectations are set to be high.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-1 (6), a pseudo continuous effect is executed. More specifically, for example, after the number "6" which is the left decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped, the number "4" which is the right decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped, and a pseudo continuous effect is performed in the middle decorative pattern 61. Stop the icon that says "NEXT" which means to proceed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-1 (7), the variation of the decorative pattern 61 is started again. Also, at this time, a pseudo continuous number image 533 is displayed. In the illustrated example, since this is the second variable display, the pseudo continuous number image 533 includes "x2" images.
Next, as shown in FIG. 45-1 (8), after temporarily stopping the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 61, the number "1" which is the right decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped, and the number "1" which is the right decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped. The "NEXT" icon in the decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (9), the variation of the decorative pattern 61 is started again. That is, the third variable display of the decorative pattern 61 is started. Further, on the screen of the image display unit 114, a pseudo continuous number image 533 indicating "x3" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (10), a reach effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped, the number "4" which is the right decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped, and the number "4" is temporarily stopped, and a reach state is established.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (11), the SP reach effect is executed. While the SP reach effect is being executed, the SP reach image 534 is displayed. Further, when the SP ready-to-win effect is being executed, the decorative pattern 61 is displayed in a small display mode and in a display mode with low decorativeness.
Next, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (12), the SPSP reach effect is executed. While the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the SPSP reach image 535 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (13), a lever-up front image 536 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (14), a lever tilting latter stage image 537 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (15), a lever operation performance is performed. While this lever operation effect is being performed, a lever operation image 538 is displayed. Also, at this time, the effect operation device 161 changes from the non-protruding state (see FIG. 32(A)) to the protruding state (see FIG. 32(B)), allowing the player to operate the effect lever 161L.

Then, when the player operates the production lever 161L while the lever operation image 538 is being displayed, the accessory production is performed as shown in FIG. 45-2 (16). In the illustrated example, the movable accessory 115 placed at the center of the three movable accessories 115 covers a part of the image display section 114 as an accessory effect. Further, at this time, the effect operation device 161 changes from the protruding state to the non-protruding state, and the player cannot operate the effect lever 161L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-3 (17), the decorative pattern 61 of the number zero is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbols 61 are displayed in a combination of "444", thereby informing the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Further, at this time, the display size of the decorative pattern 61 is larger than that of the display mode during execution of the SPSP ready-to-reach effect (see FIG. 45-2 (11)). Further, the small symbols 56 maintain a state in which three symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 45-3 (18), a promotion promotion effect is performed. While this promotion promotion performance is being performed, a promotion promotion image 539 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 45-3 (19), a button operation effect is performed. While this button operation effect is being executed, a button operation image 531 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B while the button operation image 531 is displayed, the decorative patterns 61 are displayed again in the combination of "444" as shown in FIG. 45-3 (20). In other words, as a result of promotion promotion performance, he is not promoted.
Then, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative pattern 61 stops changing as shown in FIG. 45-3 (21). The combination of numbers "444" of this decorative pattern 61 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Further, “444” is displayed as the small pattern 56. That is, the decorative pattern 61 and the small pattern 56 are displayed in a matching state in the combination of "444".

As described above, in the variable performance example 3, first, a performance using the performance button 161B is performed, and then a performance using the performance lever 161L is performed. Here, in this embodiment, a variable effect pattern in which the effect button 161B is used earlier than the effect lever 161L, and a variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used earlier than the effect button 161B are provided, respectively. ing. Furthermore, the probability that the variable effect pattern in which the effect button 161B is used first is selected is higher than the probability that the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used first is selected. That is, in this embodiment, the variable effects include special variable effects in which both the effect lever 161L and the effect button 161B are used. The production control unit 300 can more easily execute a special variation production in which the production button 161B is used first than a special variation production in which the production lever 161L is used first.
In this case, since it is easy for the player to operate the performance lever 161L after gaining interest by operating the performance button 161B, the player is likely to become excited when operating the performance lever 161L. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

Note that a special variable effect in which the effect lever 161L is used first may be easier to execute than a special variable effect in which the effect button 161B is used first. That is, a configuration opposite to that of this embodiment may be adopted.
In this case, when operating the production lever 161L, which is used first of the production lever 161L and the production button 161B, the player may not be accustomed to operating the operating means. Therefore, the player violently operates the production lever 161L, and during this operation, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. . On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, when the player operates the production lever 161L, the caution sticker 41 is likely to enter the player's field of vision, and the player can be alerted to the operation of the production lever 161L. Therefore, even if the player is not accustomed to operating the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

Furthermore, in the special variable performance, the performance lever 161L may not be used first, but the performance button 161B may always be used first. That is, it is easier to execute a special variation effect in which the production button 161B is used first than a special variation effect in which the production lever 161L is used first. This also includes not doing so (0%) and always executing the special variable performance in which the performance button 161B is used first (100%).

Furthermore, in both the variable performance example 2 and the variable performance example 3, a performance using the performance button 161B is performed. On the other hand, in variable performance example 3, a performance using the performance lever 161L is performed, but in variable performance example 2, a performance using the performance lever 161L is not performed. Here, in this embodiment, a variable effect pattern in which the effect button 161B is used and a variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used are provided. Furthermore, the probability that the variable presentation pattern using the presentation lever 161L is selected is lower than the probability that the variable presentation pattern using the presentation button 161B is selected. That is, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 is more difficult to execute a variable performance using the performance lever 161L than a variable performance using the performance button 161B.
In this case, the player is more likely to get excited when operating the performance lever 161L to the extent that the performance using the performance lever 161L is more likely to feel valuable than the performance using the performance button 161B. Become. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.
Note that the variable effect using the effect button 161B may be made more difficult to execute than the variable effect using the effect lever 161L. That is, a configuration opposite to this embodiment may be adopted.

Furthermore, in the variable performance example 2, the performance button 161B is used without using the performance lever 161L, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery related to this variable performance is a loss. On the other hand, in variable performance example 3, the performance lever 161L is used, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery related to this variable performance is a jackpot. Here, in this embodiment, as variable production patterns for jackpots, there are provided a variable production pattern in which the production button 161B is used without the production lever 161L, and a variable production pattern in which the production lever 161L is used. . Furthermore, as variable performance patterns for failure, there are provided a variable performance pattern in which the performance button 161B is used without the performance lever 161L, and a variable performance pattern in which the performance lever 161L is used. As the variable effect pattern for failure, the probability that the variable effect pattern in which the effect button 161B is used without using the effect lever 161L is selected is higher than the probability that the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used is selected. is higher. Furthermore, as a variable production pattern for a jackpot, the probability that a variable production pattern in which the production lever 161L is used is selected is higher than the probability that a variation production pattern in which the production button 161B is used without the production lever 161L is selected. is higher. That is, in this embodiment, the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed is higher in the variable effect in which the effect lever 161L is used than in the variable effect in which the effect button 161B is used without the effect lever 161L.
In this case, the player is more likely to get excited when operating the production lever 161L to the extent that the player has a high level of expectation. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.
Note that the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed may be higher in a variable performance in which the performance button 161B is used without using the performance lever 161L, than in a variable performance in which the performance lever 161L is used. That is, a configuration opposite to this embodiment may be adopted.

Further, the variable performance example 2 is a variable performance in which a normal reach performance is executed without an SP ready-to-reach performance, and the performance lever 161L is not used during execution of this variable performance. On the other hand, variable performance example 3 is a variable performance in which an SP ready-to-reach performance is executed, and the performance lever 161L is used during execution of this variable performance. Here, in this embodiment, as variable performance patterns in which the performance lever 161L is used, there is a variable performance pattern in which a normal reach performance and a SP reach performance are executed, and a variation in which a normal reach performance is performed without an SP reach performance. Each performance pattern is provided. In addition, as variable performance patterns in which the performance lever 161L is not used, a variable performance pattern in which a normal reach performance and a SP reach performance are executed, and a variable performance pattern in which a normal reach performance is performed without an SP reach performance are performed. It is set up. As for the variable performance pattern in which the performance lever 161L is not used, the probability that the normal reach performance is executed without the SP reach performance is higher than the probability that the variable performance pattern in which the normal reach performance and the SP reach performance are executed is selected. This increases the probability that the variable performance pattern will be selected. Furthermore, as a variable performance pattern in which the performance lever 161L is used, a normal reach performance and a SP reach performance are executed with a higher probability than a variable performance pattern in which a normal reach performance is executed without an SP reach performance being executed. The probability that the variable performance pattern is selected is increased. That is, in this embodiment, the variable effects include a first variable effect in which a normal reach effect and an SP reach effect are executed, and a second variable effect in which a normal reach effect is executed without executing an SP reach effect. . The production control unit 300 can more easily execute the production using the production lever 161L in the first variable production than in the second variation production.
In this case, the variable performance in which the SP reach effect is executed has a higher expectation of winning the jackpot than the variable effect in which the normal reach effect is executed without the SP reach effect, and the player is more likely to , it becomes easy to get excited when operating the production lever 161L. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

Note that the production lever 161L is not used during the execution of a variable production in which a normal reach production is executed without the SP reach production, and the production lever 161L is not used during the execution of a variable production in which the SP reach production is executed. It may also be used. In other words, the fact that the first variable effect is easier to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L than the second variable effect is that the effect using the effect lever 161L is not performed in the second variable effect (0% ), the first variable performance includes always performing a performance using the performance lever 161L (100%).
In addition, the variable performance in which the SPSP reach effect is executed is made easier to execute the effect in which the effect lever 161L is used than the variable effect in which the SP reach effect is executed without the SPSP reach effect being executed. Good too.

Furthermore, even if it is made easier to perform a performance using the production lever 161L in a variable production in which a normal reach performance is performed without an SP reach performance, rather than a variation performance in which an SP reach performance is performed. good. That is, a configuration opposite to that of this embodiment may be adopted. In this case, even if a variable performance is being executed in which a normal reach performance is performed without an SP reach performance, the performance using the performance lever 161L is performed, and the player expects to win a jackpot. However, the user becomes easily excited when operating the production lever 161L. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

Furthermore, the variation performance example 2 is a variation performance with a variation time of 60.01 seconds (see FIG. 21), and the performance lever 161L is not used in this variation performance. On the other hand, variable performance example 3 is a variable performance with a variable time of 90.13 seconds, and the performance lever 161L is used in this variable performance. Here, in this embodiment, the variable effect patterns in which the effect lever 161L is used include a variable effect pattern in which the variable time is 90.00 seconds or less, and a variable effect pattern in which the variable time is longer than 90.00 seconds. It is set up. Further, as variable performance patterns in which the performance lever 161L is not used, there are provided a variable performance pattern in which the fluctuation time is 90.00 seconds or less, and a variable performance pattern in which the fluctuation time is longer than 90.00 seconds. As for the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is not used, the probability that a variable effect pattern with a variable time of 90.00 seconds or less is selected is higher than the probability that a variable effect pattern with a variable time of longer than 90.00 seconds is selected. This increases the probability of being selected. Furthermore, as the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used, the probability that a variable effect pattern with a variable effect time of 90.00 seconds or less is selected is higher than the probability that a variable effect pattern with a variable effect time longer than 90.00 seconds is selected. This increases the probability that it will happen. That is, in the present embodiment, the fluctuating performance includes a first time fluctuating performance in which a fluctuating display is performed for a first time, and a second time fluctuating performance in which a fluctuating display is performed for a second time different from the first time. The performance control unit 300 can more easily execute the performance using the performance lever 161L in the second time-varying performance than in the first time-varying performance. Here, the first time may be any time, for example, a time of 15.00 seconds or less, a time of 30.00 seconds or less, a time of 60.00 seconds or less, a time of 90.00 seconds or less. Examples include time.
In this case, the second time-varying performance is more likely to increase the player's interest as the game progresses than the first time-varying performance, and the player is more likely to get excited when operating the performance lever 161L. Become. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the above-mentioned first time is taken as 90.00 seconds, the production lever 161L is not used while the variable time is executing the first time variation production (FIGS. 21, 41, (see FIG. 42), but is not limited thereto. If it is easier to execute a performance that uses the production lever 161L in the second time-variable production than in the first time-variation production, even if the production that uses the production lever 161L is executed during the execution of the first time-variation production. good. Furthermore, the production lever 161L may not be used during the execution of the first time-varying production, and the production lever 161L may be used during the execution of the second time-variation production. In other words, the fact that the second time-varying performance is easier to execute using the production lever 161L than the first time-varying production is because it is easier to execute the production using the production lever 161L during the execution of the first time-variation production. It also includes not performing (0%) and always performing a performance in which the performance lever 161L is used during execution of the second time-varying performance (100%).

Further, the performance using the performance lever 161L may be made easier to perform while the first time-varying performance is being executed than during the execution of the second time-varying performance. That is, a configuration opposite to that of this embodiment may be adopted. In this case, even if the variable time is short, the effect using the effect lever 161L is performed, and the player expects to win the jackpot and gets excited when operating the effect lever 161L. It becomes easier to do. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

Further, in the variation effect example 2, the "final display color" (see FIG. 42) of the variation image 51 is "blue", and the effect lever 161L is not used in this variation effect. On the other hand, in variable effect example 3, the "final display color" (see FIG. 41) of the variable image 51 is "red", and the effect lever 161L is used in this variable effect. Here, in this embodiment, the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used is a variable effect pattern in which the variable image 51 is the first display mode, and a variable effect pattern in which the variable image 51 is the second display mode. It is set up. Further, as variable effect patterns in which the effect lever 161L is not used, a variable effect pattern in which the variable image 51 is the first display mode and a variable effect pattern in which the variable image 51 is the second display mode are provided. As for the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is not used, the variable effect pattern in which the variable image 51 is the first display mode has a higher probability of being selected than the variable effect pattern in which the variable image 51 is the second display mode. This increases the probability of being selected. Furthermore, as the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used, the variable effect pattern in which the variable image 51 is the second display mode is selected more than the probability that the variable effect pattern in which the variable image 51 is the first display mode is selected. It increases the probability that it will happen. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 performs better during execution of the variable display related to the variable image 51 in the second display mode than during execution of the variable display related to the variable image 51 in the first display mode. It is easy to execute a performance using the performance lever 161L. Note that examples of the first display mode include white, blue, and green. Further, the second display mode includes, for example, a display mode such as blue, green, red, etc. that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed more than the first display mode.
In this case, the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot is higher during execution of the variable display related to the variable image 51 in the second display mode than during execution of the variable display related to the variable image 51 in the first display mode. , the player becomes easily excited when operating the production lever 161L. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

Note that it is easier to perform the effect using the effect lever 161L during the execution of the variable display related to the variable image 51 in the first display mode than during the execution of the variable display related to the variable image 51 in the second display mode. You can do it like this. That is, a configuration opposite to that of this embodiment may be adopted. In this case, even if a fluctuating performance in which the expectation level of winning a jackpot is low is being executed, the performance using the performance lever 161L is performed, so that the player expects to win a jackpot and operates the performance lever 161L. I get easily excited when Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

Further, the variation performance example 2 is a variation performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, and the performance lever 161L is not used in this variation performance. On the other hand, variable performance example 3 is a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, and the performance lever 161L is used in this variable performance. Here, in this embodiment, as variable performance patterns for jackpots, there are provided a variable performance pattern in which the performance lever 161L is used and a variable performance pattern in which the performance lever 161L is not used. Furthermore, as variable effect patterns for misses, there are provided a variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used and a variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is not used. As the variable effect pattern for losing, the probability that a variable effect pattern that does not use the effect lever 161L is selected is higher than the probability that a variable effect pattern that uses the effect lever 161L is selected. . Furthermore, as a variable presentation pattern for a jackpot, the probability that a variable presentation pattern in which the presentation lever 161L is used is selected is higher than the probability that a variable presentation pattern in which the presentation lever 161L is not used is selected. . That is, in the present embodiment, a case in which a variable performance is executed according to a determination result in which it is determined that a jackpot game will be executed, and a case in which a variable performance is executed in accordance with a determination result in which it is determined that a jackpot game is not executed. The execution probability of the performance using the performance lever 161L differs depending on the case.
In this case, there are two cases in which a variable effect is executed according to the determination result in which it is determined that a jackpot game will be executed, and a case in which a variable effect is executed in accordance with a determination result in which it is not determined that a jackpot game will be executed. The player's interest in the performance using the performance lever 161L increases compared to the case where the probability of performing the performance using the lever 161L is the same. Therefore, when operating the production lever 161L, the player becomes excited and tends to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player unintentionally comes into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Otherwise, the production lever 161L may be damaged. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

In addition, in this embodiment, a variable performance is executed according to a determination result in which it is determined that a jackpot game will be executed, rather than a variable performance according to a determination result in which it is determined that a jackpot game will not be executed. In this case, it is easier to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L.
In this case, when a performance using the performance lever 161L is performed, the player comes to expect a big hit and becomes easily excited when operating the performance lever 161L. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

In addition, the case where the variable performance is executed according to the determination result in which it was determined that the jackpot game will not be executed is better than the case where the variable performance is executed according to the determination result in which it is determined that the jackpot game is executed. The effect using the effect lever 161L may be made easier to execute. That is, a configuration opposite to that of this embodiment may be adopted.
In this case, even if a variable performance is performed in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the performance using the production lever 161L is performed, so a variable performance in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss is performed. It is possible to suppress a decrease in player's interest in the case of a game. Furthermore, by using the caution sticker 41 to alert the player regarding the operation of the production lever 161L, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100, or the production lever 161L may Damage can be prevented.

Further, the variation performance example 2 is a variation performance in which a pseudo-continuous performance is not performed, and the performance lever 161L is not used in this variation performance. On the other hand, variable performance example 3 is a variable performance in which a pseudo-continuous performance is performed, and the performance lever 161L is used in this variable performance. Here, in this embodiment, as variable performance patterns in which the performance lever 161L is used, there are provided a variable performance pattern in which pseudo-continuous performance is not performed, and a variable performance pattern in which pseudo-continuous performance is performed. Furthermore, as variable performance patterns in which the performance lever 161L is not used, there are provided a variable performance pattern in which pseudo-continuous performance is not performed, and a variable performance pattern in which pseudo-continuous performance is performed. As for the variable presentation pattern in which the presentation lever 161L is not used, the probability that a variable presentation pattern in which pseudo-continuous presentation is not performed is higher than the probability that a variable presentation pattern in which pseudo-continuous presentation is performed is selected. It's expensive. Furthermore, as a variable presentation pattern in which the presentation lever 161L is used, the probability that a variable presentation pattern in which pseudo-continuous presentation is performed is higher than the probability that a variable presentation pattern in which pseudo-continuous presentation is not performed is selected. are doing. That is, in the present embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can perform a pseudo-continuous performance in which a plurality of decorative patterns 61 are pseudo-varied. In addition, a variable performance in which a pseudo-continuous performance is performed is easier to execute in which the performance lever 161L is used than a variable performance in which a pseudo-continuous performance is not performed.
In this case, in a variable performance in which a pseudo-continuous performance is performed, the player becomes more excited when operating the performance lever 161L to the extent that the player expects to win a jackpot, compared to a variable performance in which a pseudo-continuous performance is not performed. . Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.
In addition, a variable performance that does not perform a pseudo-continuous performance may be easier to execute a performance using the performance lever 161L, rather than a variable performance that performs a pseudo-continuous performance. That is, a configuration opposite to this embodiment may be adopted.

Further, the production lever 161L may not be used for a variable performance in which a pseudo-continuous performance is not performed, and the production lever 161L may be used for a variable performance in which a pseudo-continuous performance is performed. In other words, it is easier to perform a performance using the production lever 161L in a variation performance that performs a pseudo-continuation performance than in a variation performance that does not perform a pseudo-continuation performance. This also includes not performing a performance using the lever 161L (0%) and always performing a performance using the performance lever 161L (100%) in a variable performance in which a pseudo-continuous performance is executed.

Furthermore, the first variation effect is a variation effect related to the variation image 51 whose display color is white, and the effect lever 161L is not used in this variation effect. On the other hand, variation presentation example 3 is a variation presentation related to a variation image 51 whose display color is red, and the presentation lever 161L is used in this variation presentation. Here, in this embodiment, as the variable effect patterns in which the effect lever 161L is used, a variable effect pattern related to the variable image 51 whose display color is white and a variable effect pattern related to the variable image 51 whose display color is red are used, respectively. It is set up. Further, as variable effect patterns in which the effect lever 161L is not used, a variable effect pattern related to the variable image 51 whose display color is white and a variable effect pattern related to the variable image 51 whose display color is red are provided, respectively. As for the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is not used, the variable effect pattern related to the variable image 51 whose display color is white is higher than the probability that the variable effect pattern related to the variable image 51 whose display color is red is selected. This increases the probability of being selected. Furthermore, as the variable effect pattern in which the effect lever 161L is used, the variable effect pattern associated with the variable image 51 whose display color is red is selected more than the probability that the variable effect pattern associated with the variable image 51 whose display color is white is selected. It increases the probability that it will happen. That is, in the present embodiment, it is easier to execute the effect using the effect lever 161L during the execution of the second variable effect than during the execution of the first variable effect. Here, examples of the first variation effect include a variation effect related to the variation image 51 whose display color is white. Further, the second variable performance is a variable performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed more than the first variable performance. Examples of the second variation effect include a variation effect related to the variation image 51 whose display color is blue, green, red, or the like. Note that the first variable performance may be, for example, a variable performance in which no reach performance is performed. The second variable performance may be, for example, a variable performance in which a reach performance is performed.
In this case, in the second variable performance, the player is more likely to get excited when operating the performance lever 161L as much as he expects to win a jackpot than in the first variable performance. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.
Note that the performance using the performance lever 161L may be made easier to execute during the execution of the first variable performance rather than during the execution of the second fluctuation performance. That is, a configuration opposite to this embodiment may be adopted.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display size of the lever operation image 538 (see FIG. 45-2 (15)) is larger than the display size of the button operation image 531 (see FIG. 45-1 (4)). That is, in this embodiment, the display area of the lever operation image 538 is larger than the display area of the button operation image 531.
In this case, the player is more likely to get excited when operating the production lever 161L because the lever operation image 538 feels more powerful than the button operation image 531. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

Further, in this embodiment, before the operation of the production lever 161L can be accepted, first, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (13), an image imitating a part of the production lever 161L is displayed. Furthermore, after that, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (14), an image simulating the entire production lever 161L is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (15), operation of the production lever 161L can be accepted. become.
In this case, compared to the case where an image simulating the entire direction of the direction lever 161L is displayed without displaying an image simulating a part of the direction lever 161L, the operation of the direction lever 161L can be accepted. The player is further encouraged as to whether or not the operation performance will be performed. Therefore, when operating the production lever 161L, the player becomes excited and tends to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player unintentionally comes into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Otherwise, the production lever 161L may be damaged. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. Therefore, even if the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45-2 (15), an image imitating a flame is displayed in the lever operation image 538 as an image encouraging the player to operate the production lever 161L. That is, in this embodiment, an image decorated with a different decoration than the production lever 161L is displayed as an image encouraging the player to operate the production lever 161L, as an instruction image prompting the player to operate the production lever 161L. .
In this case, compared to the case where an image different from the production lever 161L is not displayed in the instruction image, the player becomes more excited when operating the production lever 161L. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the production button 161B is operated, an accessory production in which the movable accessory 115 placed on the left side of the three movable accessories 115 moves is executed. On the other hand, when the production lever 161L is operated, an accessory production in which the movable accessory 115 placed at the center of the three movable accessories 115 moves is executed. That is, in this embodiment, the movable accessory 115 that moves when the production button 161B is operated does not move when the production lever 161L is operated. In other words, the level of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed is higher for the accessory performance performed when the performance lever 161L is operated than for the accessory performance performed when the performance button 161B is operated.
In this case, the player has higher expectations for the accessory performance that will be performed when the performance lever 161L is operated than for the accessory performance that will be performed when the performance button 161B is operated. I get easily excited when operating 161L. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

Moreover, the example 1 of variable production is a variation production in which the production button 161B is not used, and in this variation production, the production lever 161L is not used. On the other hand, variable production example 3 is a variation production in which the production button 161B is used, and in this variation production, the production lever 161L is used. That is, in the present embodiment, the performance control unit 300 performs better during execution of a variable performance in which a performance using the performance button 161B is performed than during execution of a variable performance in which a performance using the performance button 161B is not performed. , it is easy to execute a performance using the performance lever 161L.

Further, the variation performance example 1 is a variation performance in which a reach performance is not executed, and the performance lever 161L is not used in this variation performance. On the other hand, variable performance example 3 is a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed, and the performance lever 161L is used in this variable performance. That is, in the present embodiment, the production control unit 300 executes the production using the production lever 161L more efficiently during the execution of the variable production in which the reach effect is executed than during the execution of the variation production in which the reach effect is not executed. Easy to do. It should be noted that it is easier to execute a performance using the production lever 161L during execution of a variable production in which a reach production is executed than during execution of a variation production in which a reach production is not executed. During the execution of the variable production, the production lever 161L is not executed (0%), and during the execution of the variable production in which the reach production is executed, the production lever 161L is always executed (100%). ) is also included.

In addition, in variable performance example 3, a performance in which the performance lever 161L is used is executed after the start of the ready-to-win performance. That is, in the present embodiment, in the variable performance, the performance control unit 300 can more easily execute the performance using the production lever 161L after the start of the ready-to-reach performance than before the start of the ready-to-reach performance. In addition, in a variable performance, it is easier to execute a performance that uses the production lever 161L after the start of the reach performance than before the start of the reach performance. This also includes not executing the performance using the production lever 161L (0%) and always executing the production using the production lever 161L after the start of the ready-to-reach production in the variable production (100%).

Further, in the variable performance example 3, as shown in FIGS. 45-1 (4) and 45-1 (5), even if the performance button 161B is operated, the special symbol lottery result is not announced. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 45-2 (15) to 45-3 (17), when the production lever 161L is operated, the lottery result of the special symbol is notified. That is, in this embodiment, it is easier for the production control unit 300 to execute the production of notifying the lottery result of the special symbol according to the operation of the production lever 161L rather than the production button 161B. In other words, the time from when the production lever 161L is operated until the decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped is more likely to be shorter than the production button 161B.

In addition, in variable performance example 3, the performance button 161B is used twice, whereas the performance lever 161L is used once. That is, in the present embodiment, the performance control unit 300 can more easily reduce the number of executions of the performance using the performance lever 161L than the performance using the performance button 161B in the variable performance.

Further, in the variable performance example 3, the performance button 161B is used when none of the decorative symbols 61 are temporarily stopped in the variable performance. On the other hand, the production lever 161L is used when the decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped. That is, in the present embodiment, the production control unit 300 performs a variation production in which the production lever 161L is used more than a production in which the production button 161B is used when none of the decorative symbols 61 are temporarily stopped. difficult to implement. It should be noted that the effect using the effect lever 161L is more difficult to execute than the effect using the effect button 161B when none of the decorative symbols 61 are temporarily stopped in the variable effect. When none of the symbols 61 are temporarily stopped, the production lever 161L is not executed (0%), and when none of the decorative symbols 61 are temporarily stopped in the variable production, the production button 161B is used. This also includes always executing (100%).

(Fluctuation effect example 4)
FIGS. 46-1 to 46-3 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 46-1 to 46-3, another specific example (variation effect example 4) of the variation effect of the decorative pattern 61 will be described.
Note that FIGS. 46-1 to 46-3 are variable effects that are executed when "EB1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern" in FIG. 41. When "EB1" is selected as this "variable performance pattern", the "pseudo-continuous number of times" is "-", that is, the pseudo-continuous performance is not executed. Further, "N1" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach", and "final display color" is "red". In addition, "promotion" is executed, "BU1" is executed as a "production button" at "normal time", "BU2" is executed as a "button production" at "SPSP reach", and "during promotion promotion"``LE1'' is executed as the ``production lever''. In addition, in the following explanation, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned performances will be mainly explained, and explanations about points that are the same as each of the above-mentioned variable performances may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 46-1 (1), as the variation of the previous special symbol ends, the highly decorative decorative symbol 61 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114 by the production control section 300. It is assumed that Also, at this time, the pending image 52 is displayed in blue.

Then, as shown in FIG. 46-1 (2), the decorative pattern 61 starts to change with the start of the variable display of the next special pattern. In this way, when the next variable display of the special symbol starts, the pending image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. Also, at this time, a change performance is performed. During execution of this change effect, a change inciting image 530 is displayed. In the illustrated example, a red image is displayed as the change-inciting image 530.
Next, as shown in FIG. 46-1 (3), the display color of the variable image 51 changes to red due to the change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46-1 (4), a reach effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "4" which is the left decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped, the number "4" which is the right decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped, and the number "4" is temporarily stopped, and a reach state is established.
Next, as shown in FIG. 46-1 (5), a button operation effect is executed. In this button operation effect, a button operation image 531 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B while the button operation image 531 is displayed, a role model effect is performed as shown in FIG. 46-1 (6). In this accessory performance, the movable accessory 115 placed on the left side of the three movable accessories 115 (see FIG. 1) covers a part of the image display section 114.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46-1 (7), the SP reach effect is executed. While the SP reach effect is being executed, the SP reach image 534 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 46-1 (8), the SPSP reach effect is executed. While the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the SPSP reach image 535 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46-2 (9), a button promotion image 540 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 46-2 (10), a button operation effect is performed. In this button operation effect, a button operation image 531 is displayed. Further, at this time, the button operation image 531 is displayed in a different display mode from the button operation image 531 (see FIG. 46-1 (5)) displayed during the execution of the normal reach effect. More specifically, as the button operation image 531, an image imitating the effect button 161B emitting red light is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B while the button operation image 531 is displayed, a role model effect is performed as shown in FIG. 46-2 (11). In this accessory performance, the movable accessory 115 placed at the center of the three movable accessories 115 covers a part of the image display section 114.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46-2 (12), the decorative pattern 61 of the number zero is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbols 61 are displayed in a combination of "444", thereby informing the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.
Next, as shown in FIG. 46-2 (13), a promotion promotion effect is performed. While this promotion promotion performance is being performed, a promotion promotion image 539 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46-2 (14), a lever-up front image 536 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 46-2 (15), a lever tilting rear image 537 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 46-2 (16), a lever operation performance is performed. While this lever operation effect is being performed, a lever operation image 538 is displayed. Also, at this time, the production operation device 161 changes from the non-protruding state to the protruding state, allowing the player to operate the production lever 161L.

Then, when the player operates the production lever 161L while the lever operation image 538 is displayed, the decorative symbols 61 are displayed in a combination of "777" as shown in FIG. 46-3 (17). In other words, as a result of the promotion promotion performance, the person is promoted. Further, at this time, the effect operation device 161 changes from the protruding state to the non-protruding state, and the player cannot operate the effect lever 161L.
Then, as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative pattern 61 stops changing as shown in FIG. 46-3 (18). The combination "777" of the decorative symbols 61 that are stopped and displayed, shown in FIG. 46-3 (18), is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Further, “777” is displayed as the small pattern 56. In other words, the decorative pattern 61 and the small pattern 56 are displayed in a matching combination of "777".

As described above, in the variable performance example 4, the performance button 161B has multiple types of performance modes (see FIG. 41), while the performance lever 161L has only one type of performance mode. That is, in this embodiment, the number of production modes of the production lever 161L and the number of production modes of the production button 161B are different.
In this case, compared to the case where the number of performance modes of the production lever 161L and the number of production modes of the production button 161B are the same, the player who plays the one with a larger number of production modes between the production lever 161L and the production button 161B can increase their interest. Furthermore, by using the caution sticker 41 to alert the player regarding the operation of the production lever 161L, the player may unintentionally touch a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100, or the production lever 161L may Damage can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the number of presentation modes of the presentation lever 161L is smaller than the number of presentation modes of the presentation button 161B. In this case, the player's interest in the performance button 161B can be further increased.
Furthermore, the number of performance modes of the performance lever 161L may be greater than the number of performance modes of the performance button 161B. In this case, the player's interest in the production lever 161L can be further increased.

Further, in this embodiment, although it has been explained that the presentation lever 161L has one type of presentation mode, the present invention is not limited to this. The presentation lever 161L may have two or more types of presentation modes. Further, the presentation mode of the presentation button 161B may be three or more types.
Further, the performance mode of the performance button 161B is not limited to the performance mode of the performance button 161B during execution of the button operation performance. That is, the performance mode of the performance button 161B may include the performance mode of the performance button 161B when the operation of the performance button 161B is not valid. Further, the performance mode of the performance lever 161L is not limited to the performance mode of the performance lever 161L during execution of the lever operation performance. That is, the performance mode of the production lever 161L may include the production mode of the production lever 161L when the operation of the production lever 161L is not effective.

Further, the presentation mode of the presentation button 161B may include the display mode of the button operation image 531. That is, the performance mode of the performance button 161B may include the performance mode related to the performance button 161B.
Further, the presentation mode of the presentation lever 161L may include a display mode of the lever operation image 538. That is, the performance mode of the production lever 161L may include a production mode related to the production lever 161L.

Furthermore, the variation performance example 3 is a variation performance in which the performance button 161B is used in promotion promotion performance, and in this variation performance, no promotion is performed. On the other hand, variation performance example 4 is a variation performance in which the performance lever 161L is used in a promotion promotion performance, and in this variation performance, a promotion is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the performance control unit 300 performs a performance in which the performance lever 161L is used in a variable performance where a promotion is performed after a promotion promotion performance, rather than a fluctuation performance in which a promotion is not performed after a promotion promotion performance. easy to carry out.

(Operation validity period)
Next, a period in which the operation of the production lever 161L is valid and a period in which the operation of the production button 161B is valid will be explained.
FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram of a period in which the operation of the production lever 161L is valid in the variable production example 3 and a period in which the operation of the production button 161B is valid in the variation production example 4.

As shown in FIG. 47(A), in variable effect example 3, a lever-initiating stage image 536 (see FIG. 45-2 (13)) is displayed during execution of the SPSP reach effect. Further, when time T1 has elapsed since the lever pre-movement image 536 was displayed, a lever operation image 538 (see FIG. 45-2 (15)) is displayed, and the operation of the production lever 161L becomes effective. Here, a period T2 is set as a period during which the operation of the production lever 161L is valid, and if the production lever 161L is operated before this period T2 elapses, the operation of the production lever 161L is accepted, and the accessory A presentation (see FIG. 45-2 (16)) is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47(B), in the variable effect example 4, a button promotion image 540 (see FIG. 46-2 (9)) is displayed during execution of the SPSP reach effect. Further, when time T3 has elapsed since the button activation image 540 was displayed, the button operation image 531 (see FIG. 46-2 (10)) is displayed, and the operation of the effect button 161B becomes valid. Here, time T3 is shorter than time T1. In addition, a period T4 is set as a period during which the operation of the production button 161B is valid, and if the production button 161B is operated before this period T4 elapses, the operation of the production button 161B is accepted and the accessory production is performed. (See FIG. 46-2 (11)) is performed. Here, the period T4 is a shorter time than the period T2.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the operation of the production lever 161L after the lever promotion pre-stage image 536 is displayed is longer than the time T3 from when the button promotion image 540 is displayed until the operation of the production button 161B becomes effective. The time T1 until it becomes effective is longer. That is, in this embodiment, before the operation on the effect lever 161L becomes acceptable, the first suggestion effect that suggests that the operation on the effect lever 161L can be accepted can be executed. Further, before the operation on the effect button 161B becomes acceptable, a second suggestion effect indicating that the operation on the effect button 161B can be accepted can be executed. And, the time from the start of the first suggestion production until the operation on the production lever 161L can be accepted is longer than the time from the start of the second suggestion production until the operation on the production button 161B can be accepted. The time is longer.
In this case, the player becomes excited when the production lever 161L becomes operable because the production lever 161L takes a longer time to indicate that the production lever 161L can be operated than the production button 161B. It becomes easier. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

Further, in this embodiment, the period T2 during which the operation on the production lever 161L is valid is longer than the period T4 during which the operation on the production button 161B is valid. That is, in this embodiment, there is a first validity period in which the operation on the production lever 161L is valid, and a second validity period in which the operation on the production button is valid. The first validity period is longer than the second validity period.
In this case, since the effective period of operation of the effect lever 161L is longer than that of the effect button 161B, the player becomes more likely to become excited as the effective period of operation elapses when operating the effect lever 161L. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

(Variable effect example 5)
FIGS. 48-1 and 48-2 are diagrams showing one aspect of the performance performed by the performance control unit 300 using the image display unit 114.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 48-1 and 48-2, another specific example (variable effect example 5) of the variable effect of the decorative pattern 61 will be described.
In the following explanation, points that are different from each of the above-mentioned performances will be mainly explained, and explanations about points that are the same as each of the above-mentioned variable performances may be omitted.

First, in variable performance example 5, the gaming state is a high probability time saving game state, and the variable pedestal and the pending number display 55 are displayed in a different display form from the low probability time saving no game state (for example, see FIG. 43).
Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the electric tulip 123 is arranged on the right side of the gaming area 111. Therefore, in the high-probability time-saving game state, the right-hand hitting image 542 is displayed on the display screen of the image display unit 114 in order to instruct the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side of the game area 111. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 48-1 (1), a decorative pattern 61 ("777") with low decorativeness is fixed and stopped on the image display section 114. It should be noted that the decorative symbols 61 displayed at this time correspond to the sequence of numbers that are finalized and stopped before the jackpot game is executed, that is, when the jackpot is won. Similarly to the decorative pattern 61, the small pattern 56 is fixed and stopped by the sequence of numbers "777".

Then, as shown in FIG. 48-1(2), the decorative pattern 61 starts to change with the start of the variable display of the next special pattern.
Next, as shown in FIG. 48-1 (3), a reach effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "5" which is the left decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped, the number "5" which is the right decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped, and the number "5" is temporarily stopped, and a reach state is established.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48-1 (4), a lever-up front image 536 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 48-1 (5), a lever tilting rear stage image 537 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 48-1 (6), a lever operation performance is performed. While this lever operation effect is being performed, a lever operation image 538 is displayed. Also, at this time, the production operation device 161 changes from the non-protruding state to the protruding state, allowing the player to operate the production lever 161L.

Then, when the player operates the production lever 161L while the lever operation image 538 is being displayed, the accessory production is performed as shown in FIG. 48-1 (7). In the illustrated example, the movable accessory 115 placed at the center of the three movable accessories 115 covers a part of the image display section 114 as an accessory effect. Further, at this time, the effect operation device 161 changes from the protruding state to the non-protruding state, and the player cannot operate the effect lever 161L.
Next, as shown in FIG. 48-1 (8), the decorative pattern 61 of the number zero is temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbols 61 are displayed in a combination of "555", thereby informing the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48-2 (9), a promotion promotion effect is performed. While this promotion promotion performance is being performed, a promotion promotion image 539 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 48-2 (10), a button operation effect is performed. While the button operation effect is being executed, a button operation image 531 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B while the button operation image 531 is displayed, the decorative patterns 61 are displayed in a combination of "777" as shown in FIG. 48-2 (11). In other words, as a result of the promotion promotion performance, the person is promoted.

Then, as shown in FIG. 48-2 (12), as the special symbol stops changing, the decorative pattern 61 stops changing. The combination of numbers "777" of this decorative pattern 61 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Further, “777” is displayed as the small pattern 56. In other words, the decorative pattern 61 and the small pattern 56 are displayed in a matching combination of "777".

In this way, the variable performance example 5 is a variable performance in a high probability time-saving game state, and the performance lever 161L is used in this variable performance. Further, the variable performance example 2 is a variable performance in a low probability time saving no-gaming state, and the performance lever 161L is not used in this variable performance. Here, in this embodiment, as variable performance patterns in which the performance lever 161L is used, a variable performance pattern in a high probability time-saving game state and a variable performance pattern in a low-probability time-saving no game state are provided, respectively. In the high-probability time-saving game state, the probability that the variable production pattern in which the production lever 161L is used is selected is higher than in the low-probability time-saving no-game state. That is, in the present embodiment, the execution probability of the performance using the performance lever 161L is made different between when the variable performance in the first mode is executed and when the variable performance in the second mode is executed. The first mode includes, for example, a low probability time-saving no-gaming state, and the second mode includes, for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state. In this case, the game control unit 200 can be regarded as a mode control means that can control the first mode and the second mode different from the first mode. Further, the first mode includes, for example, a normal production mode, and the second mode includes, for example, a specific production mode called a zone, which is different from the normal production mode. In this case, the production control unit 300 can be regarded as mode control means that can control the first mode and the second mode different from the first mode.
In this case, compared to the case where the execution probability of the effect using the effect lever 161L is the same when the variable effect of the first mode is executed and when the variable effect of the second mode is executed, the effect is The player's interest in the performance using the lever 161L increases. Therefore, when operating the production lever 161L, the player becomes excited and tends to violently operate the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player unintentionally comes into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Otherwise, the production lever 161L may be damaged. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is excited, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

Note that, for example, the performance using the performance lever 161L may be made easier to perform when the first mode variable performance is executed than when the second mode variable performance is executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing when the variable performance of the first mode is executed.
Furthermore, for example, the performance using the performance lever 161L may be made easier to perform when the variable performance in the second mode is executed than when the variable performance in the first mode is executed. In this case, it is possible to further enhance the player's interest when the variable performance of the second mode is executed.

Further, for example, the execution probability of the performance in which the performance lever 161L is used may be varied for each stage of the performance. In other words, the fact that the execution probability of the performance using the production lever 161L is different between when the first mode fluctuating performance is performed and when the second mode fluctuating performance is performed is because of the first stage fluctuation. The execution probability of the performance in which the performance lever 161L is used differs between when the performance is executed and when the variable performance of the second stage, which is in the same gaming state as the first stage but different from the first stage, is executed. It also includes.

(Example of production settings)
Next, an example of setting effects by the player's operations will be explained. In the following explanation, as shown in FIG. 40, the production lever 161L is provided separately from the production button 161B, and the player can operate the production lever 161L regardless of the progress of the game. shall be.
FIG. 49 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting effects by a player's operation.

As shown in FIG. 49(1), it is assumed that a highly decorative decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped on the image display section 114. Further, at this time, the pending number display 55 of the first starting port 121 and the pending number display 55 of the second starting port 122 both indicate "0". Furthermore, a menu display image 570 is displayed on the image display section 114. Menu display image 570 is an image showing a method for displaying a menu screen. The menu screen is a screen on which effect items that can be set by the player operating the operating means are displayed. In the illustrated example, the menu display image 570 displays the text "Display menu screen with effect button." Further, in the menu display image 570, an image imitating the effect button 161B is displayed. That is, in the menu display image 570, text and pictures indicate that a menu screen is displayed when the player operates the effect button 161B.

Here, if the player operates the production lever 161L, for example, the menu screen is not displayed. On the other hand, when the player operates the performance button 161B, a menu screen 571 is displayed as shown in FIG. 49(2).
On the menu screen 571, a light amount adjustment item image 572, a volume adjustment item image 573, a production explanation item image 574, a mode setting item image 575, and an end item image 576 are displayed. Further, on the menu screen 571, a cursor image 577, an instruction method image 578, and a determination method image 579 are displayed.

The light amount adjustment item image 572 is an image showing light amount adjustment items. The light intensity adjustment item is an item for adjusting the light intensity of various lamps.
The volume adjustment item image 573 is an image showing volume adjustment items. The volume adjustment item is an item for adjusting the volume of sound output from the speaker 156.
The performance explanation item image 574 is an image showing performance explanation items. The performance explanation item is an item for explaining the contents of various performances to the player.
The mode setting item image 575 is an image showing production mode setting items. The production mode setting item is an item for setting the production mode. The effect mode is a setting of a plurality of types of effects, such as a setting of BGM played during execution of a variable effect in a low probability time-saving no-gaming state, a setting of a background image displayed on the image display section 114, etc.

The end item image 576 is an image showing the end item. The end item is an item for hiding the menu screen 571.
The cursor image 577 is an image indicating the item being specified. In the illustrated example, a light amount adjustment item is indicated, and the cursor image 577 is associated with the light amount adjustment item image 572.

The instruction method image 578 is an image showing a method for the player to specify each item shown on the menu screen 571. The instruction method image 578 shows an image that imitates the production key 162, with the rear button 162a and front button 162b of the production key 162 (see FIG. 33) painted black. That is, the instruction method image 578 includes a picture of the effect key 162 that indicates that the player can instruct each item shown on the menu screen 571 by operating the rear button 162a and front button 162b of the effect key 162. It is shown by.
The determination method image 579 is an image showing a method for determining the designated item on the menu screen 571. In the determination method image 579, an image imitating the effect button 161B is displayed. That is, in the determination method image 579, the picture of the performance button 161B indicates that the player can determine the item on the menu screen 571 by operating the performance button 161B.

Here, when the player operates the front button 162b button of the production key 162, the cursor image 577 is associated with the volume adjustment item image 573, and the volume adjustment item is instructed, as shown in FIG. 49(3). .
Then, when the player operates the performance button 161B, a volume adjustment screen 580 is displayed as shown in FIG. 49(4). Volume adjustment screen 580 is a screen for adjusting the volume of sound output from speaker 156. The volume adjustment screen 580 displays a volume gauge image 581 showing the current volume, an adjustment method image 582 showing a method for adjusting the volume, and a determination method image 583 showing a method for determining the volume. There is.

The volume gauge image 581 shows the currently set volume level out of a plurality of levels that can be output as the volume level. In the illustrated example, the currently set volume level is shown as three out of five levels.
The adjustment method image 582 is an image showing a method for the player to adjust the volume. The adjustment method image 582 shows an image that imitates the production key 162 in such a manner that the rear button 162a and the front button 162b of the production key 162 are painted black. That is, in the adjustment method image 582, a picture of the performance key 162 indicates that the player can adjust the volume by operating the rear button 162a or front button 162b of the performance key 162.
The determination method image 583 is an image showing a method for determining the volume. In the determination method image 583, an image imitating the effect button 161B is displayed. That is, in the determination method image 583, the picture of the performance button 161B indicates that the player can determine the volume by operating the performance button 161B.

Here, when the player operates the production lever 161L, for example, the volume level does not change. On the other hand, when the player operates the back button 162a of the production key 162, the volume gauge image 581 shows the volume as four out of five levels, as shown in FIG. 49(5). . Also, at this time, the speaker 156 outputs a sound called "pico" notifying that the volume has been adjusted. This notification sound is output at the adjusted volume level, that is, at four of the five volume levels.

Here, if the player operates the production lever 161L, for example, the volume adjustment is not completed. On the other hand, when the player operates the effect button 161B, a volume adjustment completion image 584 is displayed as shown in FIG. 49(6). The volume adjustment completion image 584 is an image indicating that the volume adjustment has been completed. In the illustrated example, the volume adjustment completion image 584 displays the text "Volume has been adjusted."

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 49(7), the menu screen 571 is displayed again. Then, when the player operates the performance button 161B with the cursor image 577 associated with the end item image 576 by operating the front button 162b of the performance key 162, as shown in FIG. 49(8), Menu screen 571 is hidden.

Although not shown, the amount of light from the various lamps can be adjusted using a method similar to the method for adjusting the volume. That is, when the player operates the effect button 161B while the cursor image 577 is associated with the light amount adjustment item image 572 on the menu screen 571 (see FIG. 49(2)), a screen for adjusting the light amount is displayed. Is displayed. Then, with the screen for adjusting the light amount displayed, the player operates the effect key 162 to adjust the light amount, and then operates the effect button 161B to adjust the light amount. is completed. Note that even if the player operates the production lever 161L while the screen for adjusting the light amount is displayed, the light amount is not adjusted and the adjustment of the light amount is not completed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the menu screen 571 is not displayed even if the effect lever 161L is operated, and the menu screen 571 is displayed when the effect button 161B is operated. That is, in this embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can display a selection image that allows selection of any one of a plurality of items. Then, the selected image is not displayed in response to the operation of the production lever 161L, but the selected image is displayed in response to the operation of the production button 161B.
In this case, to the extent that the effect lever 161L is not used to display the selected image, the player tends to become unfamiliar with operating the effect lever 161L, and is likely to violently operate the effect lever 161L. When a player violently operates the production lever 161L, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is not accustomed to operating the production lever 161L, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

Further, in this embodiment, the volume is not changed even if the production lever 161L is operated, and the volume is changed when the production key 162 or the production button 161B is operated. That is, in this embodiment, the production control unit 300 can change the settings related to production according to the operation of the production key 162 or the production button 161B without changing the settings related to production according to the operation of the production lever 161L.
In this case, since the performance lever 161L is not used to change the settings related to the performance, the player tends to become unfamiliar with the operation of the performance lever 161L and tends to operate the performance lever 161L violently. When a player violently operates the production lever 161L, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to call attention by Therefore, even if the player is not accustomed to operating the production lever 161L, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

Further, in this embodiment, the volume is not set even if the production lever 161L is operated, but the volume is set when the production key 162 or the production button 161B is operated. That is, in this embodiment, the production control unit 300 does not set the volume according to the operation of the production lever 161L, but can set the volume according to the operation of the production key 162 or the production button 161B.
In this case, since the effect lever 161L is not used to set the volume, the player tends to become unfamiliar with operating the effect lever 161L, and is likely to violently operate the effect lever 161L. When a player violently operates the production lever 161L, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is not accustomed to operating the production lever 161L, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

Further, in this embodiment, the light amount is not set even if the effect lever 161L is operated, but the light amount is set when the effect key 162 or the effect button 161B is operated. That is, in this embodiment, the production control unit 300 does not set the light amount according to the operation of the production lever 161L, but can set the light amount according to the operation of the production key 162 or the production button 161B.
In this case, since the effect lever 161L is not used to set the amount of light, the player tends to become unfamiliar with operating the effect lever 161L, and is likely to violently operate the effect lever 161L. When a player violently operates the production lever 161L, there is a risk that the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is not accustomed to operating the production lever 161L, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching a part of the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an item is designated in response to the operation of the production key 162, and then the item is determined in response to the operation of the production button 161B. On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 48-1 (6) of variable performance example 5, the performance lever 161L is used alone without being used together with other operating means different from the performance lever 161L. That is, the production button 161B is used together with other operating means different from the production button 161B, whereas the production lever 161L is not used together with other operation means different from the production lever 161L.
In this case, the player can easily operate the production lever 161L in a state where he or she is not accustomed to operating the operating means. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player violently operates the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is a risk of On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player is not accustomed to operating the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

Note that the operation means used to adjust the volume and the amount of light are not limited to the effect key 162 and the effect button 161B.
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing another example of adjusting the volume and light amount.
In FIG. 50(1), a light amount adjustment image 585 in which the light amount can be adjusted and a volume adjustment image 586 in which the volume can be adjusted are displayed.

In the light amount adjustment image 585, a gauge indicates the currently set level of the light amount among a plurality of levels that can be output as the amount of light. In the illustrated example, the currently set light amount is shown as three out of five levels. Further, the light amount adjustment image 585 shows a method for adjusting the light amount. In the illustrated example, the light amount adjustment image 585 shows an image simulating the light amount adjustment section 166. That is, in the light amount adjustment image 585, a picture of the light amount adjustment section 166 indicates that the player can adjust the amount of light by operating the light amount adjustment section 166.

In the volume adjustment image 586, a gauge indicates the currently set volume level out of a plurality of levels that can be output as the volume level. In the illustrated example, the currently set volume level is shown as four out of five levels. Further, the volume adjustment image 586 shows a method for adjusting the volume. In the illustrated example, the volume adjustment image 586 shows an image imitating the volume adjustment section 167. That is, in the volume adjustment image 586, the picture of the volume adjustment section 167 indicates that the player can adjust the volume by operating the volume adjustment section 167.

Here, when the player operates the production lever 161L, for example, the display contents of both the light amount adjustment image 585 and the volume adjustment image 586 do not change, and neither the light amount nor the volume is adjusted. On the other hand, when the player operates, for example, the increase button 166a of the light amount adjustment section 166, the light amount adjustment image 585 displays four out of five levels of light amount as shown in FIG. 50(2). is shown as Also, at this time, the amount of light from the various lamps increases.

Next, when the player operates, for example, the decrease button 167b of the volume adjustment section 167, the volume adjustment image 586 displays the volume level as three out of five levels, as shown in FIG. 50(3). shown. Also, at this time, the speaker 156 outputs a sound called "pico" notifying that the volume has been adjusted. This notification sound is output at the adjusted volume, that is, at three out of five volume levels.

In this way, the effect control section 300 may be able to set the light amount according to the operation of the light amount adjustment section 166. Further, the effect control section 300 may be able to set the volume according to the operation of the volume adjustment section 167. Furthermore, the effect control section 300 may be able to change the settings related to the effect according to the operations of the light amount adjustment section 166 and the volume adjustment section 167.

In addition, in the effect setting examples shown in FIGS. 49 and 50, the player can operate the effect button 161B, the effect key 162, the light amount adjustment section 166, and the volume adjustment section 167 at any timing. On the other hand, the operation of the production lever 161L is limited to a period in which the operation of the production lever 161L is valid, as shown in FIG. 47(A). Further, when operating the production lever 161L, the player is urged to operate the production lever 161L by a lever operation image 538, as shown in FIG. 48-1 (6), for example.
In this case, it becomes easier for the player to operate the production lever 161L in a hurry. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player violently operates the production lever 161L, and during this operation, the player may unintentionally come into contact with a part of the pachinko gaming machine 100 or damage the production lever 161L. There is a risk of On the other hand, in this embodiment, the caution sticker 41 is provided between the production lever 161L and the handle 151 in the left-right direction. In this case, as described above, when the player looks at the production lever 161L in order to operate the production lever 161L, it is easy to make the player aware of the existence of the attention-calling sticker 41. It is possible to alert people by Therefore, even if the player tries to operate the production lever 161L in a hurry, it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the pachinko game machine 100 or damaging the production lever 161L.

(Example of modification of selected image)
Next, a selected image in a modified example will be explained.
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example of automatic operation settings.
As shown in FIG. 51(1), a setting screen display image 587 is displayed on the image display section 114. The settings screen display image 587 is an image showing a method for displaying the automatic operation settings screen. The automatic operation setting screen is a screen for the player to set automatic operation. Automatic operation is a setting in which the performance control section 300 performs a performance according to the operation of the performance lever 161L or the performance button 161B without the player operating the performance lever 161L or the performance button 161B. In the illustrated example, the setting screen display image 587 displays the text "Display automatic operation setting screen with production button." Further, in the setting screen display image 587, an image imitating the effect button 161B is displayed. That is, in the setting screen display image 587, text and pictures indicate that the automatic operation setting screen will be displayed when the player operates the effect button 161B.

Here, when the player operates the production lever 161L, for example, the automatic operation setting screen is not displayed. On the other hand, when the player operates the performance button 161B, an automatic operation setting screen 588 is displayed as shown in FIG. 51(2). The automatic operation setting screen 588 displays a content explanation section 588a, a determination section 588b, a negation section 588c, a cursor image 588d, an instruction method image 588e, and a determination method image 588f.

The content explanation section 588a displays information for explaining the settings on the automatic operation setting screen 588. In the illustrated example, the content explanation section 588a displays the text "The production button and production lever will be automatically operated."
The determination section 588b is a button for validating automatic operation.
The negative part 588c is a button for disabling automatic operation.
The cursor image 588d is an image indicating which button is specified among the determination section 588b and the negation section 588c. In the illustrated example, the negation part 588c is indicated, and the cursor image 588d is associated with the negation part 588c.

The instruction method image 588e is an image showing a method for the player to instruct the determination section 588b or the negation section 588c. The instruction method image 588e shows an image imitating the performance key 162, with the right button 162c and left button 162d of the performance key 162 painted black. That is, in the instruction method image 588e, a picture of the effect key 162 indicates that the player can instruct the determination portion 588b or the negation portion 588c by operating the effect key 162.
The determination method image 588f is an image showing a method for the player to determine whether to enable or disable automatic operation. An image imitating the effect button 161B is displayed in the determination method image 588f. That is, in the determination method image 588f, the picture of the performance button 161B indicates that the player can determine whether the automatic operation is valid or invalid by operating the performance button 161B.

Here, when the player operates the production lever 161L, for example, the cursor image 588d does not move, and the setting of whether automatic operation is enabled or disabled is not determined. On the other hand, when the player operates the left button 162d of the production key 162, as shown in FIG. 51(3), the determining section 588b is designated and the cursor image 588d is associated with the determining section 588b.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161B, a setting completion image 588g indicating that the setting to enable automatic operation has been determined is displayed as shown in FIG. 51(4). In the illustrated example, the text "Automatic operation has been set" is displayed in the setting completion image 588g.

In this way, the player may decide on either the deciding section 588b or the negating section 588c on the automatic operation setting screen 588. That is, the selection images that allow selection of any one of a plurality of items include images such as the automatic operation setting screen 588 that allow selection of any one of a plurality of items related to one setting.

(Variation example of production settings)
Next, an example of setting the effect in the modified example will be explained.
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of settings for effects in a modified example.
As shown in FIG. 52(1), when a jackpot is won, the decorative symbols 61 are fixed and stopped on the image display section 114 in combinations for when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52(2), an opening image 589 is displayed on the image display section 114. The opening image 589 is an image for notifying the player of the start of the jackpot game. More specifically, in the opening image 589 of this embodiment, the text "BIG Bonus! Congratulations" is displayed. This opening image 589 has content that suggests the type of jackpot (for example, the total number of rounds) and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. In the illustrated example, the opening image 589 suggests that the total number of rounds is 8 rounds and that a high probability time saving game state will be entered after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, a right-handed image 542 is displayed on the image display section 114.

Then, as shown in FIG. 52(3), when the jackpot game is started, a round image 591 and a music selection image 590 are displayed on the image display section 114.
The round image 591 is an image for informing the player of the number of rounds currently being executed in the jackpot game. For example, in the round image 591, if a jackpot for 8 rounds is won, "Round 1" to "Round 8" are displayed in order.
The song selection image 590 is an image for selecting a song to be output from the speaker 156 during the jackpot game being executed. In the illustrated example, “song A” is selected in the song selection image 590.

Here, when the player operates the production lever 161L, for example, the music output from the speaker 156 is not changed. On the other hand, when the player operates the front button 162b of the production key 162, the text "Song B" is displayed in the music selection image 590, as shown in FIG. 52(4). Also, at this time, "song B" is output from the speaker 156.

Thereafter, as the jackpot game progresses, a character instruction image 592 is displayed as shown in FIG. 52(5). The character instruction image 592 is an image for the player to specify the character to appear in the performance in the high probability time saving game state after the end of the jackpot game. The character instruction image 592 displays a first character image 593, a second character image 594, an instruction method image 595, and a determination method image 596.

The first character image 593 is an image showing the first character that can be instructed by the player in the character instruction image 592.
The second character image 594 is an image showing a second character that can be instructed by the player in the character instruction image 592. In the illustrated example, a first character image 593 is designated, and the display size of the first character image 593 is larger than that of the second character image 594.

The instruction method image 595 is an image showing a method for instructing a character. In the instruction method image 595, an image imitating the performance key 162 is displayed, with the right button 162c and the left button 162d of the performance key 162 painted black. That is, in the instruction method image 595, a picture of the production key 162 indicates that the player can specify a character by operating the right button 162c or the left button 162d of the production key 162.
The determination method image 596 is an image showing a method for determining a character. In the determination method image 596, an image imitating the effect button 161B is displayed. That is, in the determination method image 596, the picture of the performance button 161B indicates that the player can determine the character by operating the performance button 161B.

Here, when the player operates the production lever 161L, for example, the character to be instructed is not changed and the character is not determined. On the other hand, when the player operates the right button 162c of the production key 162, the second character image 594 is designated as shown in FIG. Display size becomes larger.

Then, when the player operates the performance button 161B, the first character image 593 is hidden and appears in the high probability time saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 52 (7). The character that does this is determined to be the second character.

In this manner, in this embodiment, by operating the production key 162, the player can change the music that is output from the speaker 156 during execution of the jackpot game. Furthermore, by operating the performance key 162 or the performance button 161B, the player can change the character that appears in the game state after the jackpot game. In other words, being able to change the settings related to the performance includes being able to change the settings related to the performance during the execution of the jackpot game, and being able to change the settings related to the performance in a high probability state such as a high probability time saving game state or a time saving state. It also includes.
Further, the target of changing the settings related to the production is not limited to the above-mentioned example. For example, it may be possible to change the setting of the frequency at which a specific performance is performed in a variable performance.

Further, in this embodiment, the production lever 161L is not used during the execution of the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. The production lever 161L may be used during execution of a jackpot game. Even in this case, the production lever 161L is not used except during the execution of the variable production and the execution of the jackpot game. On the other hand, as described above, the performance button 161B is used even when the variable performance is not being executed or the jackpot game is being executed.

(Variation example of pseudo-continuous performance)
Next, a modification of the pseudo-continuous performance will be explained.
In this embodiment, it has been explained that a pseudo-continuous performance is performed in a variable performance. Here, the pseudo-continuous performance is not limited to the above example.
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a modification of the pseudo-continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 53(1), an upper movable accessory 115A that performs various effects by operating on the game board 110 is provided above the image display section 114. The upper movable accessory 115A is a frame-shaped member and has the shape of the upper half of a star. Further, below the image display section 114, a lower movable accessory 115B that performs various effects by operating on the game board 110 is provided. The lower movable accessory 115B is a frame-shaped member and has the shape of the lower half of a star. Further, after the decorative pattern 61 starts to fluctuate, the number "6" which is the left decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped, and the number "4" which is the right decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 53(2), the upper movable accessory 115A moves downward and the lower movable accessory 115B moves upward, and the upper movable accessory 115A and the upper movable accessory 115A move in front of the image display section 114. It comes into contact with the lower movable accessory 115B. The upper movable accessory 115A and the lower movable accessory 115B that are in contact with each other form a star shape. Moreover, at this time, an icon written as "NEXT" is displayed in a region of the image display section 114 surrounded by the upper movable accessory 115A and the lower movable accessory 115B.

Then, as shown in FIG. 53(3), the variation of the decorative pattern 61 is started again. Also, at this time, a pseudo continuous number image 533 is displayed. In the illustrated example, since this is the second variable display, the pseudo continuous number image 533 includes "x2" images.
In this way, a pseudo-continuous performance may be performed in which a movable member that can be operated and a performance image are combined.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing another modification (modification 2) of the pseudo-continuous performance.
As shown in FIG. 54(1), the highly decorative decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped in the image display section 114 by the production control section 300 as the variation of the previous special symbol is finished. shall be. Also, at this time, two left decorative patterns 61 indicating consecutive numbers (in the illustrated example, the numbers "4" and "5") are displayed. Also, at this time, two medium decorative patterns 61 indicating consecutive numbers (in the illustrated example, the numbers "5" and "6") are displayed. Also, at this time, two right decorative patterns 61 indicating consecutive numbers (in the illustrated example, the numbers "6" and "7") are displayed. That is, a plurality of sets of three decorative patterns 61 are displayed. Moreover, the three decorative patterns 61 of each group are displayed in a horizontal straight line.

Then, as shown in FIG. 54(2), the decorative pattern 61 starts to change with the start of the variable display of the next special pattern.
Next, as shown in FIG. 54(3), the numbers "5" and "6", which are the left decorative patterns 61, are temporarily stopped. Further, the numbers "4" and "5", which are the right decorative patterns 61, are temporarily stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54(4), the numbers "5" and "6", which are the middle decoration patterns 61, are temporarily stopped. At this time, the three decorative patterns 61 of each set are displayed offset from a horizontal straight line. More specifically, in each set, the right decorative pattern 61 is displayed shifted lower than the left decorative pattern 61 and the middle decorative pattern 61. Also, at this time, a line image 543 crossing a set of three decorative patterns 61 is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 54(5), the variation of the decorative pattern 61 is started again. Also, at this time, a pseudo continuous number image 533 is displayed. In the illustrated example, since this is the second variable display, the pseudo continuous number image 533 includes "x2" images.
In this way, a pseudo-continuous presentation may be performed in which the decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped at a position different from that in the case where the pseudo-continuous presentation is not performed.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing another modification (modification 3) of the pseudo-continuous performance.
As shown in FIG. 55(1), the decorative pattern 61 starts to change. Moreover, at this time, a role-playing effect is performed to incite whether or not the role-playing effect will be performed. In the accessory promotion performance, the movable accessory 115 operates above the image display section 114.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55(2), a role model is performed.
Then, as shown in FIG. 55(3), the variation of the decorative pattern 61 is started again. Also, at this time, a pseudo continuous number image 533 is displayed. In the illustrated example, since this is the second variable display, the pseudo continuous number image 533 includes "x2" images. Note that if the accessory effect (see FIG. 55(2)) is not performed after the accessory effect (see FIG. 55(1)) is performed, the decorative pattern 61 is not changed again.
In this way, a pseudo-continuous performance using a character performance may be performed.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing another modification example (modification example 4) of the pseudo continuous effect.
As shown in FIG. 56(1), the decorative pattern 61 starts to change.
Next, as shown in FIG. 56(2), the number "6" which is the left decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped, and the number "6" which is the right decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped.
Next, as shown in FIG. 56(3), the number "5" which is the middle decoration pattern 61 is temporarily stopped.

Then, as shown in FIG. 56(4), the variation of the decorative pattern 61 is started again.
In this way, a pseudo-continuous effect may be performed without displaying the icon labeled "NEXT" (see FIG. 45-1 (6)) or displaying the pseudo-continuous number image 533.

In addition, in the pseudo-continuous performance according to any of the above-mentioned performance modes, the decorative pattern 61 may change again when none of the three decorative patterns 61 are temporarily stopped. Further, when one of the three decorative patterns 61 is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern 61 may change again, or two of the three decorative patterns 61 are temporarily stopped. The decorative pattern 61 may change again while it is stopped. Furthermore, the decorative pattern 61 may change again when all three decorative patterns 61 are temporarily stopped.

In addition, in the pseudo-continuous performance according to any of the above-mentioned presentation modes, the pseudo-continuous number image 533 may be displayed after the decorative pattern 61 changes again, or the pseudo-continuous number image 533 may not be displayed.
In addition, in the pseudo-continuous production using any of the above-mentioned production modes, before the decorative pattern 61 starts changing again, a pseudo-continuous display such as an icon labeled "NEXT" (see FIG. 45-1 (6)) is displayed. A performance image indicating that a continuous performance is performed may or may not be displayed.
Furthermore, the pseudo-continuous performance is not limited to the above example. In other words, the pseudo-continuous effect may be any effect as long as the decorative pattern 61 starts changing and then changes again, and any effect is performed after the decorative pattern 61 starts changing until it changes again. Good too.

In addition, in the variable production example of this embodiment, the number of movable accessories 115 that move is one in both cases where the production button 161B is operated and the production lever 161L is operated. It is not limited to this. The number of movable accessories 115 that move may be two or more in both cases where the effect button 161B is operated and when the effect lever 161L is operated. Further, the number of moving movable accessories 115 may be greater when the effect lever 161L is operated than when the effect button 161B is operated. In this case, the movable accessory 115 that moves when the production button 161B is operated may not move when the production lever 161L is operated.

Further, the seals provided on the pachinko gaming machine 100 are not limited to the caution sticker 41 (see FIG. 34(A)) and the accessory caution sticker 43 (see FIG. 38(B)). The pachinko gaming machine 100 may be provided with a spec sticker 73 (see FIG. 65) and a voltage sticker 87 (see FIG. 75), which will be described later in the second embodiment.
Furthermore, the attention calling means provided in the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not limited to the example described above. The attention-calling means may be, for example, a notice-calling image 93 (see FIG. 85), which will be described later in the second embodiment.

<Embodiment 2>
FIG. 57 is an overall view of the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment.
First, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment is the same as the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment.
Here, in explaining the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment, supplementary explanations will be given regarding various structures. In the following description, the front surface of the pachinko game machine 100 will be referred to as the front surface, and the rear surface of the pachinko game machine 100 will be referred to as the back surface.

The game board 110 of the second embodiment has a transparent game board 118 in which game nails are embedded and forms a game area 111. The transparent game board 118 is made of a transparent resin material and is capable of transmitting visible light. The transparent game board 118 of Embodiment 2 allows the structural parts arranged on the rear side of the transparent game board 118, such as the image display section 114 and the movable accessory 115, to be seen through the transparent game board 118. It has become.
Note that the game area 111 in the second embodiment is an area on the surface of the game board 110 through which a game ball can pass. The game balls in this case do not include game balls that have passed through the ejection port 117 after being fired from the firing device 151p (see FIG. 61, which will be described later), and game balls that have entered various winning holes.

Further, a transparent cell 118C (see FIG. 77 described later) is pasted on the surface of the transparent game board 118 of this embodiment. The transparent cell 118C is formed in the shape of a transparent sheet, and the transparent game board 118 is decorated with, for example, a decoration 118d (see FIG. 77 described later) that is a motif (that is, a theme) of the pachinko game machine 100 of this embodiment.

The rail member 112 includes an inner rail member 112a provided on the inside, and an outer rail member 112b provided on the outer side of the inner rail member 112a. Further, on the right side and upper side of the outer rail member 112b, a return rubber 112G, which is a buffer member for receiving a game ball hit to the right, is arranged.

In the pachinko game machine 100 of the second embodiment, a predetermined motif is set.
The model name of the pachinko game machine 100 of the second embodiment is "CR Pachinko Star 777 ~Dream Dome Performance~ V3B". The motif of the pachinko game machine 100 of this embodiment is a star. Then, as shown in FIG. 57, the pachinko game machine 100 displays "CR Pachinko Star 777 ~Dream Dome Performance~", which is part of the machine name, on the image display section 114.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a movable accessory 115 decorated with a character string "Star 777" which is part of the machine name.
The movable accessory 115 is arranged on the front side of the image display section 114 and on the rear side of the transparent game board 118 in the front-rear direction. That is, the movable accessory 115 is arranged between the image display section 114 and the transparent game board 118 in the front-rear direction.

The movable accessory 115 in the second embodiment is movable in the vertical direction of the pachinko game machine 100. In the second embodiment, the movable accessory 115 is movable between a standby position located at the upper side of the game board 110 and an appearance position located at the center of the game board 110.
Furthermore, the movable accessory 115 has an accessory light emitting section 115L. The accessory light emitting unit 115L can emit red light, green light, and blue light individually or in combination, so that it can emit light in any one of a plurality of colors. It has become.

Furthermore, the game slot 150 of the pachinko game machine 100 of the second embodiment will be explained in detail.
FIG. 58 is a side view of the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 58(A), the pachinko gaming machine 100 of Embodiment 2 has an upper protrusion 150P that is provided above the game frame 150 and protrudes toward the front side, which is the player side.
As shown in FIG. 58(B), the upper accessory 5 of the second embodiment is provided on the upper protrusion 150P. The upper accessory 5 has two states: a non-protruding state in which it is housed inside the upper protruding part 150P as shown in FIG. 58(A), and a protruding state in which it protrudes from the upper protruding part 150P as shown in FIG. 58(B). It is possible to take any of the states in between.

Note that the upper accessory 5 has, for example, a shape or decoration that serves as a motif of the pachinko game machine 100. Further, the upper accessory 5 is provided with a light emitting lamp (not shown). The light emitting lamp of the upper accessory 5 emits light together with other light emitting lamps of the game board 110 and the game frame 150, thereby making it possible to perform a predetermined performance.
In addition, the game frame 150 is provided with an upper protruding portion 150P, and when the upper accessory 5 is in the protruding state, it is operated by the player to move the upper accessory 5 to the non-protruding state. It has a storage button (not shown). Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 100 of the first embodiment, the upper accessory 5 is the object to be operated by the player, and the storage button is the receiving means for receiving the operation.

FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram of the game slot 150 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 59, the game frame 150 includes an inner frame 150U that holds the game board 110, a glass door frame 150G that holds the glass plate 119 that is a transparent member that separates the game board 110 from the player, and an inner frame. 150U and an outer frame 150S that holds the glass door frame 150G.

The outer frame 150S is a frame body that is the outermost outer part of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The inner frame 150U is rotatably connected to the outer frame 150S. Further, the glass door frame 150G is rotatably connected to the inner frame 150U.

In addition, in the following explanation, the state in which the glass door frame 150G and the inner frame 150U are combined is referred to as the state in which the glass door frame 150G is closed, and the state in which the glass door frame 150G and the inner frame 150U are separated is referred to as a state in which the glass door frame 150G and the inner frame 150U are separated. This is called a state in which the glass door frame 150G is open. Further, the state in which the inner frame 150U and the outer frame 150S are combined is called the state in which the inner frame 150U is closed, and the state in which the inner frame 150U and the outer frame 150S are separated is called the state in which the inner frame 150U is open. call.

Next, the first starting port 121 provided in the game board 110 of the second embodiment will be explained in detail.
FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram of the first starting port unit 20 in which the first starting port 121 of the second embodiment is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 60(A) and 60(B), the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment has a first starting port unit 20 including a first starting port 121. The first starting port unit 20 includes a first starting port 121, a first starting port switch 211, a decorative main body portion 22, a decorative seal 23 that decorates the decorative main body portion 22, and a light emitting portion 24 that emits light. are doing.

The decoration main body portion 22 is made of a transparent material that transmits visible light. In the second embodiment, the decoration body section 22 allows the light of the light emitting section 24 to pass through, and allows the player to see the light of the light emission section 24 via the decoration body section 22. Furthermore, the decorative main body portion 22 of the second embodiment has an attached portion R22 in a portion where the decorative sticker 23 is attached. The pasted portion R22 is more depressed than other areas. Furthermore, the pasted part R22 of the second embodiment has a positioning part r22 that positions the pasting position of the decorative sticker 23. The positioning portion r22 protrudes from the pasted portion R22. Further, the positioning portion r22 has a shape corresponding to a slit portion 23K (described later) provided in the decorative seal 23.

The decorative seal 23 has a circular shape as a whole. The decorative seal 23 is provided near the light emitting section 24. Note that the decorative sticker 23 is the one closest to the light emitting section 24 among the various decorative stickers provided on the pachinko game machine 100. The decorative sticker 23 is decorated on one side, and has an adhesive on the opposite side for attachment to an object. Further, the decorative seal 23 of the second embodiment has a star pattern as a decoration corresponding to the motif of the pachinko game machine 100. The decorative seal 23 is transparent and transmits visible light. In the second embodiment, the decorative seal 23 allows the light from the light emitting section 24 to pass through, and allows the player to see the light from the light emitting section 24 through the decorative seal 23.
Furthermore, the decorative seal 23 has a slit portion 23K cut from the end toward the center. The slit portion 23K of the decorative sticker 23 is formed such that the positioning portion r22 fits into the slit portion 23K when the decorative sticker 23 is pasted on the affixed portion R22.

The light emitting unit 24 includes an LED 241 and a substrate 242 on which the LED 241 is mounted. The LED 241 includes a red element that emits red light, a green element that emits green light, and a blue element that emits blue light. The LED 241 can emit red light, green light, and blue light individually or in combination, so that it can emit light in any one of multiple colors. There is. For example, the LED 241 emits light in various colors such as white, blue, green, red, and purple. Further, the substrate 242 is electrically connected to the lamp control section 320 (see FIG. 4). Then, the board 242 causes the LED 241 to emit light based on the current received from the lamp control section 320.
As shown in FIG. 60(B), the light emitting section 24 is arranged on the rear side of the decorative seal 23 in the front-rear direction. The light emitting unit 24 emits light toward the player from the game board 110 side. Thereby, the light emitting section 24 illuminates the decorative sticker 23 provided on the front side and the decorative main body section 22 from the rear side in the front-rear direction.
Further, in the second embodiment, the light emitting section 24 is provided near the first starting port 121. Note that the light emitting section 24 is the light emitting section closest to the first starting port 121 among the various light emitting sections provided in the pachinko gaming machine 100.

As shown in FIG. 60(C), in the first starting port unit 20 of this embodiment, when the light emitting part 24 emits light, the decorative main body part 22 and the decorative seal 23 are emitted by the player. It is visible.

Although the first starting port unit 20 of this embodiment expresses the motif of the pachinko game machine 100 by the decorative seal 23, it is not limited to this aspect. For example, the shape of the first starting port unit 20 itself may express the motif of the pachinko game machine 100. When the motif of the pachinko game machine 100 is a star as in the second embodiment, the decoration main body 22 itself may be star-shaped. Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the decorative sticker 23 is used to decorate the decorative main body part 22, but the decorative main body part 22 may be decorated by printing directly on the decorative main body part 22. It's okay.

Next, seals used in this embodiment will be explained.
Here, in the description of the present embodiment, a sticker is a paper or plastic film on which information such as letters or figures is provided on one side and an adhesive substance such as glue is provided on the other side. . Further, the sticker is attached to the object using glue provided on the other side. By pasting the sticker on the surface of the object, the sticker attaches information related to the object, such as the name, contents, number, etc., or adds designs such as decorations to the object. Note that a sticker may also be called a label or a sheet.
Note that in this embodiment, characters include kanji, hiragana, katakana, alphanumeric characters, and punctuation marks.

As shown in FIG. 57, the pachinko game machine 100 has a contact caution sticker 71 and an operation caution sticker 72 provided on the game frame 150, respectively. Further, the pachinko game machine 100 has a spec sticker 73, a display sticker 74, a light warning sticker 75, a fraud prevention warning sticker 76, a board number sticker 77, and a certificate stamp sticker 78 provided on the game board 110, respectively.

Here, the contact caution sticker 71 and the operation caution sticker 72 are provided on the surface of the game frame 150. Further, a spec sticker 73, a display sticker 74, a light warning sticker 75, a fraud prevention warning sticker 76, a board number sticker 77, and a certificate stamp sticker 78 are provided on the surface of the game board 110.
The contact caution sticker 71, the operation caution sticker 72, the spec sticker 73, the display sticker 74, the light warning sticker 75, the fraud prevention sticker 76, the board number sticker 77, and the certificate stamp sticker 78 indicate that the pachinko gaming machine 100 When it is installed on the island of the hall and the glass door frame 150G is closed, all or at least a part of it is visible to players and managers.
In the second embodiment, the administrator may be, for example, a clerk at the hall where the pachinko game machine 100 is installed, or an employee of a company that manufactures or sells the pachinko game machine 100.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the pachinko gaming machine 100 with the glass door frame 150G open.
As shown in FIG. 61, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, the following stickers are mainly visible to the administrator when the glass door frame 150G is open.
As shown in FIG. 61, the pachinko game machine 100 has a frame caution sticker 79 provided on the game frame 150. Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 100 has a board caution sticker 80 provided on the game board 110.

Here, the frame caution sticker 79 is provided on the surface of the game frame 150. Further, the board caution sticker 80 is provided on the surface of the game board 110.
The frame caution sticker 79 and the board caution sticker 80 are invisible or difficult to see for the administrator and players when the glass door frame 150G is closed (see FIG. 57).

FIG. 62 is a rear view of the pachinko game machine 100 when the pachinko game machine 100 is viewed from the rear side.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 62, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a slot number sticker 81, a handling caution sticker 82, and a voltage sticker 87 provided on the gaming slot 150, respectively. Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 100 has a sub ROM seal 83, a main board management seal 84, a main board seal 85, and a main ROM seal 86, which are provided on the game board 110, respectively.

Here, the frame number sticker 81, handling caution sticker 82, and voltage sticker 87 are provided on the back surface of the game frame 150. Further, a sub ROM seal 83, a main board management seal 84, a main board seal 85, and a main ROM seal 86 are provided on the back surface of the game board 110.
As shown in FIG. 57, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is installed on the island of the hall and the inner frame 150U is closed, the frame number sticker 81, the handling caution sticker 82, the sub ROM sticker 83, the main The board management seal 84, the main board seal 85, the main ROM seal 86, and the voltage seal 87 are invisible or difficult to see for the administrator and the players.

Each of the above-mentioned seals will be specifically explained below.

(Contact caution sticker 71)
FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram of the contact warning sticker 71 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 63(A), the contact warning sticker 71 is pasted on the upper side of the game frame 150 on the surface of the game frame 150, and calls attention to the player's contact with the game frame 150. In other words, the contact warning sticker 71 mainly displays information aimed at the player.

The game frame 150 of the second embodiment includes an upper protrusion 150P on the upper side of the game frame 150. Furthermore, the game frame 150 of the second embodiment has an upper accessory 5 on its upper protrusion 150P. The contact warning sticker 71 is affixed to the upper protrusion 150P to prevent the player's head, for example, from coming into contact with the game frame 150, or to prevent the player from coming into contact with the protruding upper accessory 5. to alert people to prevent such things from happening.

In this way, the contact caution sticker 71 of the second embodiment is directly attached to the upper protrusion 150P, which is the object to be alerted to, to alert the user to the upper protrusion 150P. Further, the contact warning sticker 71 of the second embodiment is provided near the upper accessory 5 that is the object of the warning, and calls attention to the upper accessory 5. Note that the contact warning sticker 71 of the second embodiment has the shortest straight line distance from the upper accessory 5, which is the object of the warning, compared to other stickers.

As shown in FIG. 63(B), the contact caution sticker 71 of the second embodiment has a rectangular shape. Furthermore, the shape of one of the four corners of the contact warning sticker 71 is different from the shape of the other corners, and is a cutout. That is, the contact warning sticker 71 has a shape that is not point symmetrical. Then, the contact caution sticker 71 is pasted on the first pasted portion R1 provided on the game board 110.

The first attached portion R1 of this embodiment has a red color. Further, the first affixed portion R1 has a positioning portion r1 for positioning the contact warning sticker 71. The positioning part r1 is a recessed part recessed from the surroundings, and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r1 corresponds to the contact caution sticker 71. Furthermore, the shape of the positioning portion r1 is different from the positioning portions of the affixed portions to which other stickers are affixed.
Therefore, when an operator attaches the contact caution sticker 71 to the game frame 150, he or she can do so without making a mistake in the location where the contact caution sticker 71 is pasted.

Furthermore, as described above, the shape of the contact warning sticker 71 corresponds to the positioning part r1 of the first attached part R1, and is not point symmetrical. Therefore, when an operator attaches the contact caution sticker 71 to the positioning portion r1, he or she can do so without making a mistake in the direction in which the contact caution sticker 71 is attached.

The contact warning sticker 71 includes a text portion 711 that calls attention to the game frame 150 to the player, a caution illustration 712 that is an illustration that calls for attention, and a general warning mark portion 713 that indicates that it is a warning. It has a frame line 714 surrounding a text portion 711, a caution illustration 712, and a general warning mark portion 713. Furthermore, the contact caution sticker 71 has a base portion 715 that is a portion other than a text portion 711, a caution illustration 712, a general warning mark portion 713, and a frame line 714.

The text part 711 prevents the player from colliding with the upper protruding part 150P of the game frame 150, or prevents the upper accessory 5 from protruding, such as "Please be careful about the upper part of the frame. Be careful not to protrude." The content is such that the player is prevented from coming into contact with the upper accessory 5 when the situation occurs.
Note that in this embodiment, the characters used on the seal are Gothic. The seal of this embodiment uses a Gothic font with relatively thick lines so that it is easy for players and managers to see and notice, in order to call attention to the players and managers.

The caution illustration 712 simply expresses the game frame 150 (upper protrusion 150P) and the upper accessory 5. The caution illustration 712 uses an illustration instead of text information to call attention to the player's contact with the game frame 150 or the upper accessory 5.

The general warning mark section 713 uses an illustration to express that the contact caution sticker 71 itself is intended to warn the player. Note that the basic configuration of the general warning mark section 713 is the same as that of the general warning mark section 414 of the first embodiment.

The frame line 714 is provided along the outer periphery of the contact warning sticker 71. This makes the contact caution sticker 71 stand out by showing the boundary between the contact caution sticker 71 and the first affixed portion R1, for example.

The base portion 715 makes the text portion 711, the caution illustration 712, and the general warning mark portion 713 stand out so that they can be easily seen by the player. For example, the base portion 715 is black, the text portion 711 is white, the caution illustration 712 is white and yellow, the general warning mark portion 713 is yellow, and the frame line 714 is white. In this way, the contact caution sticker 71 has a strong contrast in brightness between the base portion 715 and the text portion 711 other than the base portion 715, the caution illustration 712, the general warning mark portion 713, and the frame line 714. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the color of the base portion 715 (black in this example) is different from the color of the first pasted portion R1 (red in this example). Thereby, the contact caution sticker 71 itself is made to stand out on the game frame 150.

(Operation caution sticker 72)
FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram of the operation caution sticker 72 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 64(A), the operation caution sticker 72 is attached to the lower side of the game frame 150 on the surface of the game frame 150, and is related to the player's operation on the production button 161 provided on the game frame 150. Call for attention. In other words, the operation caution sticker 72 mainly displays information aimed at the player.

The game frame 150 of this embodiment includes a production lever 161L near the upper tray 153. The operation caution sticker 72 is provided near the production lever 161L. The operation caution sticker 72 alerts the player to the movement of the production lever 161L and caution against getting his or her hand caught in the production lever 161L.

Then, as shown in FIG. 64(A), the operation caution sticker 72 of this embodiment is pasted on the second pasted portion R2 provided in the game frame 150.

As shown in FIG. 64(B), the operation caution sticker 72 includes a text portion 721 that alerts the player to the game frame 150, a caution illustration 722 that urges caution, and a general warning that indicates that the warning is a caution. It has a mark part 723, a frame line 724 surrounding the text part 721, the caution illustration 722, and the general warning mark part 723. Further, the operation caution sticker 72 has a base portion 725 that is a portion other than a text portion 721, a caution illustration 722, a general warning mark portion 723, and a frame line 724.

For example, the text section 721 displays the text "Be careful of getting your hand caught when operating the production lever", and the production operation device 161 changes from the non-protruding state (see FIG. 32(A)) to the protruding state (see FIG. 32(B)). ), the player is cautioned against unintentionally touching the production lever 161L. In addition, the text section 721 displays the text "Beware of protruding production lever" when the production operating device 161 changes from the non-protruding state (see FIG. 32(A)) to the protruding state (see FIG. 32(B)). The player is cautioned against unintentionally touching the production lever 161L. Furthermore, the text section 721 displays the text "Beware of protruding accessories at the top of the frame" to prevent the player from unintentionally touching the upper accessory 5 when the upper accessory 5 moves upward. Call for attention.

The basic configuration of the operation caution sticker 72 is the same as the caution sticker 41 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 34, etc.). In the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

(Spec sticker 73)
FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram of the spec sticker 73 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 65(A), the spec sticker 73 is attached to the top and right side of the game board 110 on the surface of the game board 110, and indicates the game specifications of the pachinko game machine 100. In other words, the spec sticker 73 mainly displays information aimed at the player.

The spec sticker 73 of this embodiment is provided outside the gaming area 111. Further, the spec sticker 73 is provided near the rail member 112. Here, the game ball moves along the rail member 112 when fired by the firing device 151p (see FIG. 61). Therefore, by placing the spec sticker 73 near the rail member 112, when the player shoots a game ball, the player's line of sight is directed to the spec sticker 73 placed near the rail member 112. That's what I do.

Further, the spec sticker 73 of this embodiment is provided adjacent to the return rubber 112G. In the pachinko game machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the player hits a jackpot, the player hits the game ball into the right area of the game area 111, thereby giving the player an advantage. In this right-handed state, the game ball is fired so as to collide with the return rubber 112G. As mentioned above, right-handed hitting is performed, for example, when winning a jackpot, and the player is concerned about the probability of winning the jackpot or the probability that the gaming state after playing the jackpot will be, for example, a high-probability time-saving gaming state. It's time to do it. Therefore, in this embodiment, a spec sticker 73 is provided near the return rubber 112G to make it easier for the player to confirm the game specifications.

Note that the spec sticker 73 is not limited to being provided near the return rubber 112G as in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment. For example, the spec sticker 73 may be provided on the upstream side of the rail member 112, which is the firing device 151p side. Further, the spec sticker 73 may be configured integrally with a display sticker 74, which will be described later. That is, the spec sticker 73 may be provided near the display 130.

As shown in FIG. 65(B), the spec sticker 73 of this embodiment has a trapezoidal outline. That is, the spec sticker 73 has a shape that is not point symmetrical. The spec sticker 73 is then affixed to a third affixed portion R3 provided on the game board 110.

The third attached portion R3 of this embodiment is transparent. The third affixed portion R3 has a positioning portion r3 for positioning the spec sticker 73. The positioning part r3 is a recessed part recessed from the surroundings, and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r3 corresponds to the spec sticker 73.
Therefore, when an operator attaches the spec sticker 73 to the game board 110, he or she can do so without making a mistake in the location or direction of attaching the spec sticker 73.

The spec sticker 73 is a sticker that includes information indicating the game specifications of the pachinko game machine 100. The spec sticker 73 includes jackpot probability information 731, prize ball number information 732, and variable entry rate information 733 as an example of game specifications. Further, the spec sticker 73 has manufacturer information 734, a model name 735, and a version display 736. Further, the spec sticker 73 includes jackpot probability information 731, prize ball number information 732, variable entry rate information 733, manufacturer information 734, model name 735, and a base portion 737 other than version display 736.

The jackpot probability information 731 includes characters (numbers) indicating the probability of winning the jackpot lottery in a low probability state.
The prize ball number information 732 includes characters (numbers) indicating the number of prize balls when game balls win in the first starting hole 121, the second starting hole 122, the big winning hole 125, and the normal winning hole 126, respectively.
The variable probability entry rate information 733 includes characters (numbers) indicating the probability that a type of jackpot that will be in a high probability gaming state after the jackpot game is selected is selected.
The manufacturer information 734 includes characters indicating the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko game machine 100.
The model name 735 indicates the official model name of the pachinko game machine 100 in characters. In this embodiment, the model name 735 displays "CR Pachinko Star 777 ~Dream Dome Performance~ V3B".

The version display 736 is information indicating which version is the configuration of the game area 111 provided on the surface of the game board 110 of the pachinko game machine 100 (hereinafter referred to as board configuration) among a plurality of versions. Version information in this embodiment is displayed in a predetermined color determined for each of a plurality of versions. The version display 736 of this embodiment is drawn, for example, by an orange circle.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a board configuration of game nails, a first starting opening 121, a second starting opening 122, a big winning opening 125, and a normal winning opening 126 in the gaming area 111 provided on the surface of the gaming board 110, The overall gameplay of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is determined by adjusting the winning probability of the jackpot lottery and game specifications such as the number of prize balls. For example, when developing the pachinko game machine 100, a plurality of variations of combinations of board configurations and game specifications are prepared, and one of the versions is finally determined. Therefore, the version of the board configuration and the version of the game specifications must correspond. Therefore, in this embodiment, a version display 736 is provided on the spec sticker 73 so that the version of the game board 110 can be confirmed at least on the surface of the game board 110.

The base portion 737 makes jackpot probability information 731, prize ball number information 732, variable entry rate information 733, manufacturer information 734, model name 735, and version display 736 stand out so that the player can easily see them. For example, in the spec sticker 73 of this embodiment, the color of the base portion 737 is black, and the jackpot probability information 731, prize ball number information 732, variable entry rate information 733, manufacturer information 734, and model name 735 are displayed in white. , the version display 736 is displayed in orange. In this way, the spec sticker 73 has a base part 737, jackpot probability information 731 other than the base part 737, prize ball number information 732, variable entry rate information 733, manufacturer information 734, model name 735, and version display 736. The contrast in brightness is strengthened.

In addition, in this embodiment, the color of the base part 737 is made different from the color of the 3rd pasted part R3. The presence of the spec sticker 73 is made to stand out. However, if it is based on the viewpoint that it does not need to be as conspicuous as the warning sticker, for example, the color of the base portion 737 of the spec sticker 73 may be the same color as that of the third attached portion R3.

(Display sticker 74)
FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram of the indicator seal 74 of the second embodiment.
The display sticker 74 of this embodiment is attached to the left side and lower side of the game board 110 on the surface of the game board 110 (see FIG. 57), and displays explanations regarding the types of a plurality of LEDs used as the display 130. do. In other words, the display sticker 74 mainly displays information directed to the player.

The game board 110 of the second embodiment includes a display 130 on the outside of the rail member 112 (see FIG. 57). The indicator seal 74 is then provided to the indicator 130.
As shown in FIG. 66, the display sticker 74 has a generally rectangular shape. Furthermore, the shape of one of the four corners of the display sticker 74 is different from the shape of the other corners, and is a cutout. That is, the indicator seal 74 does not have a point-symmetrical shape. Then, the indicator sticker 74 is attached to the fourth attached portion R4 provided at the position of the indicator 130.

The fourth attached portion R4 of this embodiment has a black color. Further, the fourth affixed portion R4 has a positioning portion r4 that positions the display sticker 74. The positioning part r4 is a recessed part recessed from the surroundings, and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r4 corresponds to the display sticker 74. Furthermore, the shape of the positioning portion r4 is different from the positioning portions of the affixed portions to which other stickers are affixed.
Therefore, when an operator attaches the display sticker 74 to the game board 110, he or she can do so without making a mistake in the location and direction of attachment of the display sticker 74.

The display device seal 74 is attached to each display device that constitutes the display device 130 (first special symbol reservation display 218, second special symbol reservation display 219, normal symbol reservation display 220, first special symbol display 221, 2 special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, status display 224, and round number display 225). For example, the display sticker 74 has a transparent window section 741 that transmits light from the LED of the display, a window frame line 742 that surrounds the window section, and an explanation section 743 that explains the lighting mode of the LED. . Furthermore, the display sticker 74 has a base portion 744 that is a portion other than the transparent window portion 741, the window frame line 742, and the explanation portion 743.

The transparent window section 741 is provided for each of the plurality of LEDs that constitute various types of indicators. The transparent window section 741 is configured to be colorless and transparent, and allows the emitted light of the LED to pass therethrough. In the display device seal 74 of this embodiment, the adhesive as a seal is not applied to the transparent window portion 741.
The window frame line 742 indicates each display (first special symbol reservation display 218, second special symbol reservation display 219, normal symbol reservation display 220, first special symbol display 221, second special symbol display 222) , normal symbol display 223, status display 224, and round number display 225), each of which is configured in a different color. For example, the window frame line 742 is red when it corresponds to the first special symbol display 221, and blue when it corresponds to the second special symbol display 222.

In this embodiment, the explanation section 743 specifically explains the relationship between the lighting mode of the round number display 225 and the number of operating rounds of the jackpot game. For example, the explanation section 743 specifically displays the lighting mode of the LED for each number of activation rounds (2R, 4R, 8R, and 15R).
The base portion 744 makes the window frame line 742 stand out so that the window frame line 742 can be easily seen by the player. For example, in the display sticker 74 of this embodiment, the color of the base portion 744 is black.

(Light warning sticker 75)
FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram of the optical warning sticker 75, fraud prevention warning sticker 76, and board number sticker 77 of the second embodiment.
The light warning sticker 75 is attached to the left side and lower side of the game board 110 on the surface of the game board 110 (see FIG. 57), and is attached to the light emitting lamp provided on the game frame 150 and the light emitting lamp provided on the game board 110. To alert players to light. In other words, the optical warning sticker 75 mainly displays information aimed at the player.

The pachinko game machine 100 of the second embodiment includes the light emitting section 24 of the first starting port unit 20 (see FIG. 60) and the accessory light emitting section 115L of the movable accessory 115 (see FIG. 57) on the game board 110. Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment has a frame lamp 157 (see FIG. 57) in the game frame 150. In addition, in the following description, the light emitting part 24, the accessory light emitting part 115L, and the frame lamp 157 may be collectively called a "light emitting lamp."
The light warning sticker 75 is attached to the game board 110 to call attention to the light from the light emitting lamps provided on the game board 110 and the game frame 150. In particular, the optical warning sticker 75 of this embodiment is arranged between the light emitting section 24, the accessory light emitting section 115L, and the frame lamp 157 in the direction of the board surface of the game board 110. In this way, the optical attention-calling sticker 75 is arranged between the plurality of light-emitting lamps in the direction of the board surface of the game board 110, thereby making it easier for the player to pay attention to the optical attention-calling sticker 75.

Further, as shown in FIG. 67(A), the optical caution sticker 75 of this embodiment is attached to the rear side of the transparent game board 118 of the game board 110, and is attached to the inner rail member 112a and the outer rail member 112b (see FIG. 57). (see). The game ball fired by the player first moves along the rail member 112. Therefore, the rail member 112 is an area that is easy for players to pay attention to. Therefore, in this embodiment, the optical attention-calling sticker 75 is arranged on the rail member 112 to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the optical attention-calling sticker 75.

As shown in FIG. 67(B), the optical warning sticker 75 has a diamond-shaped outline. Furthermore, the shape of one of the four corners of the optical warning sticker 75 is different from the shape of the other corners, and is a cutout. That is, the optical warning sticker 75 has a shape that is not point symmetrical. Then, the optical warning sticker 75 is pasted on the fifth pasted portion R5 provided on the game board 110.

The fifth attached portion R5 of the present embodiment is black in color and is made of a material that hardly transmits light. The pachinko game machine 100 of this embodiment is capable of allowing light from a light-emitting lamp placed, for example, on the rear side of the transparent game board 118 to be shown through the transparent game board 118. Therefore, in order to prevent the optical warning sticker 75 that calls attention from becoming difficult to see due to the light from the light emitting lamp, the fifth affixed portion R5 is designed to be difficult for light to pass through.

Further, the fifth affixed portion R5 has a positioning portion r5 for positioning the optical caution sticker 75. The positioning part r5 is a recessed part recessed from the surroundings, and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r5 corresponds to the optical caution sticker 75. Furthermore, the shape of the positioning portion r5 is different from the positioning portions of the affixed portions to which other stickers are affixed.
Therefore, when an operator attaches the optical caution sticker 75 to the game board 110, he or she can do so without making a mistake in the location or direction of attachment of the optical caution sticker 75.

The light warning sticker 75 includes a text portion 751 that calls attention to light to the player, a general warning mark portion 752 that indicates a warning, and a frame line surrounding the text portion 751 and the general warning mark portion 752. 753. Furthermore, the optical warning sticker 75 has a base portion 754 that is a portion other than the text portion 751, the general warning mark portion 752, and the frame line 753.

The text 751 indicates that the player should not stare at the light from the light emitting lamps provided on the game board 110 or the light emitting lamps provided on the game frame 150 for a long time, such as "Please do not stare at the same light for a long time." The content is a warning not to continue. That is, the text portion 751 mainly indicates information directed to the player.

The general warning mark section 752 is similar to the general warning mark section 414 of the first embodiment.
Further, the frame line 753 is provided along the outer periphery of the optical caution sticker 75. This makes the optical attention-calling sticker 75 stand out by showing, for example, the boundary between the optical attention-calling sticker 75 and the fifth attached portion R5.

The base portion 754 makes the character portion 751 and the general warning mark portion 752 stand out so that they can be easily seen by the player. For example, in the optical warning sticker 75 of this embodiment, the color of the base portion 754 is white, the text portion 751 is displayed in black, the general warning mark portion 752 is displayed in yellow and black, and the frame line 753 is displayed in black. it's shown. In this manner, the optical caution sticker 75 has a strong brightness contrast between the base portion 754 and the text portion 751, the general warning mark portion 752, and the frame line 753 other than the base portion 754. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the color of the base portion 754 is made different from the color of the fifth attached portion R5 and the surrounding color of the fifth attached portion R5. Thereby, the optical warning sticker 75 is made to stand out on the game board 110.

The optical warning sticker 75 configured as described above is arranged so as to have the following relationship with respect to the distance from the player who is sitting on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and playing the game. As described above, the light warning sticker 75 calls attention to the light from the light emitting section 24, for example. Here, for example, if the distances between the light warning sticker 75 and the light emitting section 24 are exactly the same with respect to the player, it will be difficult for the player to recognize the priority order between the light emitting section 24 and the light warning sticker 75. Become. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment, the distance between the optical warning sticker 75 and the light emitting section 24 is determined with respect to the glass plate 119. Specifically, in the second embodiment, the distance between the optical warning sticker 75 and the glass plate 119 in the front-rear direction and the distance between the light emitting part 24 and the glass plate 119 in the front-rear direction are made different.

For example, the distance between the glass plate 119 and the light warning sticker 75 from the front side to the rear side is made longer than the distance between the glass plate 119 and the light emitting section 24 from the front side to the rear side. As a result, the distance between the optical warning sticker 75 and the player becomes longer than the distance between the light emitting section 24 and the player. As a result, the optical warning sticker 75 can be made at least less conspicuous than the light emitting section 24. Since the optical warning sticker 75 calls attention to itself, there is a possibility that the player may be dismayed. Therefore, as described above, by arranging the optical warning sticker 75 at a position farther from the light emitting section 24 than the light emitting section 24, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be dismayed.

On the other hand, for example, the distance between the glass plate 119 and the light warning sticker 75 from the front side to the rear side is made shorter than the distance between the glass plate 119 and the light emitting section 24 from the front side to the rear side. As a result, the distance between the optical warning sticker 75 and the player becomes shorter than the distance between the light emitting section 24 and the player. As a result, the presence of the optical warning sticker 75 can be easily noticed. For example, there is a case where there is no space on the game board 110 to install the optical caution sticker 75, and the caution sticker 75 has to be installed in a place other than the game board 110. In such a case, for example, a light warning sticker 75 is provided on the surface of the game frame 150 at a position closer to the player than the light emitting section 24. This allows the player to easily notice the optical warning sticker 75.

Note that the optical warning sticker 75 may be provided at a position closer to the display 130 than the light emitting section 24, for example. The light warning sticker 75 is for warning the player not to stare at the light emitting section 24 for a long time, for example. If the player stops gazing at the light emitting section 24 in accordance with the warning from the light warning sticker 75, the player may be confused as to where in the pachinko game machine 100 he or she should look to play. Therefore, if the display device 130 is provided at a position close to the light caution sticker 75, when the player looks at the light caution sticker 75, the display device 130 located near the light caution sticker 75 will be displayed. You will be able to continue playing the game while referring to the . Therefore, it is preferable that the optical warning sticker 75 be provided at a position close to the display 130.

(Fraud prevention reminder sticker 76)
The anti-fraud warning sticker 76 is attached to the left side and lower side of the game board 110 on the surface of the game board 110 (see FIG. 57), and calls attention to fraudulent activities by players on the game board 110. That is, the fraud prevention warning sticker 76 displays information directed to the player.

The game board 110 of the second embodiment includes a magnetic detection sensor to prevent unauthorized manipulation of game balls using, for example, magnets. The fraud prevention reminder sticker 76 is provided near this magnetic detection sensor. In the second embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor is provided, for example, on the rear side of the first starting port 121. The anti-tamper warning sticker 76 is provided on the lower side of the rail member 112, which is closer to the first starting port 121. The game ball fired by the player first moves along the rail member 112. Therefore, the rail member 112 is an area that is easy for players to pay attention to. Therefore, in this embodiment, the fraud prevention warning sticker 76 is arranged at a location near the first starting port 121 on the rail member 112, thereby making it easier for the player to pay attention to the fraud prevention warning sticker 76.

Note that the fraud prevention warning sticker 76 may be attached, for example, to a position where the magnetic detection sensor is difficult for the player to see. For example, if the magnetic detection sensor becomes easily visible to the player, the player who is legitimately playing the game may become unnecessarily concerned about the presence of the magnetic detection sensor, and may not be able to enjoy the game. Therefore, for example, a magnetic detection sensor or the like may be configured to be provided at a position where it is difficult to see due to the fraud prevention warning sticker 76.

As shown in FIG. 67(B), the fraud prevention reminder sticker 76 has a diamond-shaped outline. Furthermore, the shape of one of the four corners of the fraud prevention warning sticker 76 is different from the shape of the other corners, and is a cutout. In other words, the fraud prevention warning sticker 76 has a shape that is not point symmetrical. The fraud prevention warning sticker 76 is then pasted on the sixth pasted portion R6 provided on the game board 110.

The sixth affixed portion R6 is black in color and is made of a material that hardly transmits light.
Further, the sixth affixed portion R6 has a positioning portion r6 for positioning the fraud prevention warning sticker 76. The positioning part r6 is a recessed part recessed from the surroundings, and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r6 corresponds to the fraud prevention warning sticker 76. Furthermore, the shape of the positioning portion r6 is different from the positioning portions of the affixed portions to which other stickers are affixed.
Therefore, when an operator attaches the fraud prevention warning sticker 76 to the game board 110, he or she can do so without making a mistake in the location or the direction in which the fraud prevention warning sticker 76 is pasted.

The anti-fraud warning sticker 76 includes a text portion 761 that alerts the player to fraudulent gaming, and a frame line 762 surrounding the text portion 761. Further, the fraud prevention warning sticker 76 has a base portion 763 that is a portion other than the text portion 761 and the frame line 762.

The text section 761 clearly states that a sensor is installed that can detect fraud in games, such as "equipped with a fraud detection sensor," and is intended to prevent fraudulent games. There is. That is, the text portion 761 indicates information directed to the player.
Further, the frame line 762 is provided along the outer periphery of the fraud prevention warning sticker 76. This makes the fraud prevention warning sticker 76 stand out by showing, for example, the boundary between the fraud prevention warning sticker 76 and the sixth affixed portion R6.

The base portion 763 makes the character portion 761 and the frame line 762 stand out so that the player can easily see them. For example, in the fraud prevention warning sticker 76 of this embodiment, the base portion 763 is displayed in red, the character portion 761 is displayed in white, and the frame line 762 is displayed in white. In this manner, the fraud prevention warning sticker 76 has a strong contrast in brightness between the base portion 763 and the text portion 761 and frame line 762 other than the base portion 763.
Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the color of the base portion 763 is made different from the color of the sixth applied portion R6 and the surrounding color of the sixth applied portion R6. Thereby, the fraud prevention warning sticker 76 is made conspicuous on the game board 110.
Further, in this embodiment, the color of the base portion 763 of the fraud prevention reminder sticker 76 is made different from the color of the base portions of other stickers. The fraud prevention reminder sticker 76 gives a strong impression to the player that it is a particularly important warning in the pachinko gaming machine 100 to prevent fraud in the game.

(Disc number sticker 77)
The board number sticker 77 is attached to the left side and bottom of the game board 110 on the surface of the game board 110 (see FIG. 57), and displays information regarding the management of the game board 110. That is, the board number sticker 77 displays information for the administrator who manages the game board 110.

The board number sticker 77 is arranged on the rear side of the transparent game board 118 of the game board 110, at a position facing between the inner rail member 112a and the outer rail member 112b. The board number sticker 77 of this embodiment displays the model number given to the game board 110.

As shown in FIG. 67(B), the board number sticker 77 of this embodiment has a rectangular shape. Then, the board number sticker 77 is affixed to the seventh affixed portion R7 provided on the game board 110.
The seventh attached portion R7 of this embodiment is black. Further, the seventh affixed portion R7 has a positioning portion r7 for positioning the board number sticker 77. The positioning part r7 is a recessed part recessed from the surroundings, and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r7 corresponds to the board number sticker 77. Furthermore, the shape of the positioning portion r7 is different from the positioning portions of the affixed portions to which other stickers are affixed.
Therefore, when an operator attaches the board number sticker 77 to the game board 110, he or she can do so without making a mistake in the location where the board number sticker 77 is pasted.

As shown in FIG. 67(B), the board number sticker 77 includes a character section 771 for managing the game board 110 and a code image 772. Further, the record number sticker 77 has a base portion 773 that is a portion other than the character portion 771 and the code image 772.

The character portion 771 is alphanumeric characters used to manage the game board 110, such as "PL123456", for example. The character portion 771 of this embodiment uses alphanumeric characters common to the game boards 110 of the same model.
Further, the code image 772 is an encoded version of information corresponding to the character portion 771. In this example, the code image 772 is an encoded version of "PL123456", which is the content of the character section 771. For example, the administrator can obtain the same information as the text portion 771 as electronic information by mechanically reading the code image 772 using a code reading device.

The base portion 773 makes the character portion 771 easier to see for the administrator and the code image 772 easier to read by a reading device. For example, in the disc number sticker 77 of this embodiment, the base portion 773 is displayed in white, the text portion 771 is displayed in black, and the code image 772 is displayed in black.

(certificate stamp sticker 78)
FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram of the certificate stamp sticker 78 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 68(A), the certificate stamp sticker 78 is attached to the right side and lower side of the game board 110 on the surface of the game board 110, and displays information regarding the management of the game board 110. In other words, the certificate stamp 78 displays information for the administrator.
Further, the certificate stamp sticker 78 is arranged outside the gaming area 111 (see FIG. 57) on the gaming board 110. The certificate stamp sticker 78 displays a management number for uniquely identifying the game board 110.

As shown in FIG. 68(B), the certification stamp sticker 78 has a generally rectangular shape. Furthermore, two of the four corners of the certificate stamp sticker 78 are cut-out portions. Thereby, the upper and lower parts of the certificate stamp sticker 78 can be distinguished based on their shape without checking the characters. The certificate stamp sticker 78 is then affixed to the eighth affixed portion R8 provided on the game board 110.
The eighth attached portion R8 of this embodiment is black. Further, the eighth affixed portion R8 has a positioning portion r8 for positioning the certificate stamp sticker 78. The positioning part r8 is a recessed part recessed from the surroundings, and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r8 corresponds to the certificate stamp sticker 78. Furthermore, the shape of the positioning portion r8 is different from the positioning portions of the affixed portions to which other stickers are affixed.
Therefore, when the operator attaches the certificate stamp sticker 78 to the game board 110, he or she can do so without making a mistake in the location where the certificate stamp sticker 78 is pasted.

The certificate stamp sticker 78 of this embodiment is issued by an association related to gaming machines. The certificate stamp sticker 78 displays a management number 781, which is a number for management purposes, an association certificate 782, which is a certificate issued by the association, and a manufacturer name 783, which indicates the manufacturer that manufactured the pachinko machine. Ru.
The management number 781 is a unique number assigned to each game board 110 among the plurality of game boards 110 manufactured. For example, the management number 781 of the certificate stamp sticker 78 is used to manage the entire game board 110. In addition, the management number 781 of the certificate stamp sticker 78 is a management number provided for each of the plurality of components constituting the game board 110, such as the management number 841 (described later) provided on the game control board case 200c on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 100. It is used to manage the plurality of components making up the game board 110 by linking the game board 110 with the game board 110.

The certificate stamp seal 78 of this embodiment is configured to be most easily torn compared to other seals. Specifically, the certificate stamp sticker 78 is made of relatively thin paper and is pasted on the eighth pasted portion R8 using a relatively adhesive glue.
As described above, the certificate stamp sticker 78 is provided with a management number 781 unique to the game board 110. Therefore, for example, it is not preferable that the certificate stamp sticker 78 already pasted on the game board 110 is peeled off and pasted on another game board 110.
Therefore, the certificate stamp sticker 78 of this embodiment is configured to be easy to tear, so that even if it is peeled off, it cannot be used again, and the act of trying to peel it off is discouraged.

(Frame caution sticker 79)
FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram of the frame caution sticker 79 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 69(A), the frame caution sticker 79 is pasted on the lower side of the game frame 150 on the surface of the game frame 150, and displays caution information regarding the handling of the game frame 150. In other words, the frame caution sticker 79 displays information directed to the administrator.

In this embodiment, the frame caution sticker 79 is provided near the firing device 151p that fires the game ball. The frame warning sticker 79 is attached near the firing device 151p to call attention to the firing device 151p.

The frame attention-calling sticker 79 of this embodiment has a rectangular outline. Then, the frame caution sticker 79 is affixed to the ninth affixed portion R9 provided in the game frame 150.

The ninth affixed portion R9 of this embodiment has a black color. Further, the ninth affixed portion R9 has a positioning portion r9 for positioning the frame attention-calling sticker 79. The positioning part r9 is a recessed part recessed from the surroundings, and has a flat bottom. The shape of the positioning portion r9 corresponds to the frame caution sticker 79. Furthermore, the shape of the positioning part r9 is different from that of the positioning part of the affixed part to which other stickers are affixed. Therefore, when an operator attaches the frame caution sticker 79 to the game frame 150, he or she can do so without making a mistake in the location where the frame caution sticker 79 is pasted.

The frame caution sticker 79 of this embodiment includes a text portion 791 regarding the handling of the game frame 150, a warning illustration 792 regarding the handling of the game frame 150, and a frame line 793 surrounding the text portion 791 and the warning illustration 792. have Furthermore, the frame attention-calling sticker 79 has a base portion 794 that is a portion other than the text portion 791, the warning illustration 792, and the frame line 793.

The text portion 791 specifically instructs the administrator how to handle the firing device 151p provided in the game slot 150, such as, for example, ``Do not touch the tip of the mallet. Do not clean the tip of the mallet.''
Further, a warning illustration 792 indicates an object to be handled. In this example, the warning illustration 792 represents a simplified drawing of the tip of the hammer of the firing device 151p, which is the object to be handled.
The frame line 793 is provided along the outer periphery of the frame attention-calling sticker 79. This makes the frame attention-calling sticker 79 stand out by showing, for example, the boundary between the frame attention-calling sticker 79 and the ninth affixed portion R9.

The base portion 794 makes the text portion 791, the warning illustration 792, and the frame line 793 stand out so that they can be easily seen by the player. For example, in the frame warning sticker 79 of this embodiment, the base portion 794 is yellow, the text portion 791 is red, the warning illustration 792 is black, and the frame line 793 is displayed in red. In this manner, the frame attention-calling sticker 79 has a strong contrast in brightness between the base portion 794 and the text portion 791 other than the base portion 794, the warning illustration 792, and the frame line 793.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the color of the base portion 794 is made different from the color of the ninth applied portion R9 and the surrounding color of the ninth applied portion R9 (black in this example). Thereby, the frame caution sticker 79 itself is made to stand out on the game frame 150.

(Disc warning sticker 80)
FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram of the board caution sticker 80 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 70(A), the board caution sticker 80 is attached to the right side and upper side of the game board 110 on the surface of the game board 110, and calls attention to handling of the game board 110. In other words, the board caution sticker 80 displays information for the administrator who manages the game board 110.

As shown in FIG. 70(B), the board caution sticker 80 of this embodiment has a rectangular shape. Furthermore, the shape of one of the four corners of the board caution sticker 80 is different from the shape of the other corners, and is a cutout. That is, the board warning sticker 80 has a shape that is not point symmetrical. Then, the board caution sticker 80 is pasted on the tenth pasted portion R10 provided on the game board 110.

The tenth attached portion R10 is arranged outside the game area 111 on the game board 110. In this embodiment, the tenth attached portion R10 is arranged further outside the outer rail member 112b. Further, the tenth attached portion R10 is provided near the holding portion 150H that holds the game board 110 on the inner frame 150U. Furthermore, the tenth pasted portion R10 of this embodiment is black.

Moreover, the tenth pasted part R10 has a positioning part r10 for positioning the board caution sticker 80. The positioning part r10 is a recessed part recessed from the surroundings, and has a flat bottom. Further, the shape of the positioning portion r10 corresponds to the board caution sticker 80. This prevents the operator from making a mistake in the affixing position and direction of the board caution sticker 80 when pasting the board caution sticker 80 on the game board 110.

The board caution sticker 80 includes a first character part 801 related to handling of the game board 110, a second character part 802 similarly related to handling of the game board 110, a general warning mark part 803, a first character part 801, It has a frame line 804 surrounding a second character portion 802 and a general warning mark portion 803. Further, the board caution sticker 80 has a base portion 805 that is a portion other than a first character portion 801, a second character portion 802, a general warning mark portion 803, and a frame line 804.

The first text portion 801 is a message that calls for caution regarding handling when attaching or detaching the game board 110, for example, "Turn off the power when attaching or detaching the game board."
The second text portion 802 is a message that calls for caution when cleaning the game board 110, such as ``Do not use detergent when cleaning the game board.''
The general warning mark section 803 is similar to the general warning mark section 414 of the first embodiment.
The frame line 804 is provided along the outer periphery of the board caution sticker 80. This makes the board caution sticker 80 stand out by, for example, making the boundary between the board caution sticker 80 and the tenth affixed portion R10 clear.

The base portion 805 makes the first character portion 801, the second character portion 802, the general warning mark portion 803, and the frame line 804 stand out so that the administrator can easily see them. For example, in this embodiment, the base portion 805 is displayed in white, the first character portion 801 is displayed in red, the second character portion 802 is displayed in black, and the frame line 804 is displayed in black. In this way, the panel caution sticker 80 has a strong contrast in brightness between the base portion 805 and the first character portion 801, second character portion 802, general warning mark portion 803, and frame line 804 other than the base portion 805. ing.
Further, in the present embodiment, the color of the base portion 805 (white in this example) is different from the color of the tenth pasted portion R10 (black in this example). Thereby, the board caution sticker 80 itself is made conspicuous on the game board 110.

The frame caution sticker 79 and board caution sticker 80 of the second embodiment display information directed to the administrator. Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the glass door frame 150G is closed (see FIG. 57), the frame caution sticker 79 and the board caution sticker 80 are made difficult or invisible to the player. . This prevents the frame caution sticker 79 and the board caution sticker 80 from being mistakenly recognized as information intended for the player.

(Frame number sticker 81)
FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram of the frame number sticker 81 of the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 71(A), the frame number sticker 81 is attached to the lower side of the game frame 150 on the back side of the game frame 150, and displays information regarding the management of the game frame 150. That is, the frame number sticker 81 displays information for the administrator who manages the game frame 150.
Then, the frame number sticker 81 is affixed to the eleventh affixed portion R11 provided in the game frame 150.

As shown in FIG. 71(B), the eleventh pasted part R11 includes a positioning part r11 that positions the frame number sticker 81, and a transparent cover c11 that covers the frame number sticker 81 pasted on the positioning part r11. ,have.
The positioning part r11 is a recessed part recessed from the surroundings, and has a flat bottom. Further, the shape of the positioning portion r11 corresponds to the frame number sticker 81. This prevents the operator from making a mistake in the affixing position and direction of the frame number sticker 81 when pasting the frame number sticker 81 on the game frame 150.
The transparent cover c11 is designed to prevent the frame number sticker 81 affixed to the gaming frame 150 from peeling off or being rubbed when work is performed, such as when installing the pachinko gaming machine 100 on an island in a hall. protect.

The frame number sticker 81 includes a character portion 811 for managing the game frame 150 and a code image 812. Further, the frame number sticker 81 has a base portion 813 that is a portion other than the character portion 811 and the code image 812.

The character portion 811 is alphanumeric characters used to manage the game slot 150, such as "WK654321", for example. The character portion 811 is a unique number assigned to each game frame 150 among the plurality of game frames 150 manufactured. For example, the text portion 811 is used to manage the entire gaming frame 150.

Further, the code image 812 is obtained by encoding information corresponding to the character portion 811. In this example, the code image 812 is an encoded version of "WK654321", which is the content of the character section 811.

The base portion 813 makes the character portion 811 easier to see for the administrator and the code image 812 easier to read by a reading device. For example, in the frame number sticker 81 of this embodiment, the base portion 813 is displayed in white, the character portion 811 is displayed in black, and the code image 812 is displayed in black.

(Handling caution sticker 82)
FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram of the handling caution sticker 82 of the second embodiment.
The handling caution sticker 82 is pasted on the lower side of the game frame 150 on the back side of the game frame 150 (see FIG. 71(A)), and displays caution information regarding the handling of the game frame 150. In other words, the handling caution sticker 82 displays information for the administrator who manages the gaming slot 150.
The handling caution sticker 82 is directly attached to the sheet metal 150K of the game frame 150, which is the object of the caution.

As shown in FIG. 72, the handling caution sticker 82 of this embodiment includes a text portion 821 regarding the handling of the game slot 150, a warning illustration 822 regarding the handling of the game slot 150, and a frame surrounding the text portion 821 and the warning illustration 822. line 823. Furthermore, the handling caution sticker 82 has a base portion 824 that is a portion other than the text portion 821, the warning illustration 822, and the frame line 823.

The text portion 821 specifically instructs the administrator how to handle the sheet metal in the game slot 150, such as, for example, "Please be careful of the edges of the sheet metal."
Further, the warning illustration 822 displays a warning about touching the sheet metal using an illustration instead of text.
The frame line 823 is provided along the outer periphery of the handling caution sticker 82. This makes the handling caution sticker 82 stand out by showing, for example, the boundary between the handling caution sticker 82 and the sheet metal 150K.

The base portion 824 makes the text portion 821, the warning illustration 822, and the frame line 823 stand out so that the administrator can easily see them. For example, the handling caution sticker 82 of this embodiment has a base portion 824 in yellow, a text portion 821 in red, a warning illustration 822 in black, and a frame line 823 in red. In this manner, the handling caution sticker 82 has a strong contrast in brightness between the base portion 824 and the text portion 821 other than the base portion 824, the warning illustration 822, and the frame line 823.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the color of the base portion 824 is made different from the color (for example, metal color) of the sheet metal 150K that is the object of attention. Thereby, the handling caution sticker 82 is made to stand out on the game frame 150.

(Sub ROM seal 83)
FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram of the sub ROM seal 83 of the second embodiment.
The sub ROM seal 83 is provided on the back surface of the game board 110. Then, the sub ROM sticker 83 is directly attached to the ROM 302 of the performance control section 300 (see FIG. 3) provided on the back side of the game board 110 (see FIG. 62).
As shown in FIG. 73, the sub-ROM seal 83 of this embodiment has a quasi-model name 831 related to the model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and a base portion 832 that is a portion other than the quasi-model name 831.
The quasi-model name 831 is displayed by omitting the model name of the pachinko game machine 100 or by using characters that allow the model name to be inferred. For example, the model name of the pachinko game machine 100 is "CR Pachinko Star 777 ~Dream Dome Performance~ V3B." On the other hand, the quasi-model name 831 is a simplified version of the model name, such as "Star 777 Dome."

As will be described later, the official model name of the pachinko game machine 100 is displayed on the main ROM sticker 86. On the other hand, the sub-ROM sticker 83 displays the abbreviated model name as described above. With this, for example, when manufacturing the pachinko gaming machine 100, the ROM 302 to which the sub-ROM sticker 83 is pasted and the ROM 202 to which the main ROM sticker 86 is pasted are differentiated, so that the operator does not mistake them for each. .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the combination of the color of the text and the color of the base portion of the main ROM sticker 86 is made to match the combination of the color of the text and the color of the base portion of the sub ROM sticker 83. For example, if the main ROM sticker 86 has an orange base and the text is black, the sub ROM seal 83 has an orange base and black text. In this way, the ROM 302 and ROM 202 used in the same model can be distinguished from ROMs of different models by having the same combination of character color and base color.

(Main board management seal 84)
FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram of the main board management seal 84, main board seal 85, and main ROM seal 86 of the second embodiment.
The main board management seal 84 is provided on the back side of the game board 110 and is directly attached to the transparent game control board case 200c that houses the game control board 200B (see FIG. 62). In addition, CPU201, ROM202, and RAM203 (refer FIG. 3) are mounted on the game control board 200B.

As shown in FIG. 74, the main board management seal 84 has a management number 841 related to the management number, a code image 842, and an opening information column 843 in which information regarding opening is written.

The management number 841 is a unique number assigned to each game control board 200B among the game control boards 200B manufactured in plurality. The management number 841 uses alphanumeric characters such as "XX No. 123456", for example.
The code image 842 is encoded information corresponding to the management number 841. In this example, the code image 842 is an encoded version of "XX No. 123456," which is the content of the management number 841.
The opening information column 843 is a column for the administrator who opened the game control board case 200c to enter his/her name, etc., and the date of opening.

The main board management seal 84 is constituted by a transparent seal. Therefore, the administrator can visually check the game control board 200B behind the main board management seal 84.
Note that the management number 841, code image 842, and opening information field 843 are partially provided with a white base. The management number 841 is black, and the code image 842 is black.

And, when the main board management seal 84 of this embodiment is peeled off from the game control board case 200c, it becomes clear that it has been peeled off. Specifically, when the main board management seal 84 is peeled off from the game control board case 200c, the words "opened", for example, remain on the main board management seal 84 itself and the game control board case 200c.

As described above, the main board management seal 84 is provided with a management number 841 unique to the game control board 200B. Therefore, for example, it is not preferable that the main board management seal 84 pasted on the game control board case 200c is peeled off and pasted on another game control board case 200c.
Therefore, the main board management seal 84 of this embodiment is configured to leave a trace of having been peeled off, so that even if it is peeled off, it will not be used again, and the act of trying to peel it off itself will be prevented. I'm trying to keep it in check.

(Main board seal 85)
The main board seal 85 is directly attached to the transparent game control board case 200c that accommodates the game control board 200B provided on the back side of the game board 110.

The main board seal 85 includes a model name 851, a manufacturer name 852, error display information 853, and external terminal information 854.

The model name 851 displays the model name of the pachinko game machine 100. In this embodiment, "CR Pachinko Star 777 - Dream Dome Performance - V3B" is displayed as the model name 851. That is, in the main board seal 85, the model name 851 displays the official model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 without, for example, abbreviation.
The manufacturer name 852 displays the name of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko game machine 100.
The error display information 853 clearly indicates the type of error when the LED that notifies the type of error lights up.
External terminal information 854 indicates the relationship between terminals in external information terminal section 900, which will be described later, and the contents of signals output for each terminal.

The main board seal 85 is constituted by a transparent seal. Therefore, the administrator can visually recognize the rear game control board 200B through the main board seal 85. Furthermore, the model name 851, manufacturer name 852, error display information 853, and external terminal information 854 are displayed in white.

(Main ROM seal 86)
The main ROM sticker 86 is directly pasted on the ROM 202 of the game control section 200 provided on the back surface of the game board 110. That is, the main ROM sticker 86 indicates information corresponding to the game specifications stored in the ROM 202 on the back side of the game board 110.

The main ROM seal 86 of this embodiment has a model name 861 related to the model name of the pachinko game machine 100, a manufacturer name 862, and a base portion 863 that is a portion other than the model name 861 and manufacturer name 862.
The model name 861 displays the model name of the pachinko game machine 100. In this embodiment, the model name 861 displays "CR Pachinko Star 777 ~Dream Dome Performance~ V3B". That is, in the main ROM seal 86, the model name 861 displays the official model name of the pachinko gaming machine 100 without, for example, abbreviation. The game specifications of the pachinko game machine 100 are unique to each model. Therefore, the main ROM sticker 86 of the second embodiment shows information according to the game specifications stored in the ROM 202 by displaying the model name on the main ROM sticker 86.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 100 of the second embodiment, the official model name "CR Pachinko Star 777 - Dream Dome Performance - V3B" is also displayed in the model name 735 of the spec sticker 73. In other words, the model name of the pachinko game machine 100 is written on the spec sticker 73, and the model name of the pachinko game machine 100 is also written on the main ROM sticker 86, and the model name with the same notation is written on both. There is.

The manufacturer name 862 is the name of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko game machine 100.
The base portion 863 is orange in this embodiment. The color of this base portion 863 is the same as the color of the version display 736 of the spec sticker 73 described above. In this manner, in this embodiment, the color of the base portion 863 of the main ROM sticker 86 is the color of the version display 736, which is a portion of the spec sticker 73 other than the text portion.
As a result, for example, the administrator can check the game board based on the color of the version display 736 of the spec sticker 73 provided on the front surface of the game board 110 and the color of the base portion 863 of the main ROM sticker 86 provided on the back surface of the game board 110. It can be easily confirmed visually that the game specifications on the front and back sides of 110 match.

Note that, for example, the color used as the version display 736 of the spec sticker 73 may be used as the color of the model name 861 (or manufacturer name 862) of the main ROM sticker 86. Even with this configuration, for example, the administrator can check the color of the version display 736 of the spec sticker 73 provided on the front surface of the game board 110 and the model name of the main ROM sticker 86 provided on the back surface of the game board 110. 861 makes it easy to visually confirm that the game specifications match on the front and back sides of the game board 110.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment, other parts than the text part of the spec sticker 73 (probability information 731, prize ball number information 732, variable entry rate information 733, manufacturer information 734, model name 735) By using the color used for (version display 736) as the color of the base part (base part 863) or text part (model name 861, manufacturer name 862) of the main ROM sticker 86, the game specifications can be specified on the front and back sides of the game board 110. This makes it easy to check that they match.

Furthermore, the area of the display area of the main ROM sticker 86 in the second embodiment is smaller than the area of the display area of the spec sticker 73. That is, the display area of the sticker is wider for the spec sticker 73 than for the main ROM sticker 86. Note that in this embodiment, the display area is the entire area on the side where information such as text is provided. For example, the display area of a sticker is not the surface on which the adhesive is provided, but the surface opposite thereto where information is displayed.
In the second embodiment, for example, the area of the display area of the spec sticker 73 is approximately three times the area of the display area of the main ROM sticker 86 of the second embodiment.

For example, the spec sticker 73 is viewed by players with little specialized knowledge about gaming machines. Therefore, by making the display area of the spec sticker 73 relatively large, it becomes easier for the player to confirm the contents. On the other hand, by making the display area of the main ROM sticker 86 relatively small, the location where the ROM 202 is present can be made less noticeable. For example, the ROM 202 can be configured to be difficult for a person who attempts to exchange the ROM 202 illegally to discover.

Furthermore, the font size of the model name 861 on the main ROM sticker 86 is smaller than the font size of the model name 735 on the spec sticker 73. That is, the font size of the model name of the pachinko game machine 100 is larger on the spec sticker 73 than on the main ROM sticker 86.
In the spec sticker 73 of the second embodiment, the font size of the model name 735 is, for example, 10 pt. On the other hand, in the main ROM sticker 86 of the second embodiment, the font size of the model name 861 is, for example, 8pt.

Thereby, for example, by making the font size of the spec sticker 73 relatively large, it is possible for the player to easily confirm the spec sticker 73. On the other hand, by making the font size of the main ROM sticker 86 relatively small, the ROM 202 can be configured to be difficult for someone who attempts to illegally replace the ROM 202 to discover, for example.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the ratio of the area that the model name 861 of the main ROM sticker 86 occupies to the entire display area of the main ROM sticker 86 is the ratio of the area that the model name 735 of the spec sticker 73 occupies to the entire display area of the spec sticker 73. higher than the ratio. In other words, the ratio of characters indicating the model name to the display area is higher on the main ROM sticker 86 than on the spec sticker 73.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the font size of the model name 735 on the spec sticker 73 is larger than the font size of the model name 861 on the main ROM sticker 86. The area of the model name 735 on the spec sticker 73 is about 1.5 times the area of the model name 861 on the main ROM sticker 86. Further, as described above, the area of the display area of the spec sticker 73 is approximately three times the area of the display area of the main ROM sticker 86. That is, in the second embodiment, the area ratio of the model name of the spec sticker 73 is not as high as the area ratio of the display area to the sub ROM sticker 83.
In the second embodiment, the ratio of the model name 861 to the display area of the main ROM sticker 86 is about 0.5, and the ratio of the model name 735 to the display area of the spec sticker 73 is about 1. Thus, in the second embodiment, the main ROM sticker 86 has a higher proportion of characters in the display area than the spec sticker 73.

For example, the spec sticker 73 needs to include, in addition to the model name 735, jackpot probability information 731, prize ball number information 732, probability change entry rate information 733, and the like. Therefore, by making the ratio of the area occupied by the model name 735 of the spec sticker 73 to the entire display area relatively low, a sufficient area for writing information other than the model name 735 can be secured. On the other hand, the main ROM seal 86 only needs to include at least the model name 861. Therefore, the ratio of the area occupied by the model name 861 to the entire display area of the main ROM sticker 86 is increased to minimize the overall display area.

(Voltage seal 87)
FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram of the voltage seal 87 of the second embodiment.
The voltage sticker 87 is directly attached to the power cord 150D provided on the upper side of the game frame 150 on the back side of the game frame 150. The voltage sticker 87 calls attention to the handling of the power cord 150D of the game slot 150. In other words, the voltage sticker 87 displays information for the administrator who manages the game slot 150.

The voltage sticker 87 is composed of a single sheet, and is attached to the power cord 150D by sandwiching it between the power cord 150D and pasting the adhesive surfaces (adhesive surfaces) facing each other. In this embodiment, the voltage sticker 87, which calls out a particularly important warning, is firmly attached to the power cord 150D by pasting its adhesive surfaces together.

The voltage sticker 87 includes a rated voltage display 871, a text portion 872, and a warning illustration 873.
The rated voltage display 871 displays the rated voltage of the pachinko game machine 100. Specifically, the rated voltage display 871 displays content such as "24 volts caution".
Furthermore, the text portion 872 indicates the contents of a warning not to apply a voltage other than the rated voltage to the pachinko game machine 100. Specifically, the text portion 872 calls for caution regarding the handling of the power cord 150D, ``Do not use any voltage other than 24 volts as this may cause an accident.''
The warning illustration 873 is an illustration of content warning that an accident may occur, for example.

(Modified example)
FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram of modification example 1 of a sticker regarding warning.
As shown in FIG. 76(A), the pachinko game machine 100 of the first modification has a transparent film 150F on the rear side of the glass door frame 150G. This transparent film 150F is sandwiched between the game board 110 and the glass door frame 150G when the glass door frame 150G is in a closed state. In this state, at least a portion of the transparent film 150F, including a light warning section 75A described later, is visible to the player through the glass plate 119.

The transparent film 150F has a light warning section 75A that calls attention to light.
In Modification 1 shown in FIG. 76(B), an optical attention calling portion 75A is provided between the inner rail member 112a and the outer rail member 112b (see FIG. 57).
Further, the light warning section 75A includes a character section 75A1 that calls attention to light to the player, and a general warning mark section 75A2 that indicates that the warning is a warning. Furthermore, the optical attention calling portion 75A has a base portion 75A3 that is a portion other than the text portion 75A1 and the general warning mark portion 75A2.

The base portion 75A3 makes the character portion 75A1 and the general warning mark portion 75A2 stand out so that the player can easily see them. For example, in the optical warning section 75A of this embodiment, the color of the base section 75A3 is yellow, the character section 75A1 is displayed in black, and the general warning mark section 75A2 is displayed in black. In this manner, the optical attention-calling portion 75A increases the brightness contrast between the base portion 75A3 and the character portion 75A1 and the general warning mark portion 75A2 other than the base portion 75A3. Furthermore, in Modification 1, the color of the base portion 75A3 is made different from the color of the surrounding members. Thereby, the optical attention calling section 75A itself is made to stand out on the game board 110.

Further, as shown in FIG. 76(A), the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the first modification has a warning sticker 89 on the glass door frame 150G of the gaming frame 150. Further, the caution sticker 89 is provided on the side surface of the glass door frame 150G. Then, information to call attention to the handling of the game slot 150 and the game board 110 is displayed. In other words, the caution sticker 89 displays information for the administrator.

As shown in FIG. 76(C), the caution sticker 89 of this embodiment includes a text portion 891 regarding the handling of the game frame 150 and the game board 110, and a general warning mark portion 892. Further, the caution sticker 89 has a base portion 893 that is a portion other than the text portion 891 and the general warning mark portion 892.

The text part 891 indicates the movable accessories 115 on the game board 110 when the glass door frame 150G is opened and closed, such as "When opening and closing the door, please make sure that the board gimmick is in the initial position before opening and closing." The content calls for caution regarding the handling of. That is, in this example, the caution sticker 89 provided on the game frame 150 calls attention to the game board 110.
The basic configuration of the general warning mark section 892 is the same as that of the general warning mark section 414 of the first embodiment.

The base portion 893 makes the text portion 891 and the general warning mark portion 892 stand out so that they can be easily seen by the player. For example, the base portion 893 is black, the text portion 891 is white, and the general warning mark portion 892 is white and black.

Note that, similar to the attention-calling sticker 89, there are also the following embodiments that are provided on the game frame 150 to call attention to the game board 110.
For example, a decorative member that is separate from the game board 110 and is visually provided on the game frame 150 may be provided on the pachinko game machine 100. However, the decorative member is removable from the game frame 150. This decorative member is created based on the same motif as the game board 110, for example. That is, the game board 110 and the decorative member are a set. Therefore, when replacing the game board 110 with respect to the game frame 150, the decorative members are also replaced together. In such a case, the decorative member is treated as part of the game board 110 rather than the game frame 150.
The above-mentioned decorative member may be provided with an attention-calling sticker that alerts the player to the upper protrusion 150P of the game frame 150. In this case, this warning sticker is treated as being provided on the game board 110. The warning sticker is provided on the game board 110 to call attention to the game slot 150.

FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram of modification example 2 of a sticker regarding an alert.
As shown in FIG. 77, the game board 110 of this embodiment has a transparent game board 118 in which game nails are embedded and forms a game area 111. Transparent cells 118C are affixed to the entire transparent game board 118. The transparent cell 118C is made of a transparent sheet, and has one side coated with an adhesive such as glue. Further, the transparent cell 118C has a decorative portion 118d for decorating the transparent game board 118 and an attention-calling portion 118k for calling the player's attention on at least a portion of the transparent game board 118.

The decorative portion 118d is decorated with, for example, a motif of the pachinko game machine 100, such as a pattern, a figure, or a character.

In modification example 2 shown in FIG. 77, an attention calling portion 118k is provided near the inner rail member 112 and inside the inner rail member 112. The attention calling unit 118k includes a light warning unit K1 that calls attention to light, a fraud prevention calling unit K2 that calls attention to fraud, a contact warning sticker K3 that calls attention to contact, and a warning regarding operation. It has an operation attention calling part K4 that calls out.

The light warning part K1 warns players not to stare at the same light for a long time, such as "Please do not stare at the same light for a long time." The content is a reminder not to keep looking at the time. That is, the optical attention calling section K1 mainly shows information directed to the player.

The fraud prevention warning section K2 specifies that a sensor is installed that can detect fraud related to gaming, such as "equipped with a fraud detection sensor," and provides content to prevent fraudulent gaming. It has become. In other words, the fraud prevention promotion section K2 shows information directed to the player.

The contact warning sticker K3 prevents the player from colliding with the upper protrusion 150P of the game frame 150, and prevents the player from colliding with the upper protrusion 150P of the game frame 150, such as "Please be careful about the upper part of the frame. Please be careful not to jump out." The content is such that the player is prevented from coming into contact with the upper accessory 5 when the upper accessory 5 is in a protruding state. That is, the contact warning sticker K3 indicates information directed to the player.

The operation warning part K4 has a content that prevents the player from operating the game slot 150 with excessive force, such as "Please do not operate with excessive force as it may cause damage." That is, the operation attention calling section K4 shows information directed to the player.

In addition, the optical attention calling part K1, the fraud prevention calling part K2, the contact warning sticker K3, and the operation caution calling part K4 are each drawn in black characters. Further, the base portions other than the text portions of the optical attention calling portion K1, the fraud prevention calling portion K2, the contact caution calling sticker K3, and the operation caution calling portion K4 are displayed in white, for example.

In the second embodiment, for example, the light warning sticker 75 displays only a warning regarding staring at the light of the light emitting lamp, but the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, the light warning sticker 75 may display the contents written on the contact warning sticker 71, the operation warning sticker 72, and the fraud prevention warning sticker 76 in addition to the warning regarding staring at the light of the light emitting lamp. good. This also applies to the contact caution sticker 71, the operation caution sticker 72, and the fraud prevention sticker 76.

Further, in the second embodiment, various types of stickers are positioned in the affixed portion by a positioning portion constituted by a recess, but the present invention is not limited to the example of a recess. Various types of stickers may be affixed to the affixed portions (the first convex portion 170, the second convex portion 171, the third convex portion 172, etc.) described in Embodiment 1 with reference to FIG. 35.

FIG. 78 is an overall view of the external information terminal section 900 in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment.
The pachinko game machine 100 includes an external information terminal section 900 that receives external information signals from the frame external information terminal board 340 and the board external information terminal board 350 (see FIG. 3). By connecting the host computer installed in the hall and each terminal of the external information terminal section 900 with a signal line, the host computer can acquire various external information.
The external information terminal section 900 of this embodiment has various information such as "prize ball", "door/frame open", "design confirmed", "starting opening", "jackpot 1", "jackpot 2" , "Jackpot 3", "Main Prize Ball", and "Security" signals are transmitted from the frame external information terminal board 340 and the board external information terminal board 350.

Here, the "prize ball" is information transmitted from the payout control unit 330, and is information regarding the number of prize balls paid out. "Door/frame open" is information transmitted in response to opening/closing of the glass door frame 150G or inner frame 150U. “Symbol confirmed” is information sent when the symbol variation of the special symbol is fixed and stopped. The “starting hole” is information that is transmitted when a game ball enters the first starting hole 121 or the second starting hole 122. “Jackpot 1” is information transmitted as ON during a jackpot game, for example. “Jackpot 2” is information that is transmitted from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the high probability time-saving game state when the jackpot game starts and then shifts to the high-probability time-saving game state after the jackpot game. . “Jackpot 3” is information that is transmitted from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the low probability time-saving game state when the jackpot game starts and then shifts to the low-probability time-saving game state after the jackpot game. . “Main prize balls” is information representing the number of prize balls counted as a scheduled payout in the game control unit 200. "Security" is information that is sent when various errors occur.

The external information terminal section 900 has a plurality of terminals (C1 to C9) for connecting signal lines corresponding to the various signals described above. Furthermore, the plurality of terminals are divided into different colors depending on the content of the signal. The relationships between these terminals and signals are described, for example, in external terminal information 854 (see FIG. 74(A)).
For example, the terminal C1 outputs a "prize ball" signal and exhibits white color. Terminal C2 outputs a "door/frame open" signal and exhibits green color. The terminal C3 outputs a "design confirmed" signal and is gray in color. Terminal C4 outputs a "starting port" signal and is yellow in color. Terminal C5 outputs a signal of "Jackpot 1" and exhibits black color. The terminal C6 outputs a signal of "Jackpot 2" and is pink in color. Terminal C7 outputs a signal of "Jackpot 3" and exhibits blue color. Terminal C8 outputs the signal of "main prize ball" and exhibits an orange color. Terminal C9 outputs a "security" signal and is light blue.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, an external terminal seal 88 is provided near the external information terminal section 900 to clearly indicate the presence of the board external information terminal board 350. In this embodiment, the external terminal sticker 88 is attached to a holding member 900c that holds the external information terminal section 900.
The external terminal seal 88 has a character portion 881 and a frame line 882 surrounding the character portion 881. Further, the external terminal seal 88 has a base portion 883 that is a portion other than the character portion 881 and the frame line 882. The text portion 881 is a content clearly indicating that it is the external information terminal portion 900, such as “external terminal”. Further, the frame line 882 is provided along the outer periphery of the external terminal seal 88.
The base portion 883 is yellow. Further, the character portion 881 is black. The frame line 882 is red.

In the external information terminal section 900 configured as described above, the terminal C1 for the "prize ball" signal is white, and the terminal C5 for the "jackpot 1" signal is black. That is, the colors of the signal terminals related to the ball output specifications in the pachinko gaming machine 100 are set to white and black. When this color configuration of the terminals is adopted, black and white are used for the base portion and the text portion of the spec sticker 73. For example, when the base portion of the spec sticker 73 is made white, the text portion of the spec sticker 73 is made black. Further, for example, when the base portion of the spec sticker 73 is made black, the text portion of the spec sticker 73 is made white. Similarly, black and white are used for the base and text portions of the main ROM seal 86.

In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, as described above, the color of the terminal of the signal related to the ball payout specifications, the color of the text part and base part of the spec sticker 73, and the text part of the main ROM sticker 86 are By using white and black as the colors constituting the base portion and the base portion, the administrator can easily manage the pachinko gaming machine 100. That is, since the color of the spec sticker 73 provided on the front surface of the game board 110 and the color of the main ROM sticker 86 provided on the back surface of the game board 110 are the same, the front and back surfaces of the game board 110 can be It can be easily confirmed that the configuration and the game control board 200B correspond. Furthermore, in this example, the spec sticker 73 and the main ROM sticker 86 allow the administrator to recognize that white and black are important colors, and then connect important signal lines related to the ball output specifications to the external information terminal. When connecting to 900, the connection work can be done keeping in mind the white and black colors.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, on the board on which each terminal of the external information terminal section 900 is mounted, "CN" is printed for each terminal. In the second embodiment, CN+numerals are written for each terminal so that each terminal can be distinguished. The CN+ character in this embodiment is white. On the other hand, the external terminal information 854 that describes the external information terminal section 900 on the main board seal 85 is composed of white characters. As a result, the external terminal information 854 on the main board sticker 85 corresponds to the color of the "CN" printed on the external information terminal section 900, so that the external terminal information 854 is related to the explanation of the external information terminal section 900. is suggested.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the colors used for the main ROM sticker 86 and the spec sticker 73 are all included in the colors of the external terminals.

However, if the color of an important signal line is used for the spec sticker 73 or the main ROM sticker 86 that the administrator pays attention to, there is a risk that the administrator may become accustomed to the color. In particular, signal lines related to door/frame opening and security are important in halls. Therefore, the color of the external terminal for opening the door/frame is not used as the font color or base color of the spec sticker 73 or the main ROM sticker 86. Further, the color of the security external terminal is not used as the font color or base color of the spec sticker 73 or the main ROM sticker 86.

Further, for example, the color of the text portion and base portion of the spec sticker 73 and the main ROM sticker 86 may be white and black. In such a case, in the external information terminal section 900, the terminal (white) and the terminal (black) are not provided adjacent to each other. For example, in the spec sticker 73 and the main ROM sticker 86, the information can be made easier to see by making white and black adjacent to each other to increase the color contrast. However, due to the worker's awareness that the colors used for the spec sticker 73 and the main ROM sticker 86 are white and black, a black signal line is connected next to a white terminal, or a white signal line is connected next to a black terminal. There is a risk that this may occur. Therefore, in this example, the terminal (white) and the terminal (black) are not adjacent to each other, and the white terminal and the black terminal are separated in advance to prevent incorrect connection of the signal line.

Further, all the colors forming the external terminal seal 88 may be used as the colors of the terminals. For example, yellow and black are used for the external terminal seal 88. Then, these colors are included in the terminals (yellow, black) in the external information terminal section 900. Thereby, the location where the external information terminal section 900 is provided on the back surface of the game board 110 can be made conspicuous, making it difficult for the administrator to forget the task of attaching the signal line.

Next, the variable effect in the second embodiment will be explained.
Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the second embodiment, if the determination result is a jackpot, the variable time is set to 30 seconds to 90 seconds. In other words, if a jackpot is won, the fluctuation time is set to be longer. The variation time of the variation pattern corresponds to the production time of the variation performance pattern. Furthermore, the longer the performance time of the variable performance pattern is, the more special reach effects such as SP reach and SPSP reach are executed. Therefore, the longer the performance time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Further, in the second embodiment, the order of the jackpot expectation level is from low to high: no reach performance, normal reach performance, SP reach performance, and SP/SP reach performance.

[Pre-judgment performance of Embodiment 2]
Next, an example of the pre-determination effect according to the second embodiment will be specifically explained.
In the second embodiment, the effect control unit 300 controls the display mode of the variable image 51 or the pending image 52 (hereinafter, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are collectively referred to as "object image") as one of the predetermined effects. It is possible to perform an "object change effect" in which the object changes, and a "special light emission effect" in which the light emitting section 24 of the first starting port unit 20 mainly emits light.
In the following description, the hold that is the target of notification of the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination performance will be referred to as the notification target.
In the second embodiment, the object change effect and the special light emission effect can be executed independently. However, as will be described later, there are times when an object change effect and a special light emission effect are executed together for the same notification target.

(Object change effect)
The object change performance is executed when predetermined conditions such as the presence or absence of a jackpot to be notified of the preliminary determination result, the type of jackpot symbol, and the variation time are satisfied. In the object change effect, the color, pattern, shape, etc. (hereinafter referred to as display color) of the object image are changed from the default (standard) display mode. Note that in the second embodiment, the default display color of the object image is white. In the second embodiment, by changing the display color of the object image, the possibility (that is, the degree of expectation) of a jackpot game is suggested to the player.

The object change effect changes the object image to a predetermined display color from among a plurality of display colors depending on the expectation level of winning the jackpot. Here, in the second embodiment, when the object image is displayed in white, it is in a default (standard) state in which no object change effect is performed. In the object change effect, the object image is changed to one of blinking white, blue, green, and red. These display colors are ranked. In this embodiment, the order is from low to high ranking: white blinking → blue → green → red. As for these display colors, the longer the presentation time is, the higher the rate at which colors with higher rankings are selected, and the shorter the presentation time is, the higher the rate at which colors with lower rankings are selected.
As described above, in this embodiment, the longer the performance time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot. Therefore, in this embodiment, the order of the jackpot expectation is from low to high: white → blinking white → blue → green → red.
Note that the display colors are not changed sequentially according to the above order, but some display colors may be omitted. Further, in this embodiment, a display color with a high expectation level does not change to a display color with a low expectation level.

In addition, in this embodiment, when an object change effect of a rank higher than blue (that is, blue, green, red) is executed, reach effects (normal reach, SP reach, SPSP reach) are performed at least in the variation effect of the notification target. I'm trying to get it executed.

(Special lighting performance)
The special light emission effect is executed when predetermined conditions such as the presence or absence of a jackpot to be notified of the preliminary determination result, the type of jackpot symbol, and the fluctuation time are satisfied. The special light emitting effect is mainly performed by setting the light emitting section 24 of the first starting port unit 20 in a special light emitting mode.
Here, the special light emission effect only needs to allow the player to recognize that the light emission mode of the light emitting section 24 is different from when the special light emission effect is not being performed (hereinafter referred to as non-execution time). For example, the light emitting section 24 may be turned off during non-execution, and the light emitting section 24 may emit light during a special light emitting performance. Further, it can be exemplified that the light emitting unit 24 has a small amount of light when not in use, and the light emitting unit 24 has a large amount of light when performing a special light emission effect. Furthermore, it can be exemplified that the light emitting unit 24 blinks at a slow speed (the light emitting interval is long) during the non-execution, and the light emitting unit 24 during the special light emitting performance has a fast blinking speed (the light emitting interval is short).

Further, in the special light emission performance, the light emitting unit 24 may have a constant blinking speed from the start to the end of the performance. On the other hand, in the special light emission production, the light emitting unit 24 has a period from the start of the production to the end of the production, in which the light emission unit 24 emits light at a first blinking pattern, which is a first blinking speed, which is different from the first blinking speed. The light emission has a second blinking rate (including faster or slower than the first blinking rate) and a period in which the light is emitted in the second blinking pattern that is performed after the first blinking pattern. You can go.

In addition, the special light emitting effect can emit light in any one of white light emission, blue light emission, green light emission, and red light emission. These luminescent colors are ranked in the same manner as the object change effect described above. In this embodiment, the order of the jackpot expectation is from the lowest to the highest: white light, blue light, green light, red light.

Next, the variable effect of the second embodiment will be specifically explained.
(Variable effect example 6)
79-1, FIG. 79-2, FIG. 79-3, and FIG. 79-4 are explanatory diagrams of variation performance example 6 in the pattern variation performance of decorative symbols performed by the performance control unit using the image display unit.

As shown in FIG. 79-1 (1), it is assumed that the decorative pattern 61 has been fixed and stopped on the image display section 114 as the previous special pattern has finished changing. In this example, the number combination of the fixed and stopped decorative pattern 61 is "246". Further, the combination of numbers of the small pattern 56 that has been fixed and stopped is also "246". Furthermore, a pending number display 55 is displayed on the image display section 114. The pending number display 55 remains at "0". Further, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are not displayed.
Further, the light emitting section 24 of the first starting port unit 20 is off.

Then, the variation of the special symbols based on the winning of the first starting hole 121 starts. At this time, as shown in FIG. 79-1 (2), the decorative pattern 61 starts changing the pattern along with the action at the time of starting the change. In this example, the action at the start of the fluctuation is that the decorative pattern 61, which had stopped fluctuating, once moves in the opposite direction to the scrolling direction, and then scrolls in the scrolling direction. Further, the image display section 114 displays a fluctuation image 51. The variation image 51 is displayed in white, which is the default color. The small symbols 56 fluctuate in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the special symbols. Note that the pending number display 55 is "0". Further, the light emitting section 24 is off.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 79-1(3), the decorative pattern 61 changes. At this time, the light emitting section 24 is off.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79-1 (4), the number "3" which is the left decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped. In the variation performance example 6, a game ball is newly entered into the first starting opening 121. At this time, since the special symbols are changing, the right to judge jackpot for new prizes is reserved. Then, the pending image 52 is displayed. Further, in the pending number display 55, the pending number increases from "0" to "1".

In this variation performance example 6, the right that has been won and reserved at this time is the subject of notification in the preliminary determination performance. In this example, execution of the special light emission effect and the object change effect is started at the timing of winning the first start opening 121. In variation performance example 6, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from the non-emission state to the state in which it emits white light as a special light emission mode after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the winning timing of the first starting port 121. do.
Note that when the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from the non-emission state to the white light emission state, the first pending image 52 is in the middle of the transition from the non-display state to the white flashing display. At this timing, it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the first pending image 52 is displayed in blinking white.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, a predetermined sound effect (for example, "pillow") is emitted from the speaker 156 in synchronization with the timing at which the light emitting section 24 emits light in a special light emission mode.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79-1 (5), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the winning timing of the first starting port 121, the state changes from the undisplayed state to the state where the white flashing display is performed as the first pending image 52. Become. In variation effect example 6, the time it takes for the object change effect to complete the transition of the first pending image 52 from an undisplayed state to a white blinking state is longer than the time it takes for the first pending image 52 to transition from an undisplayed state to a blinking white state. This is longer than the time it takes to complete the transition from the state to the state where white light is emitted.

Here, the VDP 314 (see FIG. 4) of this embodiment displays effect images constituting various effects using frame images of 60 frames per second. In the special light emitting effect, the light emitting section 24 completes the transition from the non-emission state to the white light emitting state by taking one frame of time (=about 1.66 milliseconds). On the other hand, in the object change effect, 30 frames of frame images are used to complete the transition of the first pending image 52 from an undisplayed state to a white blinking state. That is, in the object change effect, it takes 30 frames (=0.5 seconds) to complete the transition of the first pending image 52 from an undisplayed state to a blinking white state.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, the timing at which the player recognizes that the light emitting unit 24 is emitting white light is different from the timing at which the player recognizes that the first pending image 52 is flashing white light. ing. In the second embodiment, the player can recognize the white light emitted from the light emitting section 24 earlier than the white flashing of the first pending image 52.

Then, the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, as shown in FIG. 79-1 (5), the decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped. The combination of numbers "312" of this decorative pattern 61 is an example of a combination when the judgment result of the special pattern lottery is a loss.
Furthermore, the small symbols 56 stop when the special symbols stop changing. At this time, the small pattern 56 stops at "312", which is the same number combination as the decorative pattern 61. Furthermore, the fluctuation image 51 is erased.
Note that even if the special symbols stop changing, the light emitting section 24 continues to emit white light as a special light emitting effect. Further, the pending image 52 continues to flash white as an object change effect.

Thereafter, as the next special symbol starts to fluctuate, the decorative symbol 61 starts to fluctuate as shown in FIG. 79-1 (6). Further, in the image display section 114, the pending image 52 is displayed as a variable image 51. At this time, the variable image 51 continues to flash white, which is the mode before the display change. Then, the small pattern 56 also starts to change. Note that the pending number display 55 decreases from "1" to "0".
Furthermore, the light emitting section 24 continues to emit white light.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 79-2 (7), the decorative pattern 61 changes. At this time, the image display section 114 displays a fluctuating image 51 that flashes in white. Furthermore, the light emitting unit 24 continues to blink by emitting white light.
Also, at this time, a game ball enters the first starting port 121, and the pending image 52 is newly displayed. Then, the pending number display 55 increases from "0" to "1".

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79-2 (8), the number "5" which is the left decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped. In variable effect example 6, the timing of this temporary stop is used as the reference timing for transition (hereinafter referred to as transition reference timing), and the second light emitting color change and display color change in the special light emission effect and object change effect are started. be done. Specifically, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from white light emission to blue light emission after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the second transition reference timing.
Further, when the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from white light emission to blue light emission, the fluctuation image 51 is in the middle of the transition from white blinking to blue light emission. At this timing, it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the variable image 51 turns blue.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79-2 (9), the fluctuation image 51 completes the transition from blinking white to blue after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the second transition reference timing. At this time, the light emitting section 24 is already emitting blue light. That is, in the present embodiment, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from white light emission to blue light emission before the fluctuation image 51 completes the transition from white blinking to blue light emission.

In variable performance example 6, in the special light emission performance, it takes one frame of time (=about 1.66 milliseconds) to complete the transition of the light emitting unit 24 from white light emission to blue light emission state. On the other hand, in the object change effect, 60 frames of frame images are used to complete the transition of the variable image 51 from blinking white to blue. That is, in the object change effect, it takes 60 frames (=1 second) to complete the transition of the variable image 51 from blinking white to blue.
Note that in this embodiment, the number of frames (for example, 60 frames) used to complete the color change of the object images that are already displayed (fluctuation image 51, pending image 52) is This is greater than the number of frames used to complete the color change (eg, 30 frames).
In variation effect example 6, by causing the light emitting unit 24 to emit blue light before the variation image 51 completes changing to blue, the player can instantly see the color that the variation image 51 will change to afterward. I'm letting you know.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the frame lamp 157 and the accessory light emitting section 115L also emit blue light at the timing when the light emitting section 24 shifts from white light emission to blue light emission. However, the blue light emitted by the frame lamp 157 and the accessory light emitting unit 115L is temporary, and at least after the variable image 51 changes to blue, they are turned off or emitted in another light color such as white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79-2 (10), the number "5" which is the left decorative pattern 61 and the number "5" which is the right decorative pattern 61 are temporarily stopped, and the two decorative patterns 61 are aligned. Normal reach is achieved by temporarily stopping in a state where the Note that at this time, the fluctuation image 51 is blue, and the light emitting section 24 emits blue light.
Further, in this example, two new pending images 52 are displayed as the game ball hits the first starting port 121 twice. That is, the first, second, and third pending images 52 are displayed. Then, the pending number display 55 increases from "1" to "3".

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 79-2 (11), the third light emission color change and display color change in the special light emission effect and object change effect start to be executed, using the predetermined timing in the normal reach state as the transition reference timing. be done. Specifically, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from blue light emission to green light emission after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the third transition reference timing.
Further, when the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from blue light emission to green light emission, the fluctuation image 51 is in the middle of the transition from blue to green light. At this timing, it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the variable image 51 turns green.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79-2 (12), the change image 51 completes the transition from blue to green after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the third transition reference timing. At this time, the light emitting unit 24 is already flashing green light. That is, in variation effect example 6, the light emitting section 24 completes the transition from blue light emission to green light emission before the variation image 51 changes from blue to green.

In variable effect example 6, in the special light emission effect, it takes one frame of time (=approximately 1.66 milliseconds) to complete the transition of the light emitting unit 24 from blue light emission to green light emission state. On the other hand, in the object change effect, 60 frames of frame images are used to complete the transition of the variable image 51 from blue to green. That is, in the object change effect, it takes 60 frames (=1 second) to complete the transition of the variable image 51 from blue to green.
In variation effect example 6, by causing the light emitting unit 24 to emit green light before the variation image 51 completes changing to green, the player can instantly see the color that the variation image 51 will change to later. I'm letting you know.

In this embodiment, the frame lamp 157 and the accessory light emitting section 115L also emit green light at the timing when the light emitting section 24 shifts from blue light emission to green light emission. However, the green light emitted from the frame lamp 157 and the accessory light emitting section 115L is temporary, and at least after the variable image 51 changes to green, they are turned off or emitted in another color such as white.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79-3 (13), the decorative pattern 61 is displayed in a reduced size on the image display section 114, and the process moves to SP reach. Note that at this time, the fluctuation image 51 is green, and the light emitting section 24 emits green light.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 79-3 (14), the fourth light emitting color change and display color change in the special light emission effect and object change effect are performed using the predetermined timing after the SP reach transition as the transition reference timing. Execution starts. Specifically, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from green light emission to red light emission after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the fourth transition reference timing.
Further, when the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from green light emission to red light emission, the fluctuation image 51 is in the middle of the transition from green to red light emission. At this timing, it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the variable image 51 turns red.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79-3 (15), the fluctuation image 51 completes the transition from green to red after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the fourth transition reference timing. At this time, the light emitting section 24 is already emitting red light. That is, in variation effect example 6, the light emitting section 24 completes the transition from green light emission to red light emission before the change of the variation image 51 from green to red is completed.

In variation effect example 6, in the special light emission effect, it takes one frame of time (=approximately 1.66 milliseconds) to complete the transition of the light emitting unit 24 from green light emission to red light emission state. On the other hand, in the object change effect, the change image 51 is completely transitioned from green to red using 60 frame images. That is, in the object change effect, it takes 60 frames (=1 second) to complete the transition of the variable image 51 from green to red.
In variation effect example 6, by causing the light emitting unit 24 to emit red light before the variation image 51 completes changing from green to red, the player is informed of the color that the variation image 51 will change to after that. I'll let you know right away.

In addition, in this embodiment, the frame lamp 157 and the accessory light emitting part 115L also emit red light at the timing when the light emitting part 24 shifts from green light emission to red light emission. However, the red light emitted by the frame lamp 157 and the accessory light emitting unit 115L is temporary, and at least after the variable image 51 changes to red, they are turned off or emitted in another color such as white.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79-3 (16), the image display section 114 shifts to SPSP reach. At this time, the decorative pattern 61 and the reserved image 52 are no longer displayed on the image display section 114. However, the pending number display 55 and the small symbols 56 each remain displayed on the image display section 114.
Further, after the transition to SPSP reach, the variable image 51 is red, and the light emitting unit 24 continues to flash red light.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79-3 (17), a lever operation image 538 is displayed on the image display section 114 to prompt the player to operate the production lever 161L. In this variation effect example 6, the variation image 51 is hidden while the lever operation image 538 is displayed. However, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit red light even when the red variable image 51 is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79-3 (18), when the player operates the production lever 161L while the lever operation image 538 is displayed, the movable accessory 115 located above the game board 110 is lowered to the center of the game board 110. In variation performance example 6, the movable accessory 115 is located at an appearance position overlapping the image display section 114 in the center of the image display section 114. Then, the movable accessory 115 causes the accessory light emitting part 115L to emit light. At this time, the light emitting mode of the accessory light emitting section 115L is different from the state in which it is located at the standby position, in that the amount of light is large, the speed of flashing light is fast, and the number of light emitting colors is large. Furthermore, an effect image 115e that emphasizes the presence of the movable accessory 115 is displayed on the image display section 114.
In addition, in this variation production example 6, the movable accessory 115 faces the center of the image display section 114, and while the effect image 115e is displayed on the image display section 114, the variation image 51 is not displayed. Make it. However, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit red light even when the red variable image 51 is not displayed.
As described above, it is assumed that the player becomes worried that the expectation level has decreased because the variable image 51, which is red and has a high expectation level, is hidden. However, in the variable effect example 6, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit light in a color corresponding to the display color of the variable image 51, so that the player can enjoy the effect without worrying.

Further, as shown in FIG. 79-4 (19), when the movable accessory 115 returns to the standby position, the decorative pattern 61 of the number zero is temporarily stopped on the image display section 114. In this example, three decorative patterns 61 representing the number "5" are temporarily stopped.
In addition, when the temporary stop of the decorative pattern 61 of the number zero is displayed, the red variable image 51 is displayed again. Note that the light emitting section 24 continues to emit red light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79-4 (20), the image display section 114 displays a highly decorative decorative pattern 61 with the same number "5", and these three decorative patterns 61 are fixed and stopped. do. In the illustrated example, the decorative symbols 61 are displayed in a combination of "555", thereby informing the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Note that, like the decorative pattern 61, the small pattern 56 also stops fixed at the number "555".
Here, the decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped, and after the fixed time is completed, the light emitting section 24 stops emitting red light. That is, the light emitting unit 24 ends the light emission as the special light emission effect when the pattern variation of the right to be notified stops.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79-4 (21), an opening image 589 is displayed on the image display section 114. The opening image 589 is an image for notifying the player of the start of the jackpot game. More specifically, in the opening image 589 of this embodiment, the words "BIG Bonus! Congratulations" are displayed. Furthermore, a right-handed image 542 is displayed on the image display section 114. After that, a jackpot game is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 100 of the second embodiment, a special light emitting effect is executed using the light emitting section 24 that makes the player expect a jackpot by emitting light in a special light emission mode. A decorative sticker 23, which is a motif of the pachinko game machine 100, is provided near the light emitting portion 24. Therefore, the player is configured to easily pay attention to the light emitting section 24.
Further, in the special light emission performance, when the light emitting unit 24 emits light, a sound effect is output from the speaker 156, for example. This makes it easier for the player to pay attention to the light emitting section 24 when the light emitting section 24 emits light.
In contrast, in the pachinko game machine 100 of the second embodiment, for example, a light warning sticker 75 is provided on the surface of the game board 110 to warn the player not to stare at the light emitting part 24 more than necessary. This suppresses the player's feeling of being dazzled.

FIG. 80 is a timing chart of the special light emission effect and the object change effect in variation effect example 6.
As shown in FIG. 80, the time from the timing of the winning of the notification target to the time when the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition to white light emission in the special light emission performance and until the time when the object image completes the transition to white flashing during the object change performance is as follows. There is a time difference.
In addition, from the second transition reference timing until the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from white light emission to blue light emission in the special light emission effect, and until the object image completes the transition from white flashing to blue light emission in the object change effect, There is a time difference.
Furthermore, from the third transition reference timing until the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from blue light emission to green light emission in the special light emission effect, and until the object image completes the transition from blue to green in the object change effect, There is a time difference.
There is a time difference from the fourth transition reference timing until the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from green light emission to red light emission in the special light emission effect and until the object image completes the transition from green to red in the object change effect. is occurring.

For example, the white light emitting period in which white light is emitted in the special light emitting effect is longer than the white flashing period in which white light is blinking in the object change effect (after the transition to white flashing is completed but before the transition to blue is completed). It's shorter. In this way, when focusing on a change to a specific color, the execution time of the special light emitting effect for the right to be notified is shorter than the execution time for the object change effect for the right to be notified.

(Variable effect example 7)
81-1, FIG. 81-2, FIG. 81-3, and FIG. 81-4 are explanatory diagrams of example 7 of variation effects of decorative symbols performed by the effect control unit using the image display unit.

As shown in FIG. 81-1(1), it is assumed that the decorative pattern 61 has been fixed and stopped on the image display section 114 as the previous special pattern has finished changing. In this example, the combination of numbers of the fixed and stopped decorative pattern 61 is "765". Further, the combination of numbers of the small pattern 56 that has been fixed and stopped is also "765". Furthermore, a pending number display 55 and a small pattern 56 are displayed on the image display section 114. The pending number display 55 is "0". Further, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are not displayed. Further, the light emitting section 24 of the first starting port unit 20 is off.

Then, the variation of the special symbols based on the winning of the first starting hole 121 starts. At this time, as shown in FIG. 81-1(2), the decorative pattern 61 starts changing the pattern along with the action at the start of the change. Further, the image display section 114 displays a fluctuation image 51. The variation image 51 is displayed in white, which is the default color. The small symbols 56 fluctuate in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the special symbols. Note that the pending number display 55 is "0". Further, the light emitting section 24 is off.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81-1(3), the decorative pattern 61 changes. At this time, the light emitting section 24 is off. In addition, in this variation performance example 7, a game ball is newly entered into the first starting opening 121. Then, the pending image 52 is newly displayed. Further, in the pending number display 55, the pending number increases from "0" to "1".

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81-1 (4), the number "8" which is the left decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped.
Then, as shown in FIG. 81-1 (5), the number "3" which is the right decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped. Further, in the variation performance example 7, a game ball is further entered into the first starting opening 121. In this variation performance example 7, the right that has been won and reserved at this time is the subject of notification in the preliminary determination performance. In the variation performance example 7, execution of the special light emission performance and the object change performance is started at the timing of winning the first start opening 121. In variation performance example 7, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from the non-emission state to the state in which it emits green light as a special light emission mode after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the winning timing of the first starting port 121. do.
Further, when the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from the non-emission state to the green light emission state, the second pending image 52 is in the middle of the transition from the non-display state to the green display state. At this timing, it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the second pending image 52 turns green.
In addition, in the variation production example 7, a predetermined sound effect is emitted from the speaker 156 in synchronization with the timing at which the light emitting section 24 emits light in a special light emission mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 81-1 (6), the second pending image 52 completes the transition from the undisplayed state to the green display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the winning timing of the first start opening 121. do. At this time, the light emitting section 24 is already emitting green light. That is, in variation effect example 7, the light emitting unit 24 starts emitting green light before the second green pending image 52 is displayed.
In addition, in the variable effect example 7, the relationship between the time required for the transition of the emitted light color in the special light emitting effect and the time required for the display transition in the object change effect is the same as in the variable effect example 6. In example 7 of variable performance, by causing the light emitting unit 24 to emit green light before the second green pending image 52 is displayed, the second pending image 52 that is colored green can be displayed to the player. The color of image 52 is notified instantly.
Note that in the pending number display 55, the pending number increases from "1" to "2".

Then, the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, as shown in FIG. 81-2 (7), the decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped. The combination of numbers "813" of this decorative pattern 61 is an example of a combination when the judgment result of the special pattern lottery is a loss.
Furthermore, the small symbols 56 stop when the special symbols stop changing. At this time, the small pattern 56 stops at "813", which is the same number combination as the decorative pattern 61. Furthermore, the fluctuation image 51 is erased.
Note that even if the special symbols stop changing, the light emitting section 24 continues to emit green light as a special light emitting effect. Further, the pending image 52 continues to be displayed in green as an object change effect.

Thereafter, as the next special symbol starts to fluctuate, the decorative symbol 61 starts to fluctuate as shown in FIG. 81-2 (8). Furthermore, in the image display unit 114, the first pending image 52 is changed to be displayed as a variable image 51. Further, the position of the second pending image 52 is moved as the first pending image 52. At this time, the first pending image 52 continues to be displayed in green, which is the mode before being moved. Then, the small pattern 56 also starts to change. Note that the pending number display 55 decreases from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the light emitting section 24 continues to emit green light.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 81-2 (9), the decorative pattern 61 changes.
In the variation performance example 7, the game ball enters the first starting port 121 twice, and the second and third reserved images 52 are newly displayed in order. Then, the pending number display 55 increases from "1" to "3".
Further, a green pending image 52 is displayed on the image display section 114. Then, with the predetermined timing as the transition reference timing, the second change in the light emitting color and the change in the display color in the special light emission effect and the object change effect are started. Specifically, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from green light emission to red light emission after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the second transition reference timing.
Note that when the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from green light emission to red light emission, the first pending image 52 is in the middle of the transition from green to red light emission. At this timing, it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the variable image 51 turns red.

Then, as shown in FIG. 81-2 (10), the first pending image 52 completes the transition from green to red after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the third transition reference timing. At this time, the light emitting section 24 is already emitting red light.
In addition, in the variable effect example 7, the relationship between the time required to shift the emitted light color in the special light emission effect and the time required to change the display color in the object change effect is the same as in the variable effect example 6. That is, in variation effect example 7, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from green light emission to red light emission before the pending image 52 changes from green to red. In variation performance example 7, by causing the light emitting unit 24 to emit red light before the pending image 52 changes to red, the player is instantly notified of the color that the pending image 52 will change to thereafter.

In addition, in the variation effect example 7, the frame lamp 157 and the accessory light emitting part 115L also emit red light at the timing when the light emitting part 24 shifts from green light emission to red light emission. However, the red light emitted by the frame lamp 157 and the accessory light emitting section 115L is temporary, and at least after the pending image 52 changes color to red, the light is turned off or the light is emitted in another color such as white.

Further, as shown in FIG. 81-2 (10), the number "2" which is the left decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped, and the number "5" which is the right decorative pattern 61 is temporarily stopped.

Then, the special symbols stop changing. At this time, as shown in FIG. 81-2 (11), the decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped. The combination of numbers "275" of this decorative pattern 61 is an example of a combination when the judgment result of the special pattern lottery is a loss.
Further, the small symbols 56 stop when the special symbols stop changing. At this time, the small pattern 56 stops at "275", which is the same number combination as the decorative pattern 61. Furthermore, the fluctuation image 51 is erased.
Note that even if the special symbols stop changing, the light emitting section 24 continues to flash red light as a special light emitting effect. Furthermore, the first pending image 52 continues to be displayed in red as an object change effect.

Thereafter, as the next special symbol starts to fluctuate, the decorative symbol 61 starts to fluctuate as shown in FIG. 81-2 (12). Furthermore, in the image display unit 114, the first pending image 52 is changed to be displayed as a variable image 51. At this time, the variable image 51 continues to be displayed in red, which is the mode before the display change. Further, the positions of the second and third pending images 52 are moved as the first and second pending images 52, respectively. Then, the small pattern 56 also starts to change. Note that the pending number display 55 decreases from "3" to "2". Furthermore, the light emitting section 24 continues to emit red light.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 81-3 (13), the decorative pattern 61 changes.
Then, as shown in FIG. 81-3 (14), the number "2" which is the left decorative pattern 61 and the number "2" which is the right decorative pattern 61 are temporarily stopped, and the two decorative patterns 61 are aligned. A normal reach is achieved by temporarily stopping in a state where the Note that at this time, the fluctuation image 51 is red, and the light emitting section 24 emits red light.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81-3 (15), the decorative pattern 61 is displayed in a reduced size on the image display section 114, and the process moves to SP reach. Note that at this time, the fluctuation image 51 is red, and the light emitting section 24 emits red light.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 81-3 (16), the image display section 114 shifts to SPSP reach. At this time, the decorative pattern 61 and the reserved image 52 are not displayed on the image display section 114. However, the pending number display 55 and the small pattern 56 are each displayed on the image display section 114.
Furthermore, in variation performance example 7, when the shift to SPSP reach occurs, the red variation image 51 is also hidden. On the other hand, the light emitting section 24 continues to emit red light.
In variation performance example 7, it is assumed that the player becomes worried that the expectation level has decreased because the red variation image 51, which has a high expectation level, is hidden. However, in the variable effect example 7, the light emitting unit 24 continues to emit light in a color corresponding to the display color of the variable image 51, so that the player can enjoy the effect without worrying. .

Then, as shown in FIG. 81-3 (17), the decorative pattern 61 of the number zero is temporarily stopped on the image display section 114. In this example, three decorative patterns 61 corresponding to the number "2" are temporarily stopped.
Note that when the temporary stop of the double-digit decorative pattern 61 is displayed, the light emitting section 24 continues to emit red light.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81-3 (18), a decorative pattern 61 that is the same number "2" and has high decorativeness is temporarily stopped on the image display section 114.
In example 7 of variation effects, the variation image 51 and the pending image 52 are displayed at the timing when these three decorative patterns 61 temporarily stop. At this time, the variable image 51 is displayed in red, which is the state before being hidden.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 81-4 (19), in variation performance example 7, a promotion performance is executed. The promotion performance is a performance that makes the player expect whether or not the zero-number decorative pattern 61 of the temporarily stopped number "2" will become the zero-number decoration pattern 61 of another number. At this time, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 are not displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81-4 (20), the decorative symbols 61 are displayed in the combination of "555", thereby informing the player that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. . That is, the decorative pattern 61 is an example of being promoted to a decorative pattern that is a jackpot with a higher profit for the player than the zero-numbered decorative pattern before the promotion performance. At this time, the variable image 51 and the pending image 52 each remain hidden.
Note that, like the decorative pattern 61, the small pattern 56 also stops fixed at the number "555".
Here, the decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped, and after the completion of the fixed time, the light emitting section 24 stops blinking the red light. That is, the light emitting unit 24 ends the light emission as the special light emission effect when the pattern variation of the right to be notified stops.

Then, as shown in FIG. 81-4 (21), an opening image 589 is displayed on the image display section 114. The opening image 589 is an image for notifying the player of the start of the jackpot game. More specifically, in the opening image 589 of this embodiment, the words "BIG Bonus! Congratulations" are displayed. Furthermore, a right-handed image 542 is displayed on the image display section 114. After that, a jackpot game is executed.

In variation performance example 7, the execution time of the special light emission performance for the right to be notified is different from the execution time of the object change performance for the right to be notified.
In variation performance example 7, the execution time of the object change production for the right to be notified is, for example, from when the display of the green pending image 52 starts due to winning of the right to be notified to when the red variation image 51 changes color. This is the time until it changes and becomes hidden as the SPSP reach shifts. On the other hand, the execution time of the special light emitting effect for the right to be notified is, for example, when the light emitting unit 24 starts emitting green light in response to winning of the right to be notified, then shifts to red light emission, and the symbol of the right to be notified is displayed. This is the time until the light emitting unit 24 turns off when the fluctuation is fixed and stopped. Therefore, in variation performance example 7, the execution time of the special light emission performance for the right to be notified is longer than the execution time for the object change performance for the right to be notified.

FIG. 82 is a timing chart of the special light emission effect and object change effect in variation effect example 7.
As shown in FIG. 82, there is a time difference between the timing of winning a prize to be notified and the time when the light emitting unit 24 completes transition to green light emission in the special light emission performance and the time until the object image completes transition to green light emission in the object change performance. is occurring.
In addition, there is a time difference between the second transition reference timing and the time when the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from green light emission to red light emission in the special light emission effect and the time when the object image completes the transition from green to red light emission in the object change effect. is occurring.

In variable effect example 7, the entire effect time from the start to the end of the special light emitting effect is the time from when the object change effect starts until it ends, and temporarily when the double eye temporary stop is performed. It is longer than the total time that the object image is displayed. In this way, as a whole, the execution time of the special light emission effect for the right to be notified is longer than the execution time for the object change effect for the right to be notified.

Also, for example, the green light emitting period in which the green light is emitted in the special light emitting effect is shorter than the green light emitting period in which the green light is emitted in the object change effect (after the transition to green is completed but before the transition to red is completed). There is. In this way, when focusing on a change to a specific color, the execution time of the special light emitting effect for the right to be notified is shorter than the execution time for the object change effect for the right to be notified.

(Variable effect example 8)
FIG. 83-1, FIG. 83-2, and FIG. 83-3 are explanatory diagrams of example 8 of variation presentation of decorative symbols performed by the presentation control section using the image display section.
Incidentally, variation effect example 8 is an example in which the pending image 52 is displayed but the variable image 51 is not displayed. For example, when a change in the special symbol is started for a right that has been reserved, the reserved image 52 corresponding to the right that has been reserved is erased (that is, the reservation is extinguished).

As shown in FIG. 83-1(1), it is assumed that the decorative pattern 61 has been fixed and stopped on the image display section 114 as the previous special pattern has finished changing. In this example, the combination of numbers of the fixed and stopped decorative pattern 61 is "135". Further, the combination of numbers of the small pattern 56 that has been fixed and stopped is also "135". In example 8 of variation performance, two pending images 52 are displayed on the image display section 114. Further, the image display unit 114 displays a pending number display 55 showing the number "2" indicating that there are two pending items.
Furthermore, the light emitting section 24 of the first starting port unit 20 is off.

Then, the variation of the special symbols based on the winning of the first starting hole 121 starts. At this time, as shown in FIG. 83-1 (2), the decorative pattern 61 starts changing the pattern along with the action at the start of the change. In the image display unit 114, the first pending image before the start of variation is erased, and the second pending image 52 before the start of variation is moved to the position of the first pending image 52. Note that the pending image 52 is displayed in white, which is the default color. Then, the small symbol 56 changes in synchronization with the start of variation of the special symbol. Further, the pending number display 55 becomes "1". Furthermore, the light emitting section 24 is turned off.

Then, as shown in FIG. 83-1(3), the decorative pattern 61 changes.
Furthermore, in the variable performance example 8, a game ball enters the first starting opening 121. In this variation performance example 8, the rights reserved based on winning at this time are the notification target in the advance determination performance. In this example, execution of the special light emission effect and the object change effect is started at the timing of winning the first start opening 121. In the variable performance example 8, the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from the non-emission state to the state in which it emits white light as a special light emission mode after a predetermined time has elapsed from the winning timing of the first starting port 121. do.
Note that when the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition from the non-emission state to the white light emission, the second pending image 52 is in the middle of the transition from the non-display state to the white blinking display. At this timing, it is difficult or impossible for the player to recognize that the second pending image 52 is displayed in blinking white color. Note that the pending number display 55 changes from "1" to "2".
Further, in the variation effect example 8, a predetermined sound effect is emitted from the speaker 156 in synchronization with the timing at which the light emitting section 24 emits light in a special light emission mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 83-1 (4), the second pending image 52 completes the transition from an undisplayed state to a blinking white display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the winning timing of the first start opening 121. do. In addition, in the variable effect example 8, the relationship between the time required for the transition of the emitted light color in the special light emission effect and the time required for the display transition in the object change effect is the same as in the variable effect example 6.

Then, the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 83-1 (4). The combination of numbers "684" of this decorative pattern 61 is an example of a combination when the judgment result of the special pattern lottery is a loss. Furthermore, the small symbols 56 stop when the special symbols stop changing. At this time, the small pattern 56 stops at "684", which is the same number combination as the decorative pattern 61.
Note that even if the special symbols stop changing, the light emitting section 24 continues to flash white light as a special light emitting effect. Furthermore, the second pending image 52 continues to flash white as an object change effect.

Thereafter, as the next special symbol starts to fluctuate, the decorative symbol 61 starts to fluctuate as shown in FIG. 83-1 (5). Furthermore, the first pending image 52 is erased on the image display section 114. Further, the second pending image 52 before the start of the fluctuation moves to the position of the first pending image 52. At this time, the first pending image 52 continues to flash white, which is the mode of the second pending image 52 before the start of the fluctuation.
In addition, in this variation performance example 8, a game ball enters the first start opening 121 at this timing. Therefore, the second pending image 52 is newly displayed. Note that the pending number display 55 appears to remain at "2" due to the expiration of the pending and the occurrence of the pending. Furthermore, the light emitting unit 24 continues to flash white.

Further, as shown in FIG. 83-1 (6), the decorative pattern 61 changes.
At this timing, in the variable performance example 8, a game ball is further entered into the first starting opening 121. Then, the third pending image 52 is newly displayed. Note that the pending number display 55 changes from "2" to "3".

After that, the fluctuation of the special symbol that had been fluctuating will stop. At this time, as shown in FIG. 83-2 (7), the decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped. The combination of numbers "312" of this decorative pattern 61 is an example of a combination when the judgment result of the special pattern lottery is a loss. Furthermore, the small symbols 56 stop when the special symbols stop changing. At this time, the small pattern 56 stops at "312", which is the same number combination as the decorative pattern 61.
Note that even if the special symbols stop changing, the light emitting section 24 continues to emit white light as a special light emitting effect. Furthermore, the first pending image 52 continues to flash white as an object change effect.

Then, as the next special symbol starts to fluctuate, the decorative symbol 61 starts to fluctuate as shown in FIG. 83-2 (8). Furthermore, the first pending image 52 is erased on the image display section 114. That is, the first pending image 52, which was flashing white before the start of the fluctuation, is erased. In other words, the change in the rights to be notified based on the advance judgment performance is started. Moreover, the object change effect is ended by erasing the pending image 52 to be notified. Further, the second pending image 52 before the start of the fluctuation moves to the position of the first pending image 52. Note that the pending number display 55 changes from "3" to "2".
In variation effect example 8, the light emitting unit 24 continues to flash white. In this way, in variable performance example 8, even after the pending image 52 that was blinking in white, which is the target of the notification, is erased, the light emitting unit 24 continues to notify the expectation level of winning the jackpot. It will be done.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83-2 (10), the number "6", which is the left decorative pattern 61, is temporarily stopped. At this time, the light emitting section 24 continues to blink with white light emission as a special light emission effect.
Then, as shown in FIG. 83-2 (11), the number "6" which is the right decorative pattern 61 temporarily stops, and the normal reach is established by temporarily stopping with the two decorative patterns 61 aligned. . At this time, the light emitting unit 24 continues blinking with white light emission as a special light emission effect.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83-2 (12), the process shifts to SP reach. At this time, the light emitting unit 24 stops blinking the white light. That is, the light emitting unit 24 ends the light emission as the special light emission effect. In this way, in variation performance example 8, the special light emission performance ends before the symbol variation for the right to be notified stops.
In addition, in variation performance example 8, the pending image 52 is hidden from view at the timing when the SP reach is reached.

Further, as shown in FIG. 83-3 (13), a stirring effect is performed to determine whether or not the middle decorative pattern 61 is aligned with the left decorative pattern 61 and the right decorative pattern 61.
Then, as shown in FIG. 83-3 (14), the decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped. The combination of numbers "676" of this decorative pattern 61 is an example of a combination when the judgment result of the special pattern lottery is a loss.
Further, in the variation performance example 8, the pending image 52 is displayed again at the timing when the decorative pattern 61 is fixed and stopped. In addition, although this example 8 of variation performance is a case in which the game ends up being a loss, even in the case of a jackpot, the hidden pending image 52 is displayed again at the timing when the decorative pattern 61 is finalized and stopped.

FIG. 84 is a timing chart of the special light emission effect and the object change effect in variable effect example 8.
As shown in FIG. 84, in variable performance example 8, from the timing of the winning of the notification target until the light emitting unit 24 completes the transition to white light emission in the special light emission performance, and the completion of the transition of the object image to white flashing in the object change performance. There is a time lag between the two.

In variable performance example 8, the entire performance time from the start to the end of the special light emission performance is longer than the entire performance time from the start to the end of the object change performance. In this way, as a whole, the execution time of the special light emission effect for the right to be notified is longer than the execution time for the object change effect for the right to be notified.

[Customer waiting performance]
Next, an example of a customer waiting effect in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of this embodiment will be explained.
FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram of the customer waiting effect of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 85, the variation of the decorative pattern 61 is displayed in a stopped state, and the customer waiting performance is started based on the customer waiting performance command set in S3207 of FIG.
In the customer waiting performance of this embodiment, a demo image 92, an attention-calling image 93, and a model name image 94 are sequentially reproduced.

The demo image 92 is an image related to the game of the pachinko game machine 100, such as an explanation of the pachinko game machine 100 and a demonstration of a predetermined performance with a high expectation of a jackpot.

Further, the attention-calling image 93 is an image for calling attention to the player regarding the pachinko gaming machine 100. The warning image 93 is visible to the player when the glass door frame 150G is closed, for example, and displays the content written on a sticker indicating information to the player (see FIG. 57). In the present embodiment, the caution image 93 displays the contents written on the contact caution sticker 71, the operation caution sticker 72, the optical caution sticker 75, and the fraud prevention sticker 76.

Furthermore, the model name image 94 is an image showing "CR Pachinko Star 777 ~Dream Dome Tour~", which is part of the model name of the pachinko game machine 100, as described above.
In the customer waiting performance, the screen transitions shown in FIGS. 85(a) to 85 are repeated until the customer waiting flag is turned OFF.

FIG. 86 is a screen for accepting settings regarding the content of the player's performance in the symbol variation performance of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Note that this reception screen is displayed according to the menu screen 571 (see FIG. 49).
In this example, in the symbol variation production, there is a first setting item 951 that accepts the setting of a production using the upper accessory 5, a second setting item 952 that accepts the setting of a production using the production lever 161L, the light emitting part 24, etc. and a third setting item 953 that accepts settings for effects using various lamps.

The first setting item 951 is an item that accepts the setting of the frequency with which the upper accessory 5 becomes in a protruding state in the symbol variation performance. The performance control unit 300 adjusts the selection probability of the variable performance pattern in which the upper accessory 5 is used among the plurality of variable performance patterns, according to the settings received from the player in the first setting item 951. That is, when the player desires to have the upper accessory 5 appear frequently, the performance control unit 300 makes it easier to select a variable performance pattern in which the upper accessory 5 is used. On the other hand, if the player desires that the upper accessory 5 hardly appear, the performance control unit 300 makes it difficult for the variable performance pattern in which the upper accessory 5 is used to be selected.

The second setting item 952 is an item that accepts setting of the frequency of instructing the player to operate the production lever 161L in the symbol variation production. The performance control unit 300 adjusts the selection probability of the variable performance pattern in which the performance lever 161L is used among the plurality of variable performance patterns, according to the settings received from the player in the second setting item 952.

The third setting item 953 is an item that accepts setting of the frequency of presentation using various lamps in the symbol variation presentation. The effect control unit 300 adjusts the selection probability of a variable effect pattern in which various light emitting lamps are used among the plurality of variable effect patterns, according to the setting received from the player in the third setting item 953.

The pachinko game machine 100 of this embodiment uses the upper accessory 5, the effect lever 161L, various light emitting lamps, etc. to perform various effects so that the player can enjoy the game. On the other hand, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a contact caution sticker 71, an operation caution sticker 72, a light caution sticker 75, and other components that alert players to the components involved in the performance. . In this way, in order to alert the player, it is preferable to be able to adjust the operation of the component that is the target of the alert. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 100, it is possible to set the operation of the component that is the target of attention.

Although various performances of the pachinko gaming machine 100 have been described above, it is possible to apply or combine all or part of the explained contents to other performances, controls, etc., even if there is no particular mention. In addition, although various embodiments and modifications have been mentioned, it is possible to apply or combine the contents of such embodiments and modifications to other performances, etc., even if there is no mention in this book. . Furthermore, it is possible to combine various embodiments and modifications, and to replace parts of them, even if this document does not mention them. For example, the various seals, seal-related components, and various effects in the first embodiment can be applied to the second embodiment. On the contrary, the various seals, the constituent parts related to the seals, and the various effects in the second embodiment can be applied to the first embodiment.

41...Caution sticker (an example of a warning means)
100...Pachinko game machine (an example of a game machine)
151...Handle (an example of the third operating means)
161B...Production button (an example of the second operation means)
161L...Production lever (an example of the first operating means)
300... Production control unit (an example of production control means)

Claims (1)

a first operating means operable by the player;
a second operating means that can be operated by a player and is different from the first operating means;
attention-calling means for calling attention to the second operation means to the player;
A production control means capable of executing a variable production in which a production pattern is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped ,
The warning means has warning characters that call attention to the action performed by the second operating means,
The performance control means is
A first operation effect that prompts an operation on the first operation means can be executed,
A second operation effect that prompts an operation on the second operation means can be executed,
When performing the first operation effect, a first specific image can be displayed,
When performing the second operation effect, a second specific image including a predetermined image imitating at least a portion of the second operation means can be displayed;
The display mode of the second specific image includes a first mode and a second mode that can be displayed after the first mode is displayed ,
The size of the display area of the second specific image of the second aspect is different from the size of the display area of the first specific image,
When the first specific image is displayed, a predetermined background image can be displayed,
When the second specific image is displayed, a specific background image can be displayed,
The action performed by the second operating means is performed after the second specific image starts to be displayed in the first mode and before the second specific image starts to be displayed in the second mode during execution of the variation effect. This is a possible action,
The display mode of the predetermined image includes a first display mode and a second display mode different from the first display mode,
When displaying the second specific image in the first mode, the predetermined image can be displayed in the first display mode and then displayed in the second display mode;
A gaming machine capable of displaying the predetermined image in a second display mode when displaying the second specific image in the second mode.